Home

DraftBoard Unlimited : Reference Guide

1. The status line allows you to specify the X Y and Z coordinates of the beginning the relative location of the end delta X and delta Y the line length and the angle from horizontal Once the line segment is created line Length is the selected status box Parallel Lines Tool This tool constructs lines parallel to existing lines Use one of the following methods for creating parallel lines Using the Parallel Lines tool Select the Parallel Lines tool drag the line press to select the line and release to indicate the position for the parallel line A rubberband line moves with the pointer Or Select the Parallel Lines tool click the line you want to duplicate and then enter a delta distance in the status line and press Enter This method does not allow you to control on which side of the original line the new line is drawn The status box allows you to specify the distance between the selected line and the parallel line Smart Wall Tool This tool works in much the same way as the Single Line tool except that it draws double lines or walls Walls created on the same layer are automatically trimmed to where they touch or intersect Overlapping lines are automatically trimmed at the intersections As you drag the mouse the defining side of the wall falls on the con struction line you drag along The other side of the wall automatically fills in at the t
2. Natural Plant Materials Wood Wood horizontal grain vertical grain Wood Materials Wood end cut Tar Metal Steel alloy Steel non alloy Cast iron Light metal Heavy metal Wa LE Cy Synthetic Material Rubber Eelastic materials Duroplastic Thermoplastic N gt SO x b i lt gt P EX SO SG he N OS x Se RER Fluids Water Oil Fuel Solids 309 Appendix 310 DraftBoard ini The DraftBoard ini file contains all default settings DraftBoard uses for any new drawing The DraftBoard ini file is an ASCII text file that can be opened and edited with any text editor To make changes to the DraftBoard ini file open it from any text editor and make the desired changes Save the file as a text file The next time DraftBoard is launched it will take account for the new setting made in the DraftBoard ini file The DraftBoard ini file contains the following sections User This section contains the Name of the registered user and the registered company Name Company Both names will be automatically entered when installing Draft Board Defaults In this section you can enter the Path and Name for the DraftBoard Preferences file Prefs vlm as follows
3. Screen mand will work correctly lt gt but the result will be Q unpredictable in most cas es Unfolded view folding line Unfolding a View 1 Select the Unfold View command in the Views menu 2 Click the endpoints of the line to unfold on You don t need an actual The active view window shows the view unfolded 90 from the Ei you can as well drag a vector line you specify View the Plane This command in the Views menu rotates the view orientation in the active view window to match the work plane The view changes so the work plane becomes horizontal on the screen The y direction of the work plane becomes vertical and the z direction of the work plane becomes the ine of sight coming directly out of the screen To leave this view orientation select a view from the Trackball menu or the Views submenu or use the Trackball for free rotation 259 3D Basics Important If you flatten a view containing a surfaced model displayed in the hid den line mode not only the visible object edges will be flattened but the original geometry as well The visible edges will be placed on the current layer while the original geometry will be placed on the layer Wireframe The layer Wire frame will be automatically created and hidden It must be displayed for the dimensioning of circles since it is not possible to dimension the visible edges but only the original geom etry See as well under Di
4. File Locking works only if there exists a file named public key on the File Server on the network This Public key file can be created with any text editor The Public key file can be even empty it should be only placed in the main directory of the File Server DISPLAYED FONTS This section let you specify the number of fonts that will be displayed in the Font submenu from the Text menu Fonts that do not show up in this menu can be accessed in the Other dialog box If you specify MaxFonts 30 a maximum number of 30 fonts will be displayed Appendix SCREEN This option let you set the size of the screen that DraftBoard opens to Screen FULL opens to a maximized window Screen Standard opens to the standard size which is almost maximized but with room for icons at the bottom If no value is specified the screens opens to the standard size RecentFiles The maximum number of files that can be displayed in the Recent File List at the end of the File menu is 8 Files 6 Symbol This section contains the path of the Symbol folder relative to the DraftBoard folder VStandard Symbols All further paths specified describe the absolute paths for the symbol palettes in case you added them to the Utility menu using the Add command in the Utility menu VMech C Programs DraftBoard Symbols Engineering VArch C Programs DraftBoard Symbols Architecture SymTab This section contains the position of the Parameter d
5. 2 Move the pointer to the drawing area and click to set the starting point of the line 3 Move the pointer to the desired location for the endpoint of the line and click x Click at the beginning point of the line x Click at the endpoint of the line The line is drawn between the two points Immediately after construction you can make changes in the Sta tus Line to alter the length or position of the line If the geometry isn t satisfactory just press the Backspace key Creating a line by dragging 1 Click the Single Line tool in the Tool palette 2 Move the pointer into the drawing area 3 Press and hold down the mouse button at the desired location for the starting point of the line 4 With the mouse button still held down move the mouse to the desired location for the endpoint of the line Press and hold the mouse button at the starting point of the line Drag the mouse until the line is the length you want Release the mouse button Creating Geometry 5 Release the mouse button to set the endpoint Immediately after construction you can make changes in the Status Line to alter the length or position of the line If the geometry is not satisfactory just press the Backspace key Drafting Aids For creating geometry objects the DraftBoard user interface provides the following drafting aids e Drawing area e Message Line e Smart Mouse Pointer e Status Line e Drawing Tools D
6. The geometry within view windows is associative since they are displaying all the same model When you make a change in one window the change effects the model and therefore the geometry in all views There exist two different methods for creating 3D wireframe models 1 Start the model creation on the drawing sheet and add views later using the Detail View tool for editing and viewing the model from different angles 2 Useaso called View Layout from the beginning and create the model in different view windows simultaneously Using the first method you open a new drawing and create the geometry on an empty sheet With the Trackball or one of the View commands you can rotate your model and edit it from different angles as long as you have not created any detail view windows As soon as you place a detail view windows on the sheet the Sheet View is fixed in the Top view while the detail views can display different view orientations of your geometry 3D Model space Detail View Camera Sheet Camera 3D Model Sheet Camera is now rigidly fixed and parallel aligned to the sheet current sheet lt a gt AR SS i Is J Sy Model 1 with 1 additional active trimetric view window This method has the disadvantage that the Sheet View of your geometry may overlap the view windows on the sheet To avoid this problem you could assign the sheet to a new model by creating a new Model 2 u
7. both Splines The Function f x f x y dialog box allows the following settings f x f x y Start x End x Steps Connect Points In this entry field you enter the mathematical definition for a function of x In this entry field you enter the mathematical definition for a function of x y In the Start x entry field you enter the Startpoint for the x coordinate of the function that you can specify with a mouse click on the drawing area In case the F x y option is marked you must enter the Startpoint for the x and y coordi nate of the function the you can as well speci fy with a mouse click on the drawing area In the End x entry field you enter the Endpoint for the x coordinate of the function that you can specify with a mouse click on the drawing area In case the F x y option is marked you must enter the Endpoint for the x and y coordi nate of the function the you can as well speci fy with a mouse click on the drawing area In this entry field you specify the number of curve points you want to calculate When this option is marked you can choose in case the function was defined dependent on x if the calculated curve points should be connected along x with a Spline or Line segments Of in case the function was defined dependent on x and y if the calculated curve points should be connected only along x or only along y letters and into the Start X and End
8. v Outline Visible Hidden Arrowheads Dash Arrow Size Center Arrow at Start Phantom Arrow at End Dimension Balloon Construction Pattern Pen Styles Crosshatch Hatch Strg H Solid Fill Fill Strg B The current pen style is checked on the Pen menu The default pen style is Outline solid black lines 0 35 mm wide You can change to a different pen style in the Style submenu You can change an individual characteristic of the current pen in the Pen submenus Color Weight and Pattern Changing the current Pen 1 Select the pen style you want to use from the Style submenu in the Pen menu All selected objects will be drawn in the new pen style as will all future lines until you end the current DraftBoard session ot select a new pen style Pen Indicator You can also use the Pen Indication pop up box at the lower left of the drawing area to specify the current pen v Outline Yisible Hidden Dash Center Phantom Dimension Balloon Construction Changing the current pen with the Pen Indicator 1 Press the mouse button on the Pen Indicator box The Pens menu displays listing all specified Pen Styles 2 Drag to the Pen Style you want to make the current pen and release the mouse button The selected pen is activated and displayed in the Pen Indicator 45 Setting the Environment If you want to change the characteristic of a pen permanently use the Edit Style command from t
9. 5 Click the Apply button if you want to assign the new settings to selected dimensions All selected dimensions are redrawn and reflect the new appearance set in the dimension editor 6 Close the Dimension Editor by clicking the Close box in the upper left corner of the Dimension Editor Restoring a dimension standard 1 Choose Preferences in the Dimension menu The dimension editor is displayed 2 In the Standards pop up menu drag to the standard you want to restore to its default settings Dimensions 3 Click the Default button All settings of the selected standard are restored to its default values 4 Close the Dimension Editor by clicking the Close box in the upper left corner of the Dimension Editor Standards and modifications All modifications are assigned to the current standard When you want to edit only some selected dimensions you have to select the standard again after you have clicked the Apply button to restore its original settings Precision The Precision pop up menus in the Dimension Editor allows you to set the number of decimal places for dimensions and tolerances Precision Dimension Tolerances Linear Linear The Precision of angular Angular Ei Angular dimensions can be set to ooo degrees minutes and 3 seconds 4 Set the Precision 1 Choose Preferences in the Dimension menu The Dimension Editor is displayed 2 Set the number of decimal places for inear and angular d
10. Name Status Ready Type Xerox 4517 PostScript Level 2 Where 4Plato 4517 Comment Paper Orientation Size Ad iv n Portrait Source Upper Tray lv O Landscape 2 Choose your printer in the Specific Printer field if it is not installed as the Default Printer 3 Select the paper size from the Paper Size pop up menu 4 Select the paper source from the Paper Source pop up menu 5 Specify the Orientation Portrait or Landscape 6 Click the Option button Specify in the displayed dialog box if you want to print your drawing to a printer or save it to a file 7 Click the OK button Page Setup This command in the File menu allows you to select a printer set the page size orientation and other options Setting up the page 1 Select the plotter or printer you will use Contact Technical Support if you need help setting up a plotter Page Setup for HP 7576A Page Size Orientation He 2 Select the Page Size from the Page Size pop up menu 3 Specify the Orientation 4 Click the OK button Checking the View Scale After you have specified the paper format you must check if the objects of your drawing are too large or too small in relation to the selected paper format and if its view has to be scaled to fit on the specified paper size The Preview Layout command in the File menu allows you to check the size ratio between the objects and the specified paper size
11. Preview Layout This command in the File menu displays the printing area of the selected paper at its true size and selected orientation If you have not specified a printing plotting size the default size is used If the drawing does not fit into the displayed rectangle representing the printing area of the selected paper size you must scale the drawing Printing Plotting region The printing plotting region is displayed when choosing the Preview Layout command and the Drawing size command With both commands a grey rectangle appears in the drawing area This rectangle represents the printing plotting region of the page so you can see how your drawing fits the paper size The plotting region is smaller than the actual page size because most print ers and plotters cannot plot to the edge of the paper If you want to see the plottable outline all the time click the Always Display button Pa Paper Size Printing Plotting Region DraftBoard shows always the printable area When the boundary of the printing plotting region appears you can drag the boundary rectangle around the drawing area When you choose the Preview Layout command again or select any tool from the tool palette the Printing plotting region disappears Basic Drafting If the grey boundary representing the page size is not visible after scaling choose Zoom all while the Drawing Size dialog box is displayed The printing plotting region is
12. Rectangles to the work plane Splines Fillets and Chamfers Splines have no 3D restrictions Fillets and Chamfers are constructed in the plane defined by the selected entities Editing Objects in 3D The Simple Trim tool the Relimit tool and the Segment tool work independent from the current work plane as in 2D The Transformation tools behave as follows Move Object geometry can be moved in any direction Rotate Selected geometry can be rotated around a specified point parallel to the z axis of the current work plane Expand Shrink Object geometry can be scaled in any direction Stretch Object geometry can be stretched in any direction Mirror Selected geometry can be mirrored parallel to the current work plane along a specified mirror axis Text and Dimensions Text and Dimensions will be always created on the current work plane of the active view Therefore you should set the work plane to correspond to the view before you begin adding text or dimensions in a view 2 000 ee 1 500 er Dimensions are placed parallel to the work plane 2 Point Center Ellipses and Opposite Point All rectangles and polygons will be created parallel 3D Modelling The Tracer tool does not work with 3D objects Tangent lines tangent only to one object can be creat ed only with objects on the work plane at the origin See as well Specifying the position of a work plane in this chapter
13. This tool draws a circle tangent to the two objects you indicate Using the Tangent Point Circle tool 1 Click the objects to which the circle is to be tangent 2 You can enter a diameter for the circle in the status box 8 5 Ellips e Tools A These tools on the tool palette construct ellipses inscribed within an adic invisible rectangle or parallelogram The 2 Point Center Ellipse uses the center point and one corner location of the rectangle The Opposite Corner Ellipse uses opposite corners of a rectangle The 3 Point Center Ellipse uses the center point the midpoint of a side and the corner of the parallelogram The 3 Corner Ellipse uses three corners on a parallelogram You can click or drag to create the ellipse Dragging creates a rubberband ellipse so you can see the ellipse before it is drawn The ellipse is drawn with the current pen specifications for color weight and pattern 2 Point Center Ellipse Tool This tool constructs an ellipse inscribed within the rectangle calculated from the two specified points the center point and one corner of the rectangle Using the 2 Point Center Ellipse tool 1 Indicate the center of the ellipse 2 Indicate the corner of the rectangle defining the ellipse If the two points are on the vertical or horizontal axis a straight line is drawn You can create a copy of the last ellipse by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Opt
14. geometry y SS If the tool uses three points Vork Piane ESE gt Center Point Circle in to define the geometry IA work plane gt the geometry will be on the Objects that can be created without changing the work plane plane defined by the three points 265 3D Modelling If you want to see the Triad at the Origin 0 0 0 set the Grid Spacing to 0 in the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu 266 Only if you are creating geometry that is not parallel to the current work plane and if you are using a tool that requires only two points for creation such as the Center Point Circle Rectangle or 2 Point Ellipse you need to modify the orientation of the work plane to properly place the geometry The exception to this rule are Lines and NURB Splines that can be created independent from the orientation and location of the current work plane new work plane required Se AA Center Point Circle a _ hot parallel to the existing geometry work plane e original AT os work plane ke as For objects not parallel to the current work plane and requiring two points for creation the orientation of the work plane must be modified Differences between Work Plane and Views When you change the orientation of the Work Plane the View orientation remains unchanged The view orientation specifies the viewing angle the direction you look at your geometry while the orientation of the work plane determines the plane o
15. 3 Mark the Attribute option 4 Select the option only selected if you want to export attributes only from selected objects and not from the entire drawing 5 Click the OK button and provide a file name and location The Item Numbers and attributes of the entire drawing or of the selected objects only will be exported into an ASCII file 241 3D Basics 3D Models Three Dimensional Work Space Model Views Creating 2D Working Drawings 3D Basics 3D Basics The process of moving from 2D to 3D geometry creation is relatively seamless since DraftBoard offers a smooth transition from 2D to 3D All of the tools someone would use to create 2D geometry in DraftBoard would also be used to create 3D geometry However there are some tools features and concepts that are specific to 3D such as the Setting of the 3D environment e the concept of Work Planes e the creation and visualization of three dimensional Surface Models that can be exported as Volume Models This chapter covers the setup of the three dimensional work space multiple model views and the derivation of two dimensional draftings from these 3D Models 3D Models Two dimensional draftings exists mainly of the geometry that makes up the edges of an object plus some additional informations such as Hatches Text and Dimensions In three dimensional design objects that define only the edges of a part are called Wireframe models But Wireframe Models are on
16. 4 Click the Rename button 5 Click the OK button The Define Plane dialog box is closed and the new plane is added to the Planes submenu in the 3D menu By definition 1 Select the Define Plane command in the 3D menu The Define Plane dialog box is displayed 2 Click the New button The Redefine Plane dialog box displays and the Origin specification is already highlighted 3 On the drawing area click the location for the new origin The first Right entry box is selected 4 Click a location on the positive x axis on the drawing area The first Up entry box ts selected 5 Click a location on the positive y axis on the drawing area 6 Click the OK button The Redefine Plane dialog box is closed and the new plane is defined and added to the Planes submenu in the 3D menu You can rename the new plane named Plane 1 using the Rename button in the Define Plane dialog box Redefining a plane Two different methods exist for redefining a plane By a temporary plane 1 2 Define a temporary plane using the 3 Point Plane command Select the Define Plane command in the 3D menu The Define Plane dialog box is displayed listing the temporary plane in the Planes list box Delete the plane of which you want to change the orientation Select the TempPlane in the Planes list box and rename the plane with the name of the deleted plane in the Rename entry box Click the Rename button Click the OK button The plane is re
17. DraftBoard Un ted Edition Reference Guide Align y Intersection Align x English Edition DraftBoard Unlimited Edition Manual Version DBU45U11E05 November 2005 Development Concepts Technology Co Ltd Documentation Concepts Technology Co Ltd DraftBoard and DraftBoard Unlimited are trademarks of Concepts Technology Co Ltd Other trademarks and product names are trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective holders Copyright O 2005 Concepts Technology Co Ltd All rights reserved POSH POSH GmbH Postfach 1825 63888 Miltenberg www draftboard de Table of Contents Documentation Manda LOU iipon Retetence Gude iesse en ee ee Creating Geometry Diao Tecnos etico liceo MA one aL A O tan E TA Diane TOO mere een Cy eer Tn ree E The Drawing Assistant SIGE O Dnt OMS AL KOM KO aoea Drawing Assistant Construction Lines Permanent Construction Lines cuina ida Setting the Environment o nee re eens rer ne rrr er rer Sea Gab nes Dispone nennen SO PS ee A Selecting Objects aa atera Selecione Selector Process ar triada 13 14 T3 17 35 35 38 39 45 45 46 54 57 57 58 59 Editing Objects 81 Ile Tool een 81 Mona Object wib Tool ieser 86 Copy Object aiie TOO apa o 87 Ol AAA nat 88 ala rs E A O 89 Dur en ODJ CE rta capta 90 Changing the Characteristics Of Object vencio 94 nac OT Eee 95 Text Fills and Hatches
18. PrefFile c Programs DraftBoard prefs vlm You only should specify a path for the Preferences file in case you don t want to use the Preferences file in the DraftBoard folder Creating a individual Preference files for a Network version When you want to create an individual Preference file for each user of a DraftBoard network version you proceed as follows 1 Create on the Network Server a folder for example named Preference for all Preference files 2 Create folders for each user in this folder 3 Copy the files DraftBoard ini and Prefs vlm in each folder 4 Specify in each DraftBoard ini file in the Default section the Path for the Preference file for the specific user PrefFile d Preferences Smith prefs vlm where Preferences in this example is the name of the general Preferences folder and Smith the folder name of one user 5 Select the DraftBoard Program Icon on the Windows Desktop 6 Press the right mouse button and select Properties in the displayed menu 7 Enter in the Target entry box behind DraftBoard exe the path for the DraftBoard ini file for the respective user as follows C Programs DraftBoard DraftBoard exe i d Preferences Smith DraftBoard ini FILE LOCKING FileLock ON When File Locking is activated on all users can access a file in a network but only the user who opened the file first has the right to save this file For a single user license File Locking should be deactivated off
19. Tangent lines tangent to two objects can be created on any work plane as long as both ob jects are on the same work plane Before you rotate an object it is recommended to define a plane with the 3 Point Plane command perpendicular to the plane where the rotation point is located Another elegant method for dimensioning 3D objects is to align the face of the ob ject you want to dimension parallel to the screen and then to use the Set Plane to Screen command 211 3D Modelling The Tracing tool does not work with three dimen sional objects Be aware that if you get errors back the highlight ed lines and points are drawn right on the work plane even though the geometry may not be drawn on the work plane 218 Dimensioning in 3D All linear dimensions are placed parallel to the current work plane All other dimensions behave as follows Point to Point Point to Point dimensions are placed parallel to the current work plane Perpendicular Perpendicular dimensions are created in the plane of the baseline Radial and Diametral Radia and Diametral dimensions are created in the plane of the arc circle or fillet Anglular Angular dimensions are created in the plane of the two lines whose angle is measured GD amp T GDe gt T dimensions Welding and Surface symbols are placed parallel to the current work plane Hidden Lines When you want to dimension surfaced objects in the Hidden Lines view mode you h
20. Tol Text size In this entry field you specify the tex size for tolerances as a percentage of the dimension text size temp Text When this option is checked the arrow size of the related dimension lines will be adjusted when the tex size is arrow size modified The default arrow size for dimension lines is normally only increased or reduced while scaling a drawing Using very large or small dimension text makes it sometimes necessary to adjust the arrow size to the selected tex size This option is deactivated by default and can be used only for selected dimensions using the Apply button Position This pop up menu allows you to set the posztion of dimension text for the selected standard and for all selected and future dimensions You can choose from the following options e horizontal e over e break in e under The first option determines if the dimension text is always displayed horizontally The following three options determine if the dimension text is placed above over in between break in or below under the a gt 869 horizontal er o 4 4 o break in i above dimension line Modifying dimension text 1 Select all dimensions you want to modify If no dimensions are selected all changes are valid for future dimensions Choose Preferences in the Dimension menu to display the Dimension Editor Drag in the Standard pop up menu to the standard you want to modify Click the DIM Text bu
21. Using the Flatten View command Text and Hatches will be handled such as object geometry Be aware that dimensions are not any more automatically adjusted in the view window when you edit the model since the model is disassociated from the detail view Dimensions in the flattened view are only automatically adjusted when you edit the flattened object geometry Flatten all Views Often Detail views and the Sheet view show different models When exporting drawings only one model can be exported therefore detail views can get lost This can be avoided with the Flatten all Views command When you select this command the following dialog window is displayed Flatten all views disassociates the N views from the model and places the geometry on the sheet Do you still want to flatten the views Cancel This note warns you that all detail views will be disassociated from the model and therefore will loose their associativity When exporting a drawings with more than one model using the ex port formats EMF WMF PNG DXF DWG you will automatically be offered to flatten all views if you want to export all detail views View Window The view window includes a Title bar Size box and pull down menu only when the detail view is active Detail View menu Title bar Detail View menu Title bar Z oy Size box FE You can drag the view around by the title bar and resize the window by dragging the
22. are you entitled to receive Telephone product support and Free updates Help The integrated Online Manual provides a complete description of the program s many features commands and tools and a direct access to the Tutorial Creating Geometry Drawing Techniques Drafting Aids Drawing Tools Creating Geometry Creating Geometry This chapter describes how to create the geometric objects that are You will find more about the building blocks for your designs It also describes how the Drawing the functionality of the Drawing Assistant in Assistant helps you design faster and easier The following topics are Chapter 3 contained in this chapter e Drawing Techniques e Drafting Aids e Drawing Tools This chapter requires that you know how to open or save a file or how to use a Zoom tool If you are unfamiliar with Windows programs see the Getting Started section in the Tutorial Function Palette Drawing begins with the Tool palette located at the left of the Draft Board drawing area shown below DraftBoard Unlimited Untitled 1 B File Edit Layout Arrange Pen Text Dimension Views 3D Utilities Modules Help Select Select Shift Extend Ctrl Copy The Tool palette has six subpalettes of tools that you can use to create geometric objects These six tools are the drawing tools 13 Creating Geometry If you use the clicking method to draw a line no rubberband line guides you Notice
23. 9 Enter a value for the specified angle type 10 Click OK Offset This command in the Edit menu allows you to create offsets from lines ares circles ellipses and splines Original Spline Offset Spline When you select the Offset command in the Edit menu the following dialog box is displayed Offset Offset Distance Ref point to define offset direction The Offset dialog box contains the following settings Offset Distance The offset distance is the distance away from the original geometry that the new geometry will be created For multiple offsets additional values may be entered manually into the Offset Distance field separated by semicolons Ref The X and Y values can be filled in manually or indicated by a mouse click on the drawing area offset from the object the Z value must be 0 The point clicked determines which side of the object the offset should be performed Clicking the Options button displays the following dialog box Options Tolerance Max Iteration 3s C Mitered Joint LI Grouped The Options dialog box contains the following settings Tolerance For Spline and Ellipse objects the offset distance is approximated by a spline By setting a Tolerance for this type of object you can determine how accurate the offset is relative to its theoretical position Max Iteration DraftBoard will iterate when calculating the offset of Spline and Ellipse objects to im
24. Basic Drafting Certain Styles are only available on the Macintosh not under Windows 104 However when you type in a value only possible in the Size box the change becomes effective only until you do another selection or continue to work on the drawing area You can leave this dialog box open to assign other character formats If you want to close this dialog box you have to double click the Close box in the upper left corner of the dialog box The character format you specify stays in effect until you choose another character format Printing TrueType Fonts on Pen Plotters When you want to print TrueType Fonts on pen plotters you must use a WinLINE Plus Plotter Driver Look for more information about WinLINE Plus in the Internet under www winline com Font Sizes and ANSI Standards A typical font specified for 7 0 mm may produce a character that is only 3 5 mm The variation depends on the proportional spacing of the font If you want a font set to exact specifications use a Plotter font which conforms to ANSI standards Size This command in the Text menu sets the font size for the selected text or for future text entries in the current document The size can be specified as either points or units as defined in the Units dialog box of the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu Text Font A 9 Punkt 9 Punkt Bi 10 10 v 12 12 14 14 18 18 24 24 36 36 48 48 3 5 mm 0 125 Zoll 5 0 0 14 7 0 0 156 10 0 0
25. Center Point Arc Tool This tool draws an arc from three points the center point arc beginning point and arc endpoint Using the Center Point Arc tool 1 Click the center point of the arc 2 Click the radius and beginning of the arc 3 Drag the extent of the atc pressing at the beginning point of the arc and releasing at the endpoint You can simply click all three points but the rubberband arc doesn t appear when you use this method To construct an arc greater than 180 you must drag rather than click the endpoint x Y IR A dA The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center of the arc the ength of the radius the starting angle from horizontal and the delta angle from the start Radius is the selected status box 3 Point Arc Tool O This tool draws an arc through the points you select Using the 3 Point Arc tool 1 Click the first position on the arc 2 Drag ot click the second and third positions Dragging displays the rubberband atc The arc is drawn from the first position that you indicate in the direction of the next point If you click on an object while holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key the arc is drawn tangent to the specified object rather than through the point You may combine the placement of points to create an arc through a specific point of one object and tangent to an other object or an arc tangent to three
26. Once you have constructed objects you may want to make changes One of the basic rules of DraftBoard says that you must first select an object before you can edit 1t Just as you first have to select a drawing tool from the Tool palette before you can start drawing an object must first be selected before a function can be applied Modifying an object is always a two step process e Select the object e Specify the action for the selected object For example you could select a circle and then change the pen style to Center to indicate a bolt hole circle This chapter deals with selecting both objects and points since they behave in different ways Objects A single piece of geometry for example a point or a line is an object Single me Object A line is an object Several objects that have been grouped with the Group command ate also an object For example the four lines of a Single Line rectangle are four objects If you group them DraftBoard treats them as a single object A rectangle is 4 l lines 4 objects is a single object I I A grouped rectangle Ungrouped Grouped Objects Objects A point is an object too Every type of geometry contains two or more The Starting and Ending points sometimes called control points A line has two control points point of a circle is dis played by the Drawing As one at the beginning and one at the end of the line If you select an sistant as Vertex object and
27. Open the vlb file in the new library folder using a Text editor or Spreadsheet The file contains several Control commands and set in parentheses at the beginning of each line the Symbol name and at the end of each line the path of the symbol including its file name DIN cvn lt lt Din125b cvn C CAD Vel30b3 Deutsch DIN Din125b vim Din466d cvn C CAD Vel30b3 Deutsch DIN Din466d vim gt gt def 21 Delete in each line the Symbol path Only the File name should remain in parentheses DIN cvn lt lt Din125b cvn Din125b vim Din466d cvn Din466d vim gt gt def 22 Save the file as ASCII file with the file extension vlb 23 Now you can distribute the newly created symbol folder including all symbols and the vlb file 24 When this folder is copied to another computer this library can be added using the Add library command Handling of Symbol libraries The Symbolmanager is the perfect tool for placing and editing symbols Since the Symbolmanager handles exclusively symbol libraries it is recommended to group often used symbols into symbol libraries When the Symbolmanager is displayed you can place any number of symbols replace and edit Norm Parts and offset the symbol nsertion point by a specified distance and angle Symbolmanager When you choose this command from the Symbols submenu in the File menu the Symbolmanager is displayed Symbols The Symbolmanager checks when loading a l
28. Surface Runout 14 Total Runout All elements of a surface of revolution associated with a datum axis Total Surface Runout Diameter The second section of the feature control frame specifies whether the tolerance applies to a circular zone If it does you should specify the diameter symbol from the pop up menu Position Tolerance The third section of the feature control frame defines the tolerance allowed under the stated conditions Material Condition The fourth section of the feature control frame provides the material condition for limiting the tolerance You can use any of three material conditions Maximum Least and Regardless of Feature Size Maximum Material Condition Maximum Material Condition MMC indicates that a feature contains the maximum amount of material within the specified tolerance limit For drilling holes MMC means that the drill bit is accurate it drills the smallest hole For shafts MMC results in the largest dimension 315 310 amp 0 002 MA B C B In the example above this material condition symbol means that the tolerance in the Feature Control Frame 002 applies to the location of the smallest hole 310 in this case As the hole size nears its upper limit 315 the location of the hole increases from 002 to 007 the tolerance
29. To show points for an individual selection use the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu Unselected point Selected point e a A line without points displayed A line with points displayed Displaying points 1 Select the geometry 2 Choose Show Hide Points from the Layout menu to toggle the display of points on and off To turn off the point display once the points for an object are showing you must select the object again and choose either Show Hide Points from the Layout menu or the Control Points option in the Edit Objects dialog box Showing and Hiding Points with Stroke When you hold down the Shift and Ctrl key and click an object the display of the object s points toggles on or off If the points are hidden when you click the object the points will be displayed Selecting invisible points You can select a control point whether the points are visible or not however note that Selectable Points in the Edit menu must be on displaying the Y symbol in the menu To select points if points are not visible 1 Click the Selection tool 2 Drag a selection marquee around the location of the point The selected point displays as a square Unselected point Selected point _ _ xs Selecting visible points To select points if they are visible 1 Click the Selection tool 2 Click the point The selected point displays as a square Selectable Points This command in the Edit menu giv
30. ating Balloon Symbols manually You can enter text and the diameter of the balloon in the Status Line Center Mark This tool marks the center of a circle arc or fillet To mark the center of a circle arc or fillet click near it the Drawing Assistant must show ON FE Dimension Settings Scaling a drawing using the Drawing Size or Sheet Into View command affects always the dimension appearance regardless of the specified dimension settings 125 Dimensions A detailed description about Scaling you find in Chapter 9 Basic Drafting of this manual When you select a new standard the dimension editor displays the related settings You can save the selected standard permanently with the Save Preferences command from the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu All modifications made are only valid for the current standard When you want to edit only some selected dimensions you must select the current standard again after you clicked the Apply button 126 Dimension Appearance When scaling a drawing all exzsting dimensions are scaled as well Only dimensions placed after scaling a drawing are displayed at their specified text size and are not adjusted to the current view scale Dimensions are always displayed correctly at their true size when e the option keep dimension text size in the Drawing Size dialog box is checked while scaling e a drawing is dimensioned after scaling e or
31. contained in the Recent File List can be set for Windows in the Draft Board ini file and in the Recent Ist file for the Mac intosh For more information consult the Customization section in the Setting the Environment chapter Note You should save fre quently Even though your drawing appears on the screen it is not stored on the disk until you save it Hours of work can be lost because of a power failure It is also important to save before performing any intri cate multistep manoeuvre In that way if the result is not exactly what you had hoped you can abandon the file by closing it without Saving The default setting is DraftBoard file It s also possible that your company makes periodic backups of your folders and you can go back to a previous version that way 187 DraftBoard Documents If you want to save these settings permanently you have to Save Preferences in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu It is also possible to import documents of native format type 188 Selecting the AutoSave command displays the following dialog box d AutoSave O On Off AutoSave Interval 15 Minutes In the AutoSave dialog box you can turn AutoSave On or Off and specify the time interval in minutes between AutoS aves At the specified interval DraftBoard creates an AutoSave file with the base of the original file name and a SAV extension in the same directory or folder
32. endpoint right endpoint If you dimension intersecting lines don t mix up the intersection with the midpoint of the lines To dimension this angle you have to click here al midpoints intersection If the lines don t meet the angle is measured from the invisible extension of the lines The extension appears as part of the dimension Dimensions a IN lt Click here x Click here Click lt lt Va When the dimension text appears you can drag it to a new location when you release the mouse button the dimension and extension lines are redrawn Arc Length Dimension Tool S This tool measures the length of an arc To use it you have to move The Arc Length Dimen the cursor to the arc to be measured and click on the following points sion tool does not put wit ness lines perpendicular to e one end of the arc the arc for angles less than y e the middle of the arc and 80 degrees the opposite end of the arc as if you were creating a three point arc Like other dimensions you A 500 can manipulate the text by changing its size or font using the Dimension Editor You can move the text by dragging it to the desired position Balloon Symbol Opa oo This tool attaches a Balloon symbol to geometry placed in the location you click All Balloon Symbols use as line style Balloon There fore you should use this line style as well when cre
33. imports only the needed variables and values 204 Using the Resolve command with parametrics 1 Create the geometry 2 Dimension all geometry by using variables constant values and expressions You must dimension the essential related geometry so DraftBoard can reconstruct the geometry Note that Draft Board cannot identify parallel or colinear lines e Select the appropriate dimensioning tool Click the geometry to be dimensioned e Enter an expression such as 1 5 x x 3 y in the text box in the status line e Press Enter 3 Select the geometry and dimensions to be resolved 4 Choose Resolve from in the Parametrics submenu of the Edit menu 5 If necessary enter the values you want to assign to the variables You can enter mathematical expressions fractions and decimals in the entry boxes of the Resolve dialog box You can use differ ent units as long as you are specific for example 276 6 Optional step If you want to anchor a point on the geometry at a particular location click the point The point remains in the same location after you resolve the geometry An example appears later in this section 7 Click the OK button If the parametric dimensions defined the geometry properly the geometry is redrawn as you specified The dimensions remain as variable expressions If DraftBoard cannot resolve the parametrics a message box displays information about the problem The Param
34. m Tr a _ Modelt u Rectangle 11 Arrange the two view windows around the ellipse and rearrange the In order to select overlap ping view windows Auto Front must be deactivated as it is described in the Viewing Geometry chapter 12 rectangle and the circle with the Zoom commands in the Arrange menu like in the following graphic Activate the sheet and deactivate the command Show View Boundaries in the Views pull down menu DraftBoard Documents Handling Documents Data Exchange DraftBoard Documents DraftBoard Documents This chapter describes the handling and administration of Files in DraftBoard called drawings and the data exchange with other programs Using Documents A document is a DraftBoard file Whenever you open Draft Board or choose New from the File menu a new document appears in its window Working with multiple Documents In DraftBoard you can open and edit several drawings simultaneously Each Drawing is displayed in its own window that can be reduced to an icon near the lower left corner of the DraftBoard work space To close move or resize a drawing you use the control buttons in the title bar of each window ES DraftBoard Unlimited ok File Edit Layout Arrange Pen Text Dimension Views 3D Utilities Modules Help 3 Untitled 1 R Select Select Shift Extend Ctrl Copy gt Layer w Outline y Say ene So Windows The Windows subme
35. show grid command 58 sheets show palette command 66 show points command 76 shrink tool 85 simple trim tool 83 single line tool 17 size text 104 SLP 193 195 297 smart pointer 15 smart wall tool 19 snap command 37 snap points keyboard 36 solid fill 110 solid models 251 spacing text 105 spline import 189 splines editing 28 locking 28 tools 26 unlocking 28 standard views 253 status line 16 altering geometry 16 118 and drawing tools 16 and dimensions creating additional geometry 17 creating geometry offset 17 creating new geometry 17 STL 195 stretch tool 85 stroke commands stroke construction lines 39 zooming 148 style 104 312 surface models text Support 251 surface symbols 140 283 autosurface command 283 surfaces 287 construction rules editing 289 NURB surfaces shaded 289 symbols 223 symbol balloons 283 118 125 defining layers 239 insertion point 223 319 Index 320 invisible parts 224 libraries 227 parametrics 224 placing 226 placing libriary symbols 231 surface symbols 140 symbol manager 229 value tables 224 wall symbols 19 welding symbols 142 T tangency 202 tangent point arc tool 20 tangent point circle tool 22 tangents 36 text 101 character 109 adding fonts 67 alignment 105 autotext 106 dimensions 131 drag amp drop 102 extended font selection 103 font 103 forms 109 importing 101 indentation 106 keep tex
36. standard ratios from the menu or enter real values such as 1cm 1m which is converted to 1 100 by DraftBoard Fit When you click this button the drawing is scaled to fit the printing region of the speci fied paper size The calculated scale factor is displayed in the Scale box and the Drawing Size dialog box stays open Apply When you click the Apply button the drawing is scaled according to the selected factor and you can see the specified scaling on the draw ing area The Drawing Size dialog box stays open OK When you click the OK button the drawing is scaled according to the specified scale factor The Drawing Size dialog box is closed and the rectangle of the printing region disappears on the screen when the option always display Page Bounds is not checked Setting up the drawing size using the Drawing Size command 1 Choose Drawing Size from the Layout menu The Drawing Size dialog box is displayed With the dialog the grey rectangle for the printing plotting region is displayed at its true size on the drawing area When the boundary of the printing plotting region appears you can drag the boundary rectangle around the drawing area 2 Specify the scale ratio You can press the arrow beside the Scale box and drag to one of the standard ratios from the menu or double click the Scale box and enter a scale the ratio you want to use You can enter real values such as 1cm 1m which is converted to 1 100 by DraftBoar
37. through two existing active points perpendicular 1 intersect o a s do Once you are familiar with the Drawing Assistant yow ll see how much DraftBoard streamlines design and drafting tasks Setting new Drawing Assistant construction angles You can add to or change the angles that the Drawing Assistant uses for dynamic construction lines by choosing Snap from the Preferences command in the Layout menu Enter the construction line angles separated by semicolons into the appropriate box Permanent Construction Lines In addition to the Drawing Assistant s dynamic construction lines you may want to create construction lines that remain displayed until you hide or remove them There are two methods for creating permanent construction lines strokes and the Construction command in the Layout menu When you want to get rid of all construction lines choose Delete Constructions from the Layout menu Everything on the Construction layer will be deleted Stroke Construction Lines Stroke construction lines are lines that you create with the mouse Hold down the Shift and Ctrl key Macintosh Command key and drag the mouse horizontally or vertically Since you are working in the drawing area the Drawing Assistant helps you place the stroke precisely Holding down the Shift and Ctrl key Macintosh Command key changes the mouse pointer to the Stroke pointer db 98 Drag the pointer horizontally i or vertical
38. 101 dE A O O EN SERRIREEER 101 PM a MEN LEERE A tans bfocanaedseds 106 Eros hatch He dnd Sol ER uses 110 Dimensions 117 Associative Dive of una 117 Using the Dimension Toon san Lt Dimension entrase 125 Editne Dimension AM DUtes naeh 133 Patani ut Dimension een 133 CB CA PA Eo O 134 Sar a O ctseuat EA E E 140 Symbolic Representation of Welding Oltra 142 Basic Drafting 147 LOA ee 147 Dav mg AA dio 149 Screen DI Nee E 150 The Det Troc S AO een 150 Divan at Fall Scale custodiado 151 Taper se and Dinin n A ariete 152 o A 154 e A A 155 Pinte OF Plotting a DAWNE einen 137 Structuring Drawings 161 LETS EN EUER accent estes nee eeestes 161 na 01S E ON 165 AE EEEE E O 166 ASOC VNS VENEN n an 168 Diao Otro A ios 174 Combining Sheets Views and Models cnococniconosencocnosiscososo 176 DraftBoard Documents 183 LSO DOCE 183 Dan Pacs 188 Parametrics Using Parametrics Parametric Drafting Parametric Problems Complex Parametric Rat AAA Patamettes and Grouped O eolica Kinematic Symbols Creating Symbols Placing Symbols Symbol Libraries Geometric Analyses 2D A iaa Bill of Materials 3D Basics 3D Models Three dimensional Work Space siscocnaatinsetata secre Model Views Creanne 2D Work ne Ita Wines unse 3D Modelling Work Plane aia The Design Process BID Features and Tool lianas iE SD Construcion Rules 3D S
39. 1s 0 5 Placing an Ambient Light 1 Display the Trackball and choose an Isometric or Trimetric view 2 Turn off the Default Lighting using the Visualization command from the Preferences menu in the Layout menu 3 Select Wireframe in the View Mode submenu since the light source symbol is only displayed in the wireframe view mode 4 Select the Ambient Light tool from the Light Palette The Status Line displays an entry box with the default factor 1 for the symbol Size of the light source 5 Specify with a mouse click on the drawing area the Location for the Ambient light An icon for the Ambient Light source appears on the screen in that location 6 If the size of the light source is too small or too large change the scale factor in the status line accordingly and press the Enter key 7 Choose Shaded in the View Mode submenu to display your geometry with your specified light settings 3D Surfaces 8 If necessary change the color and intensity of the light source using the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu see as well Editing Light sources at the end of this chapter Point Light SG D ZN With the Point Light tool you place a light source providing a more directed of your object You position the light source with a mouse click on the drawing area Light sources can be placed in any plane like any other object The Status Line lists the x y and z coordinates for the exact position and the facto
40. 2 y Tolerance Perimeter 308 164 Area 4020 968 Wt PerArea Weight 4020 968 Centroid X 12 129 Centroid Y 8 927 Inertia IXX 647963 602 InertialYY 3085517 693 Inertia IXY 156933 034 The 2D Analysis dialog box allows the following settings Tolerance A setting to determine the accuracy of calculations for curved objects The smaller the tolerance is the higher the accuracy will be The default value is 0 01 You can change the value by entering a new number The 2D Analysis mechanism analyses ares circles ellipses and splines as straight line segments that deviate from the true curve by no more than the stated toler ance value The smaller the number the greater the accuracy however the greater the accuracy the longer the calculation time Weight Per AreaA multiplier used to determine the actual weight of a part of constant thickness defined by a selected boundary The Weight of the part is the product of the Area multiplied by the Weight Per Area The default entry is 1 You can change the value by entering a new number You can find the proper number for this entry in a handbook published by most material vendors particularly for sheet steel and aluminium Enter the weight for the thickness of the proposed material and click the Calculate button Perimeter The length of all segments which define the selected boundary This is the only value that is calculated if the boundary of an object such as a Sp
41. 6 Move the pointer to the drawing area and drag to indicate the length of the row of copies Both the X and Y values appear in the entry boxes 7 Ifyou want more than one row enter the number of rows and specify the type of offset 8 Enter the offset if any You can use a negative number Dragging to indicate the offset is particularly useful 9 Click OK if you want the offset to An Example equal the distance between two objects Suppose you want to illustrate six machine screws You could draw geometry then use Linear Duplicate to copy the geometry in an array Create and select the geometry you want to duplicate Choose Linear Duplicate from the Edit menu Enter 6 in the Number Per Row box Click the Step Length button Click in the X Length box E E E E Move the pointer into the drawing area and drag across the widest point of the step E Click at the end of the entry in the X Length box 8 Type 2 to multiply the width of the geometry by two 9 Click OK VVVYVY The geometry is duplicated in a linear array Polar Duplicate This command in the Edit menu allows you to copy and rotate the se lected geometry When you duplicate an object in a circular array you can specify the number of duplications the center of the array and whether the objects are copied in a rotated orientation or an upright orientation 91 Editing objects An asterisk appearing beside an entry field indicat
42. Calculate Motion WIN This command in the Parametric submenu in the Edit menu allows you calculate the motion of parametric objects When you select a parametric part including its dimensions and choose the Calculate Motion command the following dialog box is displayed a Reset Ca C2 Ce C track geometry collision track curve The kinematic Control Panel allows the following settings Parametrics The Kinematic folder created by in the Example folder of the DraftBoard directory contains sample drawings for kinematic parts How you define a part related to an angle is described in the sections Rigid Links and Triangle links of this chapter WIN The differences to the Mac intosh Control Panel are described in the next sec tion 215 Parametrics The Reset button resets only the variables to their original values not the graphic To reset the graphic you must use the Undo command in the Edit menu MAC Collision Points cannot be calculated on the Macintosh The Rewind button corresponds the RESET button under Windows The Rewind button resets only the variables to their original values not the graphic To reset the graphic you have to use the Undo command in the Edit menu 216 All j This list box contains all variables you have defined for the selected object If you select All the motion will be calculated for all defined variables if you select a single variable
43. Click the points for the vectors of the spline 2 Double click the last point Y The status line shows the X Y coordinates of each point as you go along Vector Spline Tool This tool draws a spline using vectors determined by the points you specify The Vector Spline tool uses each point that you place as the vertex of a vector for the spline it creates Konstruktionspunkt a N I 1 I 1 1 1 x 1 1 1 Konstruktionspunkt Kontrollpunkt EN a N y x z y s y a N gt gt N a N e y a pS gt NS v Konstruktionspunkt Konstruktionspunkt Konstruktionspunkt Using the Vector Spline tool 1 Click the points for the vectors of the spline 2 Double click the last point DraftBoard uses these vectors to calculate the control points two fewer than the number of vertices you specify The spline is tangent to the first and last vectors and passes through the calculated control points Y The status line shows the X Y coordinates of each point as you go along Add Spline Control Point Tool This tool allows you to add another control point to an existing spline Using the Add Spline Control Point tool Click on the spline at the desired location s for the new control point s Note To see the new control point s as well as the existing control points you must first select the spline and then choose Show Points from the Layout menu or use th
44. Drag the selected object to a new location pressing to set a reference point and releasing to indicate the new location You can also click a reference point then click a destination point to move the selected object to the new location It is not necessary for the reference and destination points to be on the object you are moving The move is performed relative to the specified points Wo Y 0 The status line allows you to specify the X Y distance that the selection is to be moved Rotate Tool LP This tool rotates one or more objects around a specified point You can copy the selection by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while you select the objects If you select more than one object they remain in the same position relative to each other Rotating objects 1 Select the object s to be rotated 2 Select the Rotate tool If necessary use Shift Click to select more objects 3 Specify the center of rotation 4 Drag the objects or enter an angle in the status line to specify the rotation You can also click the reference point and then click the destination point It is not necessaty for the reference and destination points to be on the object you are moving If they are not the rotation is performed relative to the specified points No The status line allows you to specify the Angle of rotation Mirror Tool SS This tool creates the mirror image o
45. For new geometry to be placed on the same plane you need to brush over that old geometry to wake up one of its control points like midpoint or endpoint DraftBoard will then use retain this plane information as you create the new geometry If no object exists or no geometry is referenced for plane information DraftBoard places the new object geometry onto the work plane at the origin Moving the origin When you open a new drawing the Origin of the Drawing is identical with the absolute origin of the World Coordinate System 0 0 0 To display relative coordinates in the Position Indicator you can move the origin of the work plane using the Set Origin command With the 3 Point Plane command you move the origin of the current work plane and change its orientation The origin might be here to begin with a A Dut you can move it here for more convenient measurements As soon as you select the World Top plane again from the Planes submenu of the 3D menu you return to the World Coordinate System and move the origin of the work plane to absolute zero 0 0 0 Set Origin This command sets a new origin for the current work plane Specifying a new origin 1 Choose the Set Origin command from the 3D menu 2 Click in the drawing area to indicate the location for the new origin The origin of the current work plane is moved while the orientation of x y and Z axes remains the same Setting a new Work Plane When usin
46. Rename field with a clear name 4 Click the Rename button The new line pattern is renamed with the name you entered into the Rename field 5 Click the Edit button The Edit Pattern dialog box Line Editor is displayed 6 Specify a pattern for the new line pattern 7 When you have specified the new line pattern click the OK button The dialog window will be closed and the specified pattern is saved as new line pattern 8 Click the Current button when you want to make the new pattern the current pattern All selected objects take the new pattern and all new objects are drawn in this line pattern Editing Line Patterns With the Edit Pattern command from the Pattern submenu in the Pen menu you can set the spacing for DraftBoard s line patterns DraftBoard automatically scales line patterns by the inverse of the scale factor set in Drawing Size or Sheet Into View so that the pattern spacing will be appropriate for the viewing and drawing scale of the geometry Sometimes though you might want to set the pat tern spacing independently of the viewing or drawing scale or change the pattern altogether The Edit Pattern dialog box lets you control the pattern spacing for line patterns In DraftBoard Unlimited you can edit all line patterns except 2 solid and dotted of the 11 predefined line patterns That means that changing for instance the Phantom line pattern in the Edit Pattern dialog box will change the
47. TO WARE IF Flatness All elements of a surface in one plane 2 50 135 Dimensions 136 O Roundness AY Cylindricity N Profile of Line LY Profile of Surface LL Angularity 1 Perpendicularity Parallelism gt True Position O Concentricity Symmetry A Runout All points of a surface of revolution equidistant from an axis that is intersected by a plane perpendicular to that axis 60 All points of a surface of revolution equidistant from a common axis A 3D element projected to a plane Ot 0 06 A 3D surface projected to a plane 0 04 An axis or planar surface at a specified angle from another axis or datum plane 10 08 AN T iif GO E JA aT An axis or planar surface at a right angle to a datum axis or datum plane An axis or planar surface equidistant along its length to a datum axis or datum plane DAOA A zone of tolerance for a center axis or center plane t The axes of all elements in a cross section share a common datum axis plane Circular elements of a surface of revolution associated with a datum axis
48. View The Sheet View shows the object geometry on the current sheet at the scale you set with the Drawing Size command in the Layout menu The Sheet View is the default view when you launch DraftBoard The Sheet View is picked up by the Sheet camera and project ed on the current sheet The Sheet View is infinite It has no boundaries Detail Views A detail view is created with either the Detail View tool on the tool palette or by the Sheet Into View command in the Views menu Detail Views are always displayed in a view window These two different views are easily to identify on the screen e Each item displayed inside a view window is a Detail View e The area outside and underneath all detail view windows is the Sheet View Creating Detail views using the Detail View tool DraftBoard allows you to create associative Detail Views These Detail Views are always placed in a view window and are associative so that when you modify geometry in any view all views of that geometry re flect the change There are three deliberate exceptions to this associa tivity in line with standard drafting practice Dimensions e Crosshatching e Text They are view dependant and appear only in the view in which they were created In the illustration below the detail view shows a 2 1 enlargement of the side notch Dimensions text and hatches are displayed only on the sheet where they were created Structuring Drawings 1 204
49. View projectors in view windows which rest on the sheet You can install as many Detail view cameras as you want even if each one is looking at one model You install Detaz view cameras by creating Detail views either by the Detail View tool from the Tool palette or with the Sheet Into View command You can move Detail View cameras to another model by performing a model change when the view window is active Both cameras the Sheet camera and a Detail View camera can look only at one model at a time Using Sheets Views and Models We listed a lot of rules in the sections above and they all describe in common the same fact that DraftBoard administrates geometry models views and sheets separately That has a lot of advantages The most impressive example is if you delete a sheet displaying geometry the geometry is not lost since you have not deleted the related model The following examples show how to use the combination of Models Sheets and Views for your daily work Recovering from deleting a sheet displaying geometry To restore the geometry displayed on a sheet you deleted unintentionally proceed as follows 1 Select Sheets in the Views menu 2 Click New to create a new sheet 3 Click Current to activate the new sheet and draw some geometry 4 Make another sheet active by highlighting a different sheet in the Sheets dialog box and click the Current button 5 Close the Sheets dialog box and select Models in th
50. a drawing you can use as well the mouse wheel if your mouse is supporting this function Note For Zoom In and Zoom Out the size and location of the stroke rec tangle is important for de termining the result of the Zoom operation For Zoom Previous the size and lo cation of the stroke rectan gle is irrelevant All cases Just give the previous magnification 148 Using the magnifying glass tool With the Zoom tools you drag a box around an area on the screen so only that area is magnified on the screen 1 Select a Zoom Tool from the tool palette 2 With the left mouse button pressed drag a box around an area on the screen you want to magnify or reduce 3 Release the mouse button The content of the dragged box is made visible on the screen Zoom In Tool This tool zooms in by the specified factor The default factor is 2 This is a visual rather than a physical change When you click in the drawing area that position is redisplayed in the center of the screen and the drawing is enlarged by a factor of 2 You can also drag a box around an area so only that area is magnified The status line shows the current zoom scale If you enter a different scale that scale takes effect when you press Enter Pressing the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while using this tool causes a Zoom Out Zoom Out Tool This tool zooms out by the specified factor The default factor is 0 5 This is a visual rather than a physical
51. all segmented boundary lines that remain divided Editing Surfaces 1 Select the surfaced geometry 2 Choose the Ungroup command in the Arrange menu A dialog box is displayed asking you if you want to keep or delete the surfaces 3 Click on the Keep Surfaces button The grouped Structured Surface composed of the NURB Surfaces and the original wireframe geometry will be ungrouped into Trimmed NURB Surfaces and the underlying wireframe geometry Now you can select each trimmed surface move it change its color or delete it individually Auto Surface Error Locator If DraftBoard encounters unconnected geometry that will prevent any wireframe geometry from properly surfacing an error box will appear similar to that displayed for parametrics It will state the type and number of problems 2 AutoSurface Problem Unrelated Point Problem shown 1 of 1 Simultaneously the identified point causing the problem in the wireframe geometry is highlighted 3D Surfaces If there is more than one problem indicated click the Next button to display it Take note of the relationships between the problematic geometty You must return to your original wireframe to correct your geometry using the Undo command in the Edit menu Visualizing Objects Surfaced models can be lluminated displayed in a perspective view or in a hidden lines or shaded view mode View Modes All commands for the different view modes are
52. also possible to define all Parametrical Variables that describe a symbol like width height or diameter of an object as attributes for the Bz of Materials Parametrical Variables are handled like Numerical attributes When defining these parametric variables you must enter them in the Rename field exactly as they are written in the related dimensions The Bill of Materials will extract then the current values of these parametrical variables Por parametrical variables you must specify only the attribute s name since their values and formats ate predefined Parametrical variables as a subgroup of Numerical attributes are not assigned but only defined for the extraction see as well BOM Layout in this chapter Therefore you must hide them before assigning any non numerical attributes Defining Layers for Symbols When you want to indicate a layer in the Symbol dialog box or in the Symbolmanager when placing a symbol you must define the attribute Layer You must not specify the attribute s value and format since they are automatically assigned by DraftBoard Locking and Unlocking Attributes To lock an attribute simply click in front of the checkmark that is in front of the attribute s name v PartlD A v Quanti Aa y Material j v Ref No v Attribute 1 v The values of locked attributes cannot be changed during the assignment In order to unlock an attribute you must click the lock icon off within the Define Attribute
53. always export only the current model If your file contains Detail Views flatten them with the Flatten View command found in the Views menu If you have dimensions already in the detail view and the view scale is set to 1 you can group the dimensions and geometry together before flattening the view This will bring the dimensions across to the current model for Expott e AutoCAD doesn t accept any amp character in a layer name Rename therefore all layers having a amp character in their name Otherwise AutoCAD will not import the file and generate an error message instead In case line patterns are disorted too big or too small in Auto CAD after importing a DraftBoard DXF File change the AutoCAD variable LTSCALE to a smaller number to display the line patterns at an appropriate scale In case that after importing a DraftBoard DXF File into AutoCAD the arrowheads of some angular dimensions are displayed in AutoCAD in the wrong direction pointing towards the text rather than towards the extension lines execute the DIM command in AutoCAD select the affected dimensions and use the UPDATE command to display the arrowheads DXF Configuration Files The two configurations files DXFIN CFG Import and DXFOUT CFG Export allow you to set additional parameters for colors line patterns line weights and fonts These two configurations files work like filters considering all parameters specified in these files when importing
54. are flattening only what is visible within the detail view window Objects partly visible in a view window will be clipped objects outside of a view window will be ignored Text and Crosshatching are treated like geometry by this command Dimensions will no longer update if you make a change to the 3D model since the flattened geometry is disassociated but they will change if you alter the flattened geometry Also if you dimension your geometry after it is flattened you will have to enter the desired values because DraftBoard will simply read the length of the projected flat lines If you want to keep the dimensions copy the view and flatten the copy or group the geometry with the dimensions then flatten the view If the following message displays The current view and the draft view have the same model you must change the model on the sheet Click the sheet outside all views then create a new model using the Models command in the Views menu then click Current to activate the new model and then flatten the view again Flatten a View 1 Select a view window 2 Choose the Flatten View command in the Views menu A dialog box displays a warning message Since flattening disassociates the current view from the model you are given this Opportunity to be certain you have selected the view you want to flatten and that you really want to flatten the selected view All dimensions in the view are deleted because the 3D dimensions would
55. as the original file AutoSave prompts users for a file name before creating an AutoSave file for untitled documents created by using the New command from the File menu If you supply a file name this file name will be associated with the document and the AutoSave file If you Cancel AutoSave will skip that docu ment but the prompt will appear again at the next AutoSave interval Files opened with the READ ONLY attribute are also Auto Saved Setting up AutoSave 1 Select Auto Save from the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu The Auto Save dialog is displayed 2 Switch AutoSave ON or Off The default setting is Off 3 Specify the time interval for AutoSaving in minutes The interval can be from 1 to 60 minutes the default setting is 15 minutes An interval of 0 or less is equivalent to turning Auto Save off 4 Click OK If AutoSave is ON your work will be saved automatically for the time interval you specified Closing Documents DraftBoard provides the Close and the Quit command in the File menu to close documents If you want to close a drawing without ending DraftBoard you must use the Close command Selecting the Quit command closes all open drawings and ends DraftBoard Close Ctri F4 Macintosh 38 W This command in the File menu closes the current DraftBoard document the one displayed in the top window If other Draft Board documents are open they remain open when you close the current document If
56. be specified for a datum that is an axis ot centerplane of a feature such as a hole or boss Material Condition modifiers do not apply to planes such as the straight side or flat bottom of a part Composite GD amp T Symbols A composite symbol uses more than one line of the feature control frame to specify more than one tolerance for the same feature LLLLLLLLLL lt LMMMMMMML A gt lt 200 003 001 1 0 The first line of the feature control frame means that the hole must be straight throughout within a cylindrical tolerance of 003 diameter for the total of its length 3 00 inches The second line of the frame means Dimensions that the hole must be straight for any 1 00 inch portion within a cylindrical tolerance of 001 diameter DraftBoard creates the com posite frame automatically if the same symbol is in Line 1 and Line 2 Projected Tolerance Zone This entry box of the feature control frame specifies an area above the actual part where the tolerance of a feature should still apply if the feature were extended or projected into the area For example if an outboard motor has a hole in the housing the hole has to be straight not only through the housing but also down into the propeller assembly so that the drive shaft aligns properly Venus Marine V 74 p Q o a gt w e In the motor example the tolerance for the hole shou
57. can use the Delete ot Backspace key to delete a selection Retrieving with Undo and Redo Once an object is deleted or cut you can retrieve it with the Undo command in the Edit menu Undo can reverse each of the last eight actions You can use Ctrl Z Macintosh IZ to issue the Undo command from the keyboard Undo Ctrl Z Macintosh 982 This command in the Edit menu reverses the last action You can Undo and Redo any of the last eight actions For example if you delete an object you can choose Undo to restore it You can then use Redo to return to the deleted version You can undo actions that create and edit geometry and text but not actions that do not change the contents of the drawing such as resiz ing the window or quitting Redo Shift Ctrl Z Macintosh Shift 38Z This command in the Edit menu reinstates the last action reversed by Undo You can Undo and Redo any of the last eight editing actions Duplicating Objects DraftBoard allows you to create multiple copies of an object and arrange them in an array along a straight line or in a circular pattern Linear Duplicate This command in the Edit menu allows you to create an array of copies along a straight line Linear Duplicate Number Per Row 2 X Length Total Lengths Y Length 0 000 Step Lengths Number Of Rows as Offset 0 000 Total Offset O Step Offset The Linear Duplicate dialog box contains the following settings N
58. check Y indicates the current style You can change the default setting by saving the changes in the preferences file Prefs vlm Macintosh DraftBoard Prefs with the Save Preferences command in the Preference submenu of the Layout menu Text Alignment The four commands in the second section of the Text menu align your text within the text box The text can be aligned on the left the right centered in the middle or it can be fully justified so that it is aligned with both left and right margins of the text box If the Text tool is active both the selected text and future text are aligned as specified but existing text is not aligned If you choose this command when a tool other than the Text tool is active only future text entries are aligned If a text entry is selected when you choose this command the selection and future text entries are aligned as specified Align Left This command in the Text menu aligns the selected and future text When you want to set the at the left margin of the text area text offset from the box a A eet boundary you have to Text alignment is controlled select the text box with the from the Text menu You can align text with the left or the Selection tool and choose right margins with both i margins or centered between the Edit objects command in the File menu You can enter values for the text off setin the related boxes Align Middle This command in the Text menu centers the selecte
59. circle is brought to front and covers the blue rectangle Divide This command in the Arrange menu subdivides the selected geometry into the specified number of equal parts 1 Select the object to be divided 2 Choose Divide from the Arrange menu The following dialog box appears of pieces 2 Show Points 3 Enter the number of equal parts you want to divide the selection into 4 Click OK You can see the divisions when you display the points by clicking Show Points in this dialog box or choosing Show Points from the Layout menu Group Ctrl Y Macintosh 38Y This command in the Arrange menu combines selected objects to function as a single object Grouping objects 1 Select the objects to be grouped 2 Select Group from the Arrange menu Once you group geometry you can t edit the individual objects within the group unless you ungroup them You can also combine groups For hierarchical groupings Draft Board ungroups each group in the order in which they were combined Changing the members of a group without adding a hierarchical level When you want to add new geometry to an existing group and you select the group and the new geometry and choose the Group command you end up with a group within a group If you want to make a single group follow these directions 1 Select the group 2 Choose Ungroup from the Arrange menu The geometry is ungrouped with the individual objects selec
60. deselect a list quickly click one item in the list You can select a contigu ous group by dragging or holding down the Shift key and clicking If you want to select or deselect non contiguous items hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh 38 key and click the items Using Windows you select all items in a list by double clicking one item in the list On the Macintosh you se lect all items in a list by pressing the Command key and double clicking One item in the list that is not selected 15 Selecting objects 16 Selecting Points Selecting points differs from selecting objects because points are not always visible Being able to select points is useful in two situations e stretching selected geometry described later in this chapter e control point selection for transformations When you drag a selection marquee around objects all geometry that is completely within the marquee is selected If geometry is partially within the marquee only the control points inside the marquee are selected and the geometry is not selected Show Points This command in the Layout menu toggles the display of the contro points endpoints midpoints center points and knot points for selected objects When points are displayed you can select a point by clicking it If points are not displayed but Selectable Points is set in the Edit menu you can select a point by dragging a selection marquee around the location of the point
61. dialog box Defining a color 1 Click the Define button in the Define Color dialog box The a HSL Color Wheel is in Original wo Hue Angle _288 8 Saturation 0 00 8 Lightness 50 00 8 The Apple HSL Color Wheel shows the complete color range of all colors available Setting the Environment 2 Drag the mouse pointer in the color wheel to the area of the color desired The selected color is displayed in the New box below the When you define a color for the first time the color grey Original box and its color values are displayed in the boxes for is displayed in the Original hue angle saturation and lightness color field 3 Modify the values for hue angle saturation and lightness The lightness can be adjusted as well with the Lightness Slide bar below the Color Wheel 4 Click the More Options button The icons for the two Apple On the left hand side the icons for the Apple HSL Color wheel and nen den using the Fewer Op the Apple RGB Color display are displayed fone bition 5 Click onto the icon for the Apple RGB Color display when you want to specify the new color by its basic RGB Colors Red Green and Blue The Apple RGB Color display is displayed Original New Red p EJ 501 EEE Green Rimm 5 gt Blue jem 50 Chore Options cancel OK _ 6 Specify the color using thew Color Sl
62. displayed filling the screen with the Origin 0 0 placed in the center of the page If you cannot see your drawing on the screen you select the Zoom All command in the Arrange menu 153 Basic Drafting Ifthe grey boundary representing the page size is not visible after scaling choose Zoom all while the Drawing Size dialog box is displayed In case the dashed or dotted line patterns are not dis played correctly be cause the scale factor is too large or too small you can adjust the line pattern using Edit Pattern the command in the Pen menu Remember Lines with dashed or dotted line patterns and Hatch patterns are never scalded in DraftBoard but always displayed at their true size 154 By the size relationship between the existing object geometry and the displayed printing plotting region you can check visually if you have to scale the view of your drawing To do so you have to know how the different elements of a drawing such as geometry text line patterns behave while scaling this described in the next section Scaling Drawings Whenever the created object geometry is too large or too small in relation to the specified paper format drawings must be scaled Scaling affects elements of a drawing differently While scaling DraftBoard distinguishes between the following elements e object geometry e hatch patterns line patterns e text e dimensions For scaling you can use the Drawing Size comm
63. duplicate command 90 lock command 97 lock spline control point tool 28 M macros 60 max angle 291 Max Chord Length 298 max chord length 292 Max Edge Length 298 max edge length 292 Max Winkel 297 message line 15 MetaFile 193 317 Index 318 meters 57 midpoint drawing assis millimeters 57 tant Min Edge Length 298 mirror tool 85 model space 177 models 166 251 more text command mouse clicking 14 dragging 14 smart pointer 15 move tool 84 N nanoseconds 302 new command 186 NURB surfaces 283 O objects 71 counting 162 erasing 90 overlapping 73 103 oblique dimensions 121 offset command 92 OLE 102 open command 186 OpenGL 291 opposite corner ellipse Opposite point circle to origin crosshatch pattern outline line style 54 overconstrained geometry tool ol 111 overlapping objects 73 P palettes 59 paper size 152 parabola 30 parallel construction lin parallel light 295 parallel lines tool 19 parametrics 201 symbol 203 anchoring geometry arithmetic operators basic rules 202 changing dimensions to actual measurements colinear lines 212 es 4 205 35 23 21 207 0 202 205 complex drafting 210 conditional expressions constants 202 constraint lines 20 6 dimensions 133 202 drafting 205 extraneous text 20 6 grouped objects 213 ifelse 203 in3D 278 mathematical expression 202 overconstrained geom
64. e Polygon tools e Text tool Copying with the drawing tools 1 Construct the geometry you want to copy 2 Hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key 3 Click a new location The click determines the location of the first point specified during the construction of the original geometry the center of a center point circle for example 4 Release the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key Copying with the Transformation Tools You can hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while using a Transformation tool to make a copy of the selected geometry Copying with the Transformation Tools 1 Select the object you want to copy and transform 2 Select one of the four Transformation tools 3 Hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key 4 Perform the transformation according to the directions in the message line 5 Release the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key A copy is transformed and the original remains unchanged 87 Editing objects Use the Move tool for sizing objects only once since the next values you enter in the status line refer not to the new position of the moved point s but always to the original one That means if you enter in our example 1 in the X entry box and 1 in the Y entry box the point is not moved back to its original position but in the opposite direction referring to its original position Copy Option versus Copy Command Usually using the copy option of a geometry tool i
65. first section of this chapter explained the use of Sheets Views and Models Each is a simple and straight forward operation In the graphics you could see the environment how sheets views and models are set up in DraftBoard What you still need to know is the exact definition of all engaged components and the rules that describe how they ate interacting Virtual Design Environment The environment in DraftBoard for handling all geometry you cre ate can be described by five components e Sheets e Models e Views with Cameras and Projectors First you have to know that all geometry you create is not created directly on the sheet you see on your computer screen but somewhere outside of the sheet in an infinitely large three dimensional work space Model space All geometry is placed here as separated models You only see on your sheet images or views of these models Sheets A sheet is an infinite 2D planar area that displays an image of one or more models The image of a model is picked up either by the Sheet camera and projected onto the sheet the Sheet View or by a Detail View camera and projected into a view window which is resting on the sheet the Detail View Sheets are arranged behind each other so you can see only one at a time Structuring Drawings _ Model Detail View camera N N nn ER nm Pe You can create as many sheets as you want but with each sheet
66. following curve points it is recommended to specify and calculate more curve points than required and to trim finally the first and the last part of the helix The specified number of curve points is calculated and the helix is automatically plotted onto the drawing area 31 The Drawing Assistant Snapping onto Geometry Drawing Assistant Construction Lines Permanent Construction Lines Drawing Assistant The Drawing Assistant The Drawing Assistant is the feature that makes DraftBoard unique among design and drafting software products The Drawing Assistant thinks like a drafter it automatically knows where you typically want construction lines and displays them temporarily when you need them The Drawing Assistant also makes it easy to select existing points for construction by displaying information about the pointer s location in the drawing area If a Drawing Assistant notation is displayed when you click the construction snaps onto the geometry precisely without requiring finely tuned eye hand coordination or tedious selection of special modifiers modes or other specialized construction tools Snapping onto Geometry When the pointer is in the drawing area it has a snap point function The snap point locks onto specific points on existing objects as you move the pointer near them The Drawing Assistant tells you when the snap point is om an object The Drawing Assistant snaping onto a circle The Drawi
67. format in the Dimension Editor Dual Dimension Format Zoll mr For dual dimensions displaying simultaneously mm and inch units independent from the units set in the Units dialog window in the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu choose the corresponding format in the format list for linear dimensions EB Dimension editor amp C Instantaneous modification Standards _DIN_ Precision Dimension Tolerances Linear Linear Angular Angular Format Linear Arrows ech Angular T La 1 01 Dimension Apply 0 1 Lo Ll 03 10 10 10 When you select the dimension format Dual Dimension in the Dimension editor all dimensions will display simultaneously inch and mm values 3 422 86 916 Dimensions Dimension Layer DraftBoard places dimensions automatically onto that layer you have selected from the Layer pop up menu in the Dimension Editor Placing dimensions automatically on a separate layer 1 Choose Preferences in the Dimension menu 2 Select a layer in the Layer pop up menu in the Dimension Editor For the DIN Standard the Dimension Layer is set as where all dimensions should go to default layer 3 Close the Dimension Editor by clicking the Close box in the upper right corner of the Dimension Editor 4 Dimension as usual Subsequent dimensions automatically go on the dimension layer rather than the work layer Arrows The Arrows pop up menu allows you to choose one of 11 arr
68. g i 2 24 Dimensions and Hatch Pattern are only displayed on the sheet not in the 1 detail view View Windows can be created in DraftBoard in two different ways e manually with the Detail View tool or automatically with the Sheet Into View command in the Views menu Detail View Tool The Detail View tool on the View Control subpalette of the Too Palette creates a detail view of the designated area of your drawing The detail view is associative so that when you modify the geometry the detail view reflects the change Creating an associative detail view 1 Select the Detail View icon from the View Control subpalette 2 Enter a Scale for your detail view in the status line Faktor ji 3 Use the pointer to drag a rectangle around the area of your drawing that you want placed in the detail view This rectangle becomes the window frame 4 Position the pointer in the center of the detail view window frame and drag the window to a clear area on your drawing Activating deactivating detail views A Detail View is made active by clicking inside the view window An active detail view displays its title bar and Detail View pull down menu Inactive view Active view A view must be active for you to work in it Either a detail view is active or the sheet view is active but only one can be active at a time You deactivate a Detail View by clicking in the drawing area away from all detail views In order
69. grid lines and the number of tick marks between the intersections are set in the Grid dialog box which you can choose from the Preferences command on the Layout menu When the grid is visible the Drawing Assistant snaps to the grid spacing In other words if the grid is set to 25 mm spacing you can t construct an object closer than 25 mm to another object The coordinate symbol appears at the origin location X 0 Y 0 when the grid is visible A A A A A A a la a AAN 0 0 Origin Coordinate Symbol Saving Preferences All files are saved with the settings as they are established when you save and close the file The characteristics used for new files the default settings are contained in the prefs v m Macintosh DraftBoard Prefs The file must be stored in the same directory as the Draft Board application Preferences This command in the Layout menu displays a submenu for setting various specifications Descriptions of the items in the submenu appear individually in this reference section You can change the default setting by saving changes in the preferences file prefs vlm Macintosh DraftBoard Prefs Snap Use this dialog box to set the alignment angles hit radius and other settings for the Drawing Assistant Grid This dialog box allows you to specify the spacing of the grid lines Use the Show Hide Grid command in the Layout menu to turn the display of the grid on and off Units This dialog box specifies the
70. half the distance between the two parallel lines When you fillet two parallel lines the filleting radius has to be half the distance between the two parallel lines 82 2 Entity Fillet Tool This tool constructs an arc tangent to the two objects you click Adding a 2 Entity Fillet 1 Click the 2 Entity Fillet tool 2 Enter the arc radius you want in the status line The default radius is 5 mm 3 Click the objects you want to fillet You can also hold down the Shift key and click once inside the corner you want to fillet If you hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while you select the objects to fillet the objects are not trimmed Fillets use the smallest arc between the selected geometry The status line allows you to specify the Radius of the fillet either before or after you create the fillet RE 3 Entity Fillet Tool This tool constructs a fillet tangent to the three objects you choose Adding a 3 Entity Fillet 1 Click the 3 Entity Fillet tool 2 Click the three objects you want to fillet If you hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while you select the objects to fillet the objects are not trimmed There are no entries on the status line 2 Entity Chamfer Tool This tool creates a chamfer across a corner at the specified distance from the intersection of two lines The default distance is 5 mm Adding a chamfer 1 Click the 2 Entity Chamfer tool 2 In the statu
71. in the current work plane coordinates Consequently it is a good idea to set up a view that looks down the z axis of the work plane onto the x y plane In this way you can see what the first phase of the operation sees This is particularly useful if you encounter problems resolving parametric geometry Errors in parametrics are shown in bold lines drawn in the x y plane and independent of the 2 values of the highlighted lines The easiest way to see this is to look down the x y plane by choosing the View the Plane command from the 3D menu In the following drawing the first phase of parametrics will deal with only four dimensions W L L 2 and L 4 In the second phase the H and H 3 dimensions are evaluated Es I ER The L 4 dimension was created with the Horizontal Dimension tool even though the dimensioned points have different z values The H and H 3 dimensions were created with the Vertical Dimension tool while the work plane was set to the y z plane 279 3D Surfaces Construction Rules Calculating Surfaces Visualization Exporting Surfaces 3D Surfaces 3D Surfaces In DraftBoard you create three dimensional wireframe geometry IMPORTANT that you can surface view in hidden line or shaded view mode and you Not all 3D Features such as AutoSurface are in all country versions and or When creating NURB Surfaces there are a number of things you need for all operating systems available Chec
72. length represented by the ifelse expression equals L1 because L1 B Mi is greater than L2 H 4 nia H 4 L2 gt ifelse L1 gt L2 L1 L2 The length represented by the ifelse expression equals L2 because L2 is less than L1 Resolving the Parameters Once you have constructed the geometry and added parametric dimensions use the Resolve command in the Parametrics submenu of the Edit menu to specify the values for the variables and redraw the geometty Resolve This command in the Parametrics submenu of the Edit menu allows you to redraw geometry automatically to fit specified dimensions This parametric feature enables you to draw a geometric shape without regard to measurements and then have DraftBoard redraw the same shape to the values you specify Parametrics Variables are case sen sitive D is not the same as d Using an ifelse condition the variable is set to the first value if the condition is true and it is set to the second value if the condition is false The Resolve command cannot resolve ellipses and splines unless the ellipse or spline is contained in a group 203 Parametrics If you use a spreadsheet like Microsoft Excel for creating that text file you have to type in each cell the variable name and the value separated by a white space and export it as text file If your text file contains more variables and values than you need to resolve the geometry DraftBoard automatically
73. mensions in 3D in Chapter 16 3D Modelling When exporting DXF DWG Files not all views have to be flattened since several views are automatically de tected during export and a dialog box with correspond ing options will be dis played See as well Ex porting DXF DWG Files in this manual 260 Editing Views without editing the Model The geometry within view windows is associative When you make a change in one window the change affects the model and therefore the geometry in all views In the drafting phase of the design process you may want to edit the geometry in one view window without making the same changes to the model You can accomplish this by using the called Flatten View command on the Views menu When you flatten a view the geometry is taken out of the view and placed back on the sheet where it is no longer associated with the model In this way you can make changes to the geometry without changing the model or other views Flatten View This command places a projection of the visible geometry in the active view window onto the sheet at full scale When the view is flattened all overlapping lines of equal length and all lines parallel to the line of sight are removed The geometry is no longer associated with the model If you make changes to the flattened geometry those changes do not affect the model If you make changes to the model the flattened geometry is not changed When you flatten a detail view you
74. motions as movies Therefore the Macintosh Control Panel contains different buttons and options than the Win dows version When you select a parametric part including its dimensions and choose the Calculate Motion command the following dialog box is displayed Control Panel All vw lt u ye gt J D Track Curve Track Geometry Parameter Table Options Play Movie The kinematic Control Panel allows the following settings The Rewind button resets all variables to their original values This button is only active when a simulation was started with the Step button since using the Play button resets all variables automatically The Pause button allows you to stop a simulation that was started with the Play button To stop a simulation you must keep the Pause button pressed until the sim ulation stops The Play button starts a complete motion cycle and can only be stopped with the Pause button When clicking the Play button the complete motion will be calculated from the szarting value to the ending value that you have specified in the Parameter dialog box When the simulation ends all variables are reset to their original values Ce The Record button starts a simulation and records all calculated steps as a movie When you click this button the Save as dialog box is displayed where you can enter a name for the movie The Step button starts a step by step simula
75. ne or an Arc is not closed Area The surface area enclosed by the selected boundary For circles arc and other curves the accuracy is dependent upon the tolerance setting Weight The product of the Area multiplied by the Weight Per Area It is also possible to determine the length of not enclosed objects such as Splines or Arcs See as well under Perimeter in this section of the manual Note that this Tolerance value has no effect on the precision of the resultant values The precision of the result is set using the Units command under Preferen ces in the Layout menu For circles arcs and other curves the accuracy is dependent upon the tolerance setting 235 Geometric Analysis The closed figure is an area that could be cross hatched If you are in doubt about the area sim ply crosshatch the geome try to see if it represents the area you want to ana lyse Once you crosshatch the area and you see that your selection is correct you can choose Undo to re move the crosshatching and still maintain the selec tion 236 Centroid Xc Yc Xc gt 0 0 Centroid X The X coordinate of the center of mass defined by the selected boundary Centroid Y The Y coordinate of the center of mass defined by the selected boundary Inertia XX The moment of inertia about a central X X axis which is parallel to the X axis IXX f y Yc 2dA Inertia IYY The moment of inertia ab
76. not they can be entered each time when you select the Save as command and the option Post at Save as is activated Activate the option Post at Save as if you want to display the Document Attributes dialog each time you select the Save as command Activate the option Embed EMF PIC if you want to save a small picture of the drawing as preview with the document that will be displayed in the Open dialog window and optionally in the Windows Explorer Win98 WinSE WinME Win2000 WinXP Enter a pixel value for the Width and Height of the graphic The default value is 600 x 600 Click the OK button The Document Attributes dialog window is closed and the specified values are saved for the current drawing If you want to save these attributes permanently as default values you have to select the Save Preferences command in Preferences submenu in the Layout menu Displaying Document Properties when opening a drawing 1 Select the Document Properties command in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu The Document Attributes dialog window is displayed Make all required entries Click the OK button The Document Attributes dialog window is closed and the specified values are saved for the current drawing Save the drawing using the Save as command Close the drawing Select the Open command from the File menu The Open dialog window is displayed Select the drawing that you just have saved In t
77. not possible to modify the Font Size or Font Style using the Edit button in the Surface Symbol dialog box It is not possible to change the default Plotter font The Font Size can be modified in the dimension editor but will affect only newly created Surface Symbols Closing the Surface Symbols dialog box The Surface Symbol dialog box is closed automatically when you select a function from the Function palette 141 Dimensions It is not possible to modify the font size using the Edit button in the Welding Symbol dialog box Text attributes and Arrowhead types tor Welding Symbols must be modified in the dimen sion editor before placing the Welding Symbol It is not possible to change the default Plotter font 142 Symbolic Representation of Welding Joints The Welding Symbols command in the Dimension menu allows you to create Welding Symbols according to DIN 1912 contains ISO 2553 Dimension Show Palette Preferences GD amp T Surface Symbols Welding Symbols The graphical symbol prescribes the method how welded joints should be manufactured The graphical representation contains an elementary symbol that can be completed by the following informations e combined and supplementary symbols e welds dimensions e complementary indications Welding Symbols This command in the Dimension menu creates a symbol for the graphical representation of welded joints The Welding Symbols command use
78. notations relative to the object s location when you pressed the mouse button In this way if you move the pointer over a control point so the Drawing Assistant activates it you can align the object you are moving with that point If you begin dragging when the on notation is displayed A midpoint the alignment with the corner of the rectangle occurs at the location on the square whre you pressed the mouse button to begin dragging With the endpoint notation displayed when you press the mouse button you can move the square from here endpoint endpoint to here with the Drawing Assistant to align the corners Selected Move versus Move Tool You can move objects either with the Selection tool or with the Move function Moving with the Selection Tool Ly The move function of the Selection tool allows free movement of the selected object To move a circle from one location to another as shown above use the Selection tool and the Drawing Assistant to align the 90 quadrant with the corner of the rectangle The circles do not need to touch the rectangle to be aligned with it Moving with the Move Function The Move tool on the Transformation subpalette allows you to move the selection with reference to other geometry Move a 1 cm square 2 cm in the x direction and 1 cm in the y direc tion as in the following graphic La El al Editing
79. of the DraftBoard folder into the Extended dialog box using the Import button 5 Click OK The Extended dialog box is closed A check mark indicates that the text block contains an extended text 6 Click the Options button 7 Specify the desired options and text attributes such as text font etc 8 Click OK The Options dialog box is closed 9 When you place a text block with a border frame you have to drag a vector on the drawing area The Starting point of the vector defines the starting point of the position line and the End point of the vector defines the position for the nearest corner of the text border and the endpoint of the position line When you have marked the option Stand alone you click a point on the drawing area for the lower left corner of the text The text block is placed horizontally or vertically on the drawing area as soon you release the mouse button The orientation is depending on the marked option 0 or 90 10 Place some more text blocks or close the Text Blocks dialog box clicking the Close box at the upper corner of the dialog box When you select any function or command while the Text Blocks dialog box is open the dialog box closes automatically Editing Text Blocks in the drawing Placed zext blocks can be only edited using the Text function in the DraftBoard function palette not with the TextBlocks command Extended texts saved in the Text folder of the DraftBoard folder can be only edit
80. of the hatch pattern passes through this y coordinate x offset defines the distance between line segments the gap distance You only use this parameter to specify the offset for vertical or diagonal lines To specify the distance between dashes use the dash1 parameter In most hatch patterns the x offset has a value of 0 0 however even though this parameter is rarely used it is not optional y offset defines the vertical distance between repeating lines this parameter is used by every hatch pattern Dash1 You can use one or more dashl parameters to define dash es in the hatch pattern line The dash1 parameter is op tional and not required for solid lines A positive number such as 25 defines the length of a dash A dot drawn by the hatch pattern is defined by the value 0 But to be sure that dots will be printed by any type of printer it is recom mended to define for dots a very short dash1 parameters close to 0 Tips on creating Pattern Codes Each line of code applies to a single pattern segment The two lines of data in our example represent a hatch pattern with two lines There is no limit to the number of data lines for hatch pattern definitions But complex patterns can take a long time to draw on the screen You cannot specify a weight or width for hatch pattern lines The work around is to define two or more very closely spaced lines A pattern line consists of straight lines and dots You cannot specify arcs ci
81. option you can specify in a DXF configuration file additional import options such as color handling line patterns line weights or text fonts More information about this configuration file you find in the Appendix of this manual The graphic on the left shows the Import dialog box for Windows In the Macintosh version you can t import Bitmap and Meta Files but PICT is supported 189 DraftBoard Documents You can ungroup the imported geometry with the Ungroup command in the Arrange menu 190 In the Import dialog you can specify the following Import options Grouped Imports the geometry grouped so it is a single unit in the DraftBoard document Geometry Only Brings in only the geometry leaving any ex dimensions and crosshatching behind Onto Work Layer The imported geometry is placed on the work layer rather than the layer on which it was originally created Unscaled The geometry is adjusted to correspond to the scale set by the Drawing Size command If Unscaled is specified the imported geometry is not scaled Importing a document WIN 1 Choose Import from the File menu A dialog box appears similar to the Open dialog box Select the file type you want to import from the Files of Type pop up menu The list box shows all files of the selected type available in that directory Double click the File name you want to impott The Import dialog box appears Specify any import options you wan
82. or exporting DXF and DWG Files Both configuration files must be in the DraftBoard folder Before modifying any of these files you should read the related readme files DXFIN TXT and DXFOUT TXT for Windows and DXF Doc and DXF Info for the Macintosh Both files are ASCII Files that can be modified using any simple Text Editor How exporting affects some objects It is difficult to exchange data between different graphics programs because each program defines geometric objects differently Even though the DXF DWG and IGES formats standardize this exchange some objects do not transfer exactly The following table tells you what to expect when you export DraftBoard objects DraftBoard DXF DWG Hatches Hatches are exported as groups except the option Ungroup hatches is active then they are converted in normal lines Detail views All detail view will be exported as long as not more than two models are displayed in Draft Board In addition the selected AutoCAD Version must support Modelspace and Paperspace Version 11 or higher If not all detail views must be flattened Ellipses up are exported eau ve The Sheet View will be 13 or higher For all previous versions ellipses exported into the AutoCAD are approximated by line segments Paperspace and all Detail Views into the AutoCAD Modelspace 305 Appendix If there are any problems with your exported IGES files you should use before creating any DXF or IGES file the Remove D
83. pattern of every line in the existing document that is drawn in the Phantom line pattern All line patterns are edited in the Line Editor that you display using the Define Patterns command in the Pattern submenu of the Pen menu Edit Pattern When you choose Edit Pattern from the Pattern submenu of the Pen menu The Edit Pattern dialog box appears Setting the Environment Edit Pattern Edit Pattern Userl E Dash Length I EEE Cancel Remove Revert Visible Length 50 000 The Edit Pattern dialog box contains the following settings Edit Pattern In this pull down list you select the line pattern you want to change The list box contains nine line pat terns that can be modified Pattern DraftBoard considers each line segment and each Window space between line segments separate Dashes and each Dash has a handle represented by a box attached to the vertical line extending from the end of each Dash One complete element of the line pattern appears in the Pattern Window Visible Length Displaying one complete element of the line pattern results in a specific visible length of the displayed pattern The default visible length of 50 mm allows to displays all predefined line patterns of DraftBoard If you want to create patterns with Dashes or elements larger than 50 mm change the value in the Visible Length entry box to an appropriate number the Par tern Window will scale the pattern ele
84. place a light source providing a linear type of illumination similar to the light of a fluorescent tube You position the light source by dragging a vector on the drawing You can also click two area to specify the ocation and direction of the light source points for the startpoint and l the endpoint of the vector In the Status Line you can enter the x y and Z coordinates for Startpoint and the Endpoint of the vector and a factor for the icon size of the light source The default factor is 25 4 Color and Intensity of the light source can be specified with the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu The default co or is white and the default factor for the intensity is 0 5 Placing a Parallel Light 1 Display the Trackball and choose an Isometric or Trimetric view 2 Turn off the Default Lighting using the Visualization command from the Preferences menu in the Layout menu 3 Select Wireframe in the View Mode submenu since the light source icon is only displayed in the wireframe view mode 295 3D Surfaces The distance between the illuminated object and the parallel light source is un important Crucial is only the direction of the light source 296 4 Select the Parallel Light tool from the Light Palette The Status Line displays entry boxes for the x y and z coordinates for the Staripoint and the Endpoint of the vector and a factor for the icon size of the light source The default factor is 25 4
85. problem by adding a constraint line and angle dimension between that line ns een and the mirror line angle Complex Parametric Drafting This section illustrates two complex examples of parametric drafting These examples combine the information provided in this chapter so you can see how to use the parametric mechanism Example Departures from Standard Drafting This example illustrates the parametric drafting practices that differ from standard drafting practices The first illustration is the side view of an adapter without dimensions so you can see its shape clearly m 3 000 me 875 1 000 Yo 1 750 001 1 000 992 Y 1 625 002 250 125 Le 1 00 Here is the side view with typical dimensions added The illustration shows the side H view with added constraint lines The next illustration shows the side view with numbered constraint lines 1 The centerline does not extend beyond the geometry 2 Constraint lines define the edges of the groove Parametrics does not recog nize non touching colinear lines 3 Constraint lines connect the endpoints of the upper and lower halves to relate the geometry Parametrics does not recognize non touching colinear lines 062 REF 4 Four dimensions are added to relate the i geometry to the centerline Parametrics 1 1 500 REF doesn t recognize non touching colinear u IH 3 000 REF The illustration b
86. respective column width is displayed The displayed values for the column widths were calculated by the word length of each attribute and the margin you indicated You can change the width for each column individually Draw Table These radio buttons let you select whether the Bill of Materials will be drawn from the Top Down or from the Bottom Up Creating Bill of Materials After having assigned attributes and item numbers and having selected a layout format you can create the Bz of Materials Bill of Materials will extract all tem numbers and their associated attributes of the current model and will place a sorted table on the current sheet of export it optionally in a file for later use in other programs Geometric Analysis Pos Name M Nr Qty Area The generated Bill of 2 34564 Materials is an object in DraftBoard like any other object geometry That Cotter S 238 20 2 3876 means it can be moved copied deleted and edited 2 3 4 You create Bill of Materials with the Bill of Materials tool in the BOM palette BOM Tool This tool generates a Bz of Materials of the current model and places it on the current sheet Creating a Bill of Materials for the entire drawing 1 Choose the Show Palette command from the BOM submenu in There must be at least one non numerical attribute as signed to an object in order The BOM palette is displayed to make a Bill of Materials 2 Select the BOM
87. so if you want to use only part of the document cre ate a new file that contains only the information you want entered on the drawing 1 Select the Text tool from the tool palette 2 Create a text box by dragging or clicking twice to place the opposite corners of the text area 3 Choose Import from the File menu A dialog box appears 4 Select the text file you want to import The Import dialog box appears and the Text file type is specified 5 Click OK The text file appears in the text box you created Editing text 1 Select the Text tool from the tool palette 2 Move the pointer directly over the text to be edited The pointer turns into an I beam text cursor when it is over text This only occurs when the Text tool is active 3 Use the text cursor to select text You can drag either direction to select characters and double click on an individual word to select the word You may also simply click to place the text cursor within the existing text if you want to add more to it 4 Modify the selected text by choosing the appropriate commands from the Text menu An ASCII text file is usually created by word processing software and saved as plain text It usually con tains only standard key board characters letters numbers punctuation and spaces without the format ting typically found in word processing documents If you want to change characteristics for the entire text entry use the Selection tool to sele
88. such as DXF or IGES or if you want to bring in ASCII text The default setting is DraftBoard files 186 Displaying Document Properties in the Windows Explorer To display document properties and document previews in the Windows Explorer you must go to the directory that contains DraftBoard drawings that were saved with Previews and Attributes and activate the option As Web Page in the Views menu of the Explorers Tool Tips don t work with all Operating systems Default Directories For Opening Saving Im and Exporting documents you can set default directories Default directories you can set with the Directories command in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu Directories This command sets default directories for opening saving importing and exporting documents When you choose this command the following dialog box is displayed gt Directory Selection Open CADocunentiDrawings Ca Save GADaeamentsWellum Drawings Cal c e Import C Documents Import Export C Documents Yellum Drawings Export After each entry field you find a button labelled with three dots Clicking this button opens the Searching Folder dialog containing a directory tree with the content of your hard disk where you can choose the proper directory Opening drawings The File menu contains the Open and New command to open a drawing With New you create a new drawing while the Open command opens an existing drawing New C
89. that contains the overlapping object geometry The new layer contains now the intersecting area which you can edit like any other object Select by Line This tool selects one or more objects along a straight line path when you drag a line over the desired objects Selecting an object by Line 1 Choose the Select by Line tool from the Selection Tool Palette 2 Drag a line across the objects you want to select S HS N gt Kd A The objects intersected by the line are selected and any previously selected objects dragged line selected objects are deselected You can select deselect additional objects by pressing the Shift key You can move a copy of the last selection by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key Select by Polygon X This tool selects one or more objects when a polygon is drawn around them Each object must be completely enclosed by the selection polygon for the object to be selected This tool functions similarly to the Connected Lines tool Selecting objects by Polygon 1 Choose the Select by Polygon tool in the Selection Tool palette 2 Click or drag to indicate the endpoints of the line segments that will make up this selection polygon The selection polygon appears as line segments and are selected the default ts red If you click a point and then change your mind press the Escape key or choose Undo to remove the last line Pressing the Back space key Mac Delete removes
90. that is the current active work layer DraftBoard includes a Construction layer a Dimension layer and a Ti tleBlocks layer by default with each drawing Note The Construction layer will automatically accept all Construction lines created with stroke commands or with the Construction dialog box All lines of construction line type created with the Single Line tool will go onto the current work layer 161 Structuring Drawings You can also type a name and click New Layer names are limited to 79 characters Since the DXF format supports only 31 characters you should limit layer names to 31 characters to guarantee a smooth DXF Export You can t hide the work layer Layers facilitate color specific wiring diagrams or electrical and plumbing blueprints Note Layers can be saved as Preferences along with specified colors 162 You can use layers for complex drawings so you can hide some objects to simplify the drawing visually or print only specific parts of the drawing You can think of visible layers as transparent pages and hidden layers as invisible pages Although you cannot see objects on hidden layers they do exist The layer must be visible for you to select objects on the layer For example if there are objects on a hidden layer and you choose Select All then delete all objects those objects on the hidden layer are not deleted You can also specify the selectability of layers with the Sele
91. the help of the Drawing Assistant you can design this model as easy as isometric drawing on a drafting board We design the model in a three dimensional work space using one or several view windows to observe multiple view orientations while we are modelling Optionally you can easily derive from the 3D model two dimensional draftings for manufacturing containing several views on a drawing format with dimensions and notations First we will look at the additional tools and features that are specific to 3D 3D Features and Tools All of the tools you would use to create 2D geometry in DraftBoard would also be used to create 3D geometry However there are some tools and features that are exclusive to 3D One of the most important features in 3D again is the Drawing Assistant 3D Modelling You can modify the Origin and the Orientation of any plane except the World Top Plane You cannot redefine the standard work planes Front and Right without unlocking them You can never redefine the World Top plane which was es tablished from the original orientation of the model space The Set Plane to Screen command creates a tempo rary plane that you can name using the Define Plane command The Set Plane to Screen command sets not only the plane in the active view but in all existing views including all Detail Views parallel to the screen 271 3D Modelling 212 3D Drawing Assistant The Drawing Assi
92. the Modules menu the following dialog box is displayed Options Show Item Number Header for Item Table Margin 0 000 Headline Color Sort by Cl User Format Edit Export Headline Draw Table Top Down Bottom Up The Options dialog box contains the following items Show Item Number Marking this option will create an Item column as first column Header for Item In this entry field you name the Item column Table Margin In this field you can enter a value for the margin between the text and the vertical column guides Headline Color In this pop up menu you choose a color for the title text To choose a color you click into the pop up menu and drag to the desired color As soon you telease the mouse button the selected color is displayed in the pop up menu Sort by In this pop up menu you select the attribute by which the Bill of Materials should be sorted Click into the pop up menu with the left mouse button pressed and drag to the desired attribute As soon as you release the mouse button the selected attribute is displayed in the pop up menu User Format When you mark this option the Edit button will be activated Edit Clicking the Edit button displays a dialog box where you can define the column width of the Bill of Materials table User Format Attribute Item PartlD Quantity In this dialog box all attributes of the actual layout are listed For each attribute the
93. the circles SOLUTION Delete the Length dimension 207 Parametrics Unrelated Groups If you do not give enough dimensions the parametric mechanism will find two or more groups of geometry each of which is well defined in itself but nof related to each other PROBLEM A simple example of this problem is illus trated on the left where the short vertical 3s Ty line is not related to the rest of the geome try When you try to resolve this geome try you get an Unrelated group problem m message The first unrelated group appears in bold black lines Click the Next button to highlight the second group H 2 H 2 7 w w Resolve Problem Unrelated Groups of Geometry Unrelated Groups of Geometry Problem shown 2 of 2 Cance Ne Problem shown 1 of 2 Cancel Next This problem is like the two squares shown earlier Only one group could be drawn The parametric mechanism does not know how to relate the two groups SOLUTION ap You must decide how you want to Ne I relate the groups Usually you have uN many options to accomplish this One alternative is to add the dimen sion W 3 Ie ar Unrelated Groups where One Group is a Single Point A single point as an unrelated group is like a neon sign saying The problem is right here L PROBLEM Beer ln The Resolve problem A H 4 H 3 message may display a single point such as the E poi
94. the entire selection polygon 2 Indicate the last point by double clicking the startpoint of the polygon or choosing another tool Selection Polygon selected Objects Q Objects completely within the selection polygon will be selected Objects not completely within the selection polygon will not be selected When pressing the Shift key you can select deselect additional objects by additional polygons It is not possible to move a copy of the last selection with this tool Selection commands The Edit menu contains the two selection commands Select All and Selection Mask Select All Ctri A Macintosh 38A This command in the Edit menu selects all objects except those on a hidden layer or excluded by the Selection mask You can also double click the Selection tool to select everything or use Ctrl A Macintosh Command key A to select all objects If you choose Select All while using the Text tool all characters in the current text arca are selected Selection Mask This command in the Edit menu allows you to limit selection by object type layer and color You can only select objects that are highlighted in the dialog box For example if circles are not highlighted when you choose Select All from the Edit menu everything but the circles is selected In this way you can select such combinations as only blue splines or only red objects on a particular layer Using the selection mask 1 Choose Selection Mask from the E
95. the list in the Sheet Into View dialog box 1 Start a new document Select the Detail View tool and create a view window 2 3 Display the Model Dialog box and create a new model 4 Click on the sheet to activate it 5 Select Model 2 in the Model dialog box and make it the current model by clicking the Current button 6 Click in the view window to activate it and make Model 1 the current model in the Model dialog box 7 Click on the sheet to activate Model 2 8 Create the drawing format at a scale 1 1 or import one of the standing formats and modify it 9 Save the drawing with a proper name in the Layouts folder of DraftBoard The file name is listed in the Layout list field when you next time select the Sheet Into View command Combining Sheets Views and Models Sheets Views and Models are directly related to each other and are interacting permanently unnoticed from the user For most of your daily work it is not necessary to know anything about the relationship between Sheets Views and Mode s But for some tasks it is helpful to understand this relationship since it offers elegant solutions that were not possible without the combined power of this features Using the relationship between Sheets Views and Models makes it easy to e create detail views of an object that is not associative to the original model create customized drafting layouts or e recover from an erroneous Sheet Into View command The
96. the motion will be calculated only for the selected variable ll The Pause button allows you to stop a simulation that was started with the Play button To stop a simulation you must keep the Pause button pressed until the simulation stops gt The Play button starts a complete motion cycle and can only be stopped with the Pause button When clicking the Play button the complete motion will be calculated from the starting value to the ending value specified in the Parameter dialog box When the simulation ends all variables are reset to their original values I gt The Step button starts a step by step simulation ac cording to the value you have set in the Increments field in the Parameter dialog box Reset The RESET button resets all variables to their original values This button is only active when a simulation was started with the Step button since using the Play button resets all variables automatically Track Curve When this option is marked the path of all defined Measure Points is tracked and recorded during a simulation Track Geometry When this option is marked the geometry for each step is recorded and displayed on the screen Collision This options records all collision points between the animated part and some stationary geometry on the screen Calculate Motion Movies MAC The Macintosh version of DraftBoard allows in addition to record and replay calculated
97. the only variable It is also possible to animate parts by resolving ongitudinal variables 2 Select the part including all dimensions using the Selection tool 3 Select the Resolve command from the Parametric submenu in the Edit menu The Resolve dialog box is displayed 4 Test the part by entering different values for the variable Angle to be sure it resolves properly 5 Save the part Defining Measure Points Points whose path you want to track during the simulation must be defined as Measure Points Any Start and Endpoint of Parametric dimensions can be used as a Measure Point When you select a parametric dimension and choose the Define Measure Points command from the Parametric submenu in the Edit menu the following dialog box is displayed Measure Points 1 Point 2 Point In this dialog box you can define the Startpoint 1 Point and or the Endpoint 2 Point as Measure Points When you click OK the points are marked by a green cross in the drawing as Measure Points When you animate the part the path of these points is tracked and displayed as a curve on the screen Defining Measure Points 1 Select a parametric dimension 2 Select the Define Measure Points command from the Parametric submenu in the Edit menu The Define Measure Points dialog box is displayed 3 Mark one or both endpoints of the selected dimension as Measure Points The selected points are marked by a green cross 4 Click OK
98. the original text size is set after scaling Dimension Editor All attributes for dimensions created with the dimension tools are set with the Dimension Editor Dimension Hide Palette Preferences GD amp T Surface Symbols Welding Symbols Choosing the Preferences command in the Dimension menu displays the Dimension Editor C Instantaneous modification standards _1S0_ Precision Dimension Tolerances Linear 0 Linear 0 Angular 1 Angular 1 Format Linear Angular arows lt Layer Dimension The Dimension Editor allows the following settings Standards The Standards pop up menu allows you to select one of the following dimension standards Standards All standards can be modified The Set button saves all modifications made in the Dimension Editor to the current standard These changes are valid until the end of the current DraftBoard session or until you modify the settings again You can save the selected standard permanently using the Save Preferences command from the Prefer ences submenu in the Layout menu Setting a dimension standard 1 Choose Preferences in the Dimension menu The Dimension Editor is displayed 2 Inthe Standards pop up menu drag to the standard you want to modify 3 Modify the desired parameters in the Dimension Editor 4 Click the Set button All settings are valid until the end of the current DraftBoard session or the settings are modified again
99. to be clicked off The New button displays the Redefine View dialog box where you can specify a new view When you click the OK button the dialog box is closed and the new view is added to the views list You can rename the New new view using the Rename button Delete This button deletes the selected view in the views list Locked views and the active view cannot be deleted Redefine The Redefine button displays the Redefine View dialog box where you can redefine the selected view Locked views and the active view cannot be redefined Set View This button makes the selected view the active view The active view is indicated by a checkmark Rename Using this button you can rename any selected view Locked views and the active view cannot be deleted Activating a View Orientation 1 Select the view you want to activate in the Define View dialog box 2 Click the Set View button Renaming a View Orientation 1 Select the view you want to rename in the Define View dialog box 2 Enter the new name in the Rename field 3 Click the Rename button Locking Unlocking a View Orientation 1 Select the view you want to lock or unlock in the Define View dialog box 2 Click on the Lock symbol to unlock a view and click once in front of a view name in the views list to lock the view If the view was locked the Lock symbol will be removed if it was unlocked the lock symbol will be displayed Deleting a View Orientati
100. to draw on the sheet it must be active Placing a Detail view on a separate Sheet 1 Create a detail view on the current sheet 2 Select the Cut command in the pull down menu of the detail view 3 Choose the Sheet command in the Views menu and create a new sheet Sheet 2 using the New command in the Sheet dialog box 4 Active Sheet 2 by clicking the Current button 5 Choose the Insert command in the Edit menu to place the detail view onto Sheet 2 The detail view is placed on Sheet 2 and is associatively connected to the object geometry on Sheet 1 Flattening Views The two commands Flatten View and Flatten all Views project all geometry visible in a detail view window onto the current sheet The command Flatten View projects only one view window the active view while the command Flatten all Views all views projects Regardless of the method you use to create a View Window they all behave the same way How to create a non associative detail view is described at the end of this chapter You may also create the rectangle by clicking to place the diagonally opposite corners When a view window displays a title bar the view window is active When the view window has no title bar the underlying sheet is active Don t use the Cut com mand in the Edit menu since it cuts the geometry and not the detail view 169 Structuring Drawings Note All geometry invisible will not be projected but cut and del
101. tool the Modules menu 3 Click in the drawing area to indicate a location where you want to display the Bz of Materials The Bz1 of Materials of the current layout will be created at the clicked location The Bz of Materials is created in the font currently selected in the Text menu The Bill of Materials can be moved copied or deleted like any other object in DraftBoard Creating a Bill of Materials of selected objects 1 Select all objects you want to display in a Bill of Materials 2 Choose the Show Palette command from the BOM submenu in the Modules menu The BOM palette is displayed 3 Select the BOM tool 4 With the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key depressed click in the drawing area to indicate where you want to place the Bzl of Materials A Bill of Materials containing the se ected objects will be created and placed at the location you indicated with the last mouse click Editing Bill of Materials 1 Select the Bz of Materials with the Selection tool 2 Choose Ungroup command from the Arrange menu The Bill of Material is ungrouped into text and line objects which can be edited Exporting Bill of Materials Attributes assigned to objects in a drawing can be exported into an ASCII file to be used in other programs like text editors or spread sheets Exporting Bill of Materials 1 Assign all attributes 2 Select the Export command from the File menu The Export dialog box will be displayed
102. tool creates a horizontal base chain dimension displaying the rising distance between objects and spaces to a base point 20 8 49 7 71 4 rT When the dimension text appears you can drag it to a new location when you release the mouse button the dimension and extension lines are redrawn Vertical Dimension Tools These tools measure vertical space or the distance between vertical objects Vertical Dimension Tool This tool dimensions an object or space vertically Click the top point first then click the bottom Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display to the left of the objects 4A 4 000 When the dimension text appears you can drag it to a new location when you release the mouse button the dimension and extension lines are redrawn Vertical Base Line Dimension Tool This tool dimensions objects or space vertically from a base point Y 424 A u t46 1 688 Vertical Chain Dimension Tool This tool dimensions objects or space from end to end vertically 313 do 1 096 me 289 Vertical Ordinate Dimension Tool une This tool dimensions objects or space vertically from a base point Dimensions 000 228 l If you want to display the 58 dimension number for the base point you have to click the base point again 856 after you have clicked all other dimension points 1 319 Vertical Base Chain Dimens
103. trying to fit a view or group of views in a drawing format you may have to scale a view 1 Choose Properties from the Detail Views menu 2 Specify the scale you want and click OK Zooming within a view 1 Click inside the view to make it active 2 Hold down the Shift key Macintosh Ctrl key All commands from the Arrange pull down menu work inside the view when you hold down the Shift key Macintosh Ctrl key while choosing from the menu 3 Choose the Zoom command you want from the Arrange menu The geometry inside the view is zoomed Scrolling within a view 1 Click inside the view to make it active All scrollbar functionality S can be used inside the view 2 Hold down the Shift key Macintosh Ctrl key and move the when holding down the scrollbars Shift key Macintosh Ctrl The geometry inside the view is moved key while moving the scrollbars Bring To Front This command in the Views pull down menu brings the specified view to the front of the stack of views Bringing a specified view to the front 1 Select the view 2 Choose Bring To Front from the Views menu This command counteracts the Auto Front command so when you click you select objects in the view rather than activating another view Send To Back This command in the Views pull down menu sends the specified view to the back of the stack of views 171 Structuring Drawings This command only works for views 172 Bring
104. wireframe geometry See as well Editing Structured Surfaces in this chapter Structured Surfaces are always placed onto the current layer regard less of the layer on which the original wireframe geometry is located Calculating surfaces with the Auto Surface command 1 Construct the 3D wireframe geometry to be autosurfaced considering the respective rules 2 Select the geometry you want to autosurface 3 Select from the Color submenu in the Pen menu the desired color for your surfaced geometry For a good representation of the shaded model any color except black is recommended 4 Choose the Auto Surface command from the 3D menu DraftBoard identifies the surface boundaries for the selected geometry and calculates the respective surfaces A wireframe surface mesh appears on the screen that represents the calculated surfaces If the Auto Surface routine has trouble interpreting the selected geometry an error box will appear and the problematic geometry is highlighted See as well Auto Surface Error Messages in this chapter When you acknowledge the error message only the recognized surfaces are represented Unrecognized boundary lines are shown in the original geometry color In this case you must return to the original wireframe geometry using the Undo command in the Edit menu to correct the problem For more information about displaying surfaced geometry in Hidden Lines or Shaded view mode see Visualizing Objects in this chap
105. x 6 1 08 08 6 3 Iron DIN 1 0 8x8 1 08 08 8 3 lron DIN 1 0 8x 10 1 08 08 10 3 Copper 13 Save the table as an ASCIT file with the file extension txt under the name and in the same folder you have saved the norm part When you now place a symbol with an underlying value table using the Insert command or the Symbolmanager all predefined norm parts from your newly created part family are listed and can be selected Editing value tables 1 Open the value table with the file extension txt in the original Text Editor or Spreadsheet you used to create the table 2 Modify the table 3 Save the table as ASCII file text only and carriage returns under its original name 4 Important Delete the file with the same name that has the file extension Var It is in the same folder as the norm part with the file ex tension vlm and the value table with the file extension txt Symbols If you don t specify a value for the Quantity the default value 1 is automa tically assigned Important Don t define the attributes PartID and Quanti ty since they are assigned to the symbol automatically with the underlying value table How to use the Symbol Attribute Tool is described in the Geometric Analysis chapter in this manual In your value tables it is allowed to use units such as mm cm Inch etc to have the correct dimen sions for your symbols in dependent from the units set for the DraftBoard document Important It can ta
106. you must specify in this entry field an Angle for the offset direction When you want to place a symbol offset to the first location you click on the drawing area you must specify in this entry field an offset Distance When you activate this option the original Layer Structure of a grouped symbol will be kept when you ungroup it using the Ungroup command in the Arrange menu When you mark this option the Set button will show Apply and the mouse pointer changes its shape into a wrench tool When you select a symbol on the drawing area all related data of the selected Norm Part are displayed in the Symbolmanager You can modify the symbol data or select another Norm Part When you click the Apply button the symbol will be re shaped or substituted This option allows you to place symbols on the drawing area To place a symbol you must drag a vector on the drawing area for the insertion point and the orientation of the symbol When you click the Set button the symbol ts placed according to the dragged vector When you have specified an offset angle and distance the symbol ts placed offset to the insertion point according to the specified values Placing Library symbols 1 10 11 Display the Symbolmanager using the Symbolmanager command from the Symbols submenu in the File menu Select a library in the Library pop up list field The Symbols list field displays all symbols available in the selected library Select a
107. you have made any changes since you last saved the current document the Save dialog box allows you to save the changes You can close the document with or without saving the changes You can also close the document by double clicking the Control Menu button Macintosh Close box at the upper left corner of the title bar Quit Ctrl 0 Macintosh 38 0 This command in the File menu closes DraftBoard 1f you have made changes since you last saved the Save dialog box allows you to save the changes If you have more than one document open an alert message allows you to save unsaved documents Data Exchange DraftBoard like any other Computer program saves its data using its own native file format that can be identified by the file extension vlm Even though all programs have native file formats that are not compatible to each other it is possible to transfer data using neutral interchange formats such as IGES or DXF that standardize the data exchange When you want to read a file of a non compatible file format it is called Importing files when you want to save a file ina non native format type it is called Exporting files DraftBoard Documents Limitations Even if it is often advertised that programs can directly read and write file formats of competing products you should be aware that importing files is always limited since the exchange is done through standardized file formats such as DXF and IGES that can offer only a compromis
108. 1 2 Washer S 11 1 3 Bolt 22 1 Item numbers ate assigned with the Item Number tool in the BOM Tool palette Item Numbers With this tool in the BOM palette you assign Item Numbers to objects These Item Numbers will be automatically included in the BOM Assigning Item Numbers 1 Select the Item Number tool in the BOM palette The two entry fields Item and Width are displayed in the Status Line 2 Enter into the Item field the starting item number for the selected object 3 Click with the Item Number tool near the object you want to label 4 Click with the Item Number tool in the drawing area to indicate the position of the Item Number balloon The Item Numbers are placed at the location you clicked If you place additional position balloons the Item Numbers are auto matically increased The default Item Number is always incremented from the last Item Number used If you assign an Item Number to an object which was already assigned to another object the ztem numbers are adjusted as follows e If the new Item Number is lower than the highest already assigned Item Number all higher Item Numbers will be increased If the new Izem Number is higher than the highest assigned Item Number the existing Item Numbers remain unchanged The Item Number tool automatically recognizes if an object is a copy of an object to which a Item Number is already assigned as long as the original object has an attribu
109. 1 1 2 Dimension the part using parametric variables 3 Choose the Attribute command in the BOM submenu from the Modules menu The Attribute dialog box is displayed 4 Define all attributes such as material that you would need for a BOM 5 Choose Show Palette in the BOM submenu The Attribute Tool Palette is displayed 6 Assign the defined attributes using the Symbol Attribute tool 7 Save the part under a appropriate name 8 Note the names of all variables used for the part on a piece of paper 9 Open a text editor such as Notepad or SimpleText 10 In the first line enter the two labels PartID and Quantity followed by all parametric variables you have noted for your norm part and finally all user defined attributes you have assigned to the part All entries must be separated by a TAB stop At the end of the line you must hit the Enter Windows or Return Macintosh key 11 In the next line enter the respective values for the norm part All values have to be separated by a TAB stop as well 12 Enter the values line by line for all norm parts pressing the Enter or the Return key after each line Your table should look similar to the following graphic after all values entered it the yeginning of the defined at 1e el d of he table Material PartID Quantity d r I ML DIN 1 0 6 x 4 1 06 06 4 3 Steel DIN 1 0 6x6 1 06 06 6 3 Steel DIN 1 0 6x8 1 06 06 8 3 Steel DIN 1 0 6x 10 1 06 06 10 3 Steel DIN 1 0 8
110. 18 0 25 Andere Andere Specifying a non standard text size Choosing Other from the Size submenu brings up a dialog box allowing you to specify the exact text size you desire in whatever units you ve set for your drawing You can specify point size by entering pt after the value in the entry box for example if you enter 11 pt the font size will be 11 point 1 Choose Other from the Size submenu in the Text menu Font Size Font Size 2 Enter the size you want The size is measured in the current units as set in the Preferences submenu If you want to specify a point size include pt with your numeric entry 3 Click OK The size you specify stays in effect until you choose another size Text Size and Scaling When you scale a drawing using the Drawing Size command without the options keep text size and keep dimension text size after you have added tex and dimensions you have to assign the correct text size again in the Text and Dimension menus This is not necessary when you add zex and dimensions after scaling or scale the drawing with the options keep text size and keep dimension text size active Style This command in the Text menu sets the style such as bo d or underline for selected text or future text entries Text Font P Size gt Style v Normal Bold Italic Underline Text Fills and Hatches The style you specify stays in effect until you choose another style A
111. 2 Parametric Drafting EN o 1 Add constraint lines to connect the geometry between sections 2 Add a dimension to specify the distance between the sections See the two boxes problem earlier in this section 3 Add extra thickness T dimensions since all geometry must be defined jt OL D OL BC 2 BC gt Sa m OL SW 2 E0 m Parametric Drafting BR T BR T 1 Dimension each fillet as explained earlier 2 Relate this section to the rest of the geometry 3 Add a dimension to specify the distance between the sections Three sections are related as shown below This is the completed parametric drawing Parametrics Parametrics and Grouped Objects You can create many objects and then group them and treat them as a single parameterized object There must be a framework on which the group sits Dimension between two control points on the framework and then resolve the framework the group changes accordingly shrinking or expanding proportionately to the distance between the control points You can create a spline and group it Then create a framework L line between the endpoints and dimension the line When you resolve for the L length of the line L the spline changes accordingly Using parametrics and grouped geometry 1 Create the geometry to be parameterized Select the geometry 2 3 Choose Group from the Ar
112. 20 welding symbols 142 witness lines 130 dimetric view 254 directories preferences 58 divide command 96 documentation 9 documents 183 autosave 188 backup 187 close 188 convert 196 export 193 import 189 new 186 open 186 preview 184 properties 184 recent file list 187 save 187 dot size 133 draft 4 258 draftboard prefs 59 drafting at full scale 151 creating a drawing 150 drawing size 155 process 150 drafting aids 15 drag amp drop 102 dragging 14 drawing area 15 drawing assistant 35 Point 38 additional creation angles 38 alignment angles 37 construction lines 38 DAssistant 36 dynamic construction lines 38 hit radius 37 permanent construction lines 39 perpendiculars 36 snap filter 37 snap points 35 stroke construction lines 39 tangents 36 drawing formats 174 importing 175 modifying 175 drawing scale 152 drawing size command 155 drawing techniques 14 drawing tools 17 dual dimensions 128 duplicating objects 90 dwe 189 305 dxf 189 305 dynamic construction lines 38 dynamic rotation 292 E edit objects command 94 edit pattern command 52 edit style command 55 editing commands 89 ellipse tools 22 endpoint drawing assistant 35 eps 157 189 erasing objects 90 expand shrink tool 85 export 193 3D Settings 297 ProE Render 193 vlm 3 0 4 0X 193 Export 3D Max Chord Length 298 Max Edge Length 298 Min Edge Length 298 expressions 302 extended radial arrow in dimension 123 extrude comma
113. 3 Drag the pointer to the view orientation you want to display and release the mouse button The current view orientation is updated Views This command in the Views menu displays the view orientation submenu so that you can set the orientation of the active view or the sheet as long as there are no detail views Views Sheets Sheet Into View Models Views gt v Top Bottom Front Rear Left Right Isometric Dimetric Trimetric Defining Views There are several possibilities to define views using the Define View command in the Views menu using the Unfold View command in the Views menu using the Flatten View command in the Views menu using the View the Plane command in the Views menu Define View This command in the Views menu allows you to define auxiliary view orientations or change the standard view orientations such as the Top View All views defined additionally using the Define View command are automatically included into the Views submenu and can be selected from the Trackball menu Choosing the Define View command displays the following dialog box BE Define View Right Isometric Dimetric Trimetric Rename The Define View dialog box allows the following settings View list This list window contains all defined views A check mark indicates the active view a locked checkbox any locked view To redefine a view the locked checkbox has
114. 5 Drag a vector on the drawing area for the ocation and the direction of the Parallel light source An icon for the Parallel Light source appears on the screen with arrows aiming in the specified direction A 6 Ifthe size of the light source is too small or too large change the scale factor in the status line accordingly and press the Enter key 7 Choose Shaded in the View Mode submenu to display your geometry with your specified light settings 8 If necessary change the color and intensity of the light source using the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu see as well Editing Light sources at the end of this chapter Modifying the Lighting As you design your geometry and shade it you may also want to view it under various lighting conditions either by changing the layout or editing the light source If you want to see the effect of your lighting changes without having to continuously switch from the Wireframe to the Shaded view mode create a Detail View window of your geometry Your sheet view automatically becomes the Top view You now can move add or delete light sources from the Top view and see the effect on your shaded geometry in the Detail view When you make changes this way DraftBoard will automatically reshade your geometry Editing Light sources 1 Select the light source symbol in the Wireframe view mode 2 Choose the Edit Objects in the Edit menu The Edit Objects dialog box is displayed listing all at
115. 5 3 5678 Be sure that you do a Return after the last coordinate if not DraftBoard will not import the coordinates specified in the last line 3 Save the file as Text only and import into DraftBoard to create the spline Exporting a Drawing All settings for exporting a drawing are specified either automatically ot by option buttons in the respective Export dialog windows displayed when exporting a file Only for the export of 3D Models general preferences can be set with the Export 3D command in the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu Export 3D When you select this command the following dialog box is displayed Mesh Control Max Angle Max aspect ratio Min edge length 0 000 Max edge length 0 000 Max chord length All settings in this dialog window apply only for the Export of 3D Models while identical settings in the Visualization dialog box apply for the representation of 3D Models The following settings in the Export 3D dialog box are valid for all Export data interfaces that tessellate 3D Models for the export DXF DWG STL SLP and apply only for triangulated surfaces Max Angle This value describes the maximum possible Exterior Angle between two approximation triangles Allowed are values gt 0 The default value is 20 The smaller the value the larger becomes the number of facets This increases the precision of the model representation but also increases the calculation time M
116. Board gives you several ways to 200m in ot zoom out on your drawing Zoom Commands You find four Zoom commands in the Arrange menu Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom All and Zoom Previous Choosing the Zoom Previous command takes you to the last magnification If you want to zoom a particular area use the Stroke feature or the Magnifying tool for zooming Strokes are described later in this chapter Zoom All Ctrl F Macintosh 38F This command in the Arrange menu zooms in or out to make all parts of the drawing visible on the screen Zoom In Ctrl Macintosh 38 This command in the Arrange menu zooms in on the center of the screen by a factor of two You cannot specify a particular area for enlargement Zoom Out Ctrl Macintosh 38 This command in the Arrange menu zooms out from the center of the screen by a factor of two You cannot specify the area of reduction Zoom Previous This command in the Arrange menu zooms to the previous magnification as many as five times Zoom Tools Select the appropriate zoom tool from the View Control tool palette efe fer Basic Drafting Important Each Zooming is followed by a screen redraw You can press the Pause or Esc key Macin tosh only Esc key to stop redrawing the screen Important Each Zooming is followed by a screen redraw You can press the Pause or Esc key Macin tosh only Esc key to stop redrawing the screen 147 Basic Drafting To zoom into or out of
117. Click OK The DXF DWG Options dialog box is displayed DXF DWG Options C Dimensions as Geometry Important Tips for importing DWG DXF Files DraftBoard Documents Specify the required options When you choose the option Dimension as geometry all dimensions are imported as geometry objects if not they are imported as dimensions Click OK DraftBoard begins creating the imported file on the drawing area When you import a DWG or DXF file the geometry is constructed according to the units set in Preferences when you choose the Import command Be sure to set the appropriate units used in the AutoCAD File before you import DWG or DXF geometry When you import a DWG or DXF file the Drawing Scale in the DraftBoard Drawing size dialog box in the Layout menu must be set to 1 1 to make sure that the imported drawing is correctly scaled DraftBoard supports only 256 layers If you have a DWG or DXF file containing more than 256 layers all geometry on the additional layers will automatically be placed on the current work layer in DraftBoard If you don t want this to happen reduce the number of layers to a maximum of 256 in the application you will be creating the DWG or DXF file in When you get after importing a DWG or DXF File into Draft Board geometry not contained in the original AutoCAD file you must purge any unnecessary blocks using the PURGE command in AutoCAD before exporting the file If the fi
118. Die Width of the border frame equals the longest text line of the imported ASCII Text When you import a drawing format you have to mark the option unscaled in or der to place the drawing format at it s original size onto the drawing area If you cannot see the import ed drawing format you have to select the Zoom all com mand in the Arrange menu If you have placed by mis take two drawing formats in a drawing all entry fields of both title blocks are dis played in the Title Block dialog box 108 amp Options Font Arial x Size 12 pt v O Bold CO Italics Stand Alone Frame Cok O Arrowline rn O Witness Line In this dialog box you can specify whether you want to place the annotation in a border frame with a position leader or an arrow line For all marked annotations you can specify the Text fonts the Text size and the Text style such as bold ot italic Creating and placing Text blocks 1 Choose the TextBlocks command in the Text menu 2 Create a new Text Group with a new Text Block by selecting first a text group and clicking then the New button You can overwrite the automatically created names Group 1 and Text 1 using the Rename button 3 In order to assign to the newly created tex block an extended text you must click the Extensions button The Extensions dialog box is displayed 4 Import an ASCII text you have created before with an text editor from the Text folder
119. Distance field while dragging The offset Direction is also filled in the respective entry fields when you drag the offset distance since the vector you drag determines the Offset Direction automatically The geometry will be only grouped if the Grouped option was checked 93 Editing objects You can change a single characteristic faster by simply selecting the object and changing the characteristic But if you are changing several characteristics or any measurements or positions you should use the Edit Objects command Many boxes have pop up menus for selection Press the down arrow and then drag to the selection you want In the Edit Objects dialog box you can use mathemat ical operators A list of all allowed operators is in the Appendix of this manual You can use different units in each entry box like inch feet feet inches x y centimeter cm millimeter mm or Meter m You are also allowed to mix English and metric units as long as they are labelled correctly like 10 25 4 cm 94 Changing the Characteristics of Objects You can edit selected objects by either changing individual characteristics such as layer or line style or by changing the specifications in the Edit Objects dialog box The Edit Objects dialog box also provides information about the selected object in addition to allowing you to make changes Edit Objects Ctrl l Macintosh sel This command in the Edi
120. Edit menu The Edit Objects dialog is displayed 3 Change the pen characteristic in the Edit Objects dialog box 4 Click the Apply button The selected objects reflects the new pen characteristics The characteristics of the current pen are not modified Colors The Color submenu in the Pen menu contains 234 color options from a palette of 16 7 million colors available 64 colors are predefined 170 colors are user definable You select a new color for the current pen from the Color submenu in the Pen menu where you find also the command to define your own colors Color This command in the Pen menu specifies the color of the current pen and any selected geometry without changing any other pen characteristics Pen Style Color gt Define Weight gt Palette gt Pattern gt 5 w Black Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta More You can change the color of the current pen in the Color submenu by selecting a color name or by selecting a new color from the Color subpalette Specifying the color of the current pen by selecting a color name 1 Select the Color command from the Pen menu The submenu appears 2 Drag to the color you want The current pen and all selected objects takes on the new color and the color is selected in the submenu Setting the Environment 3 Select more from the Color submenu if you want to select a different color than one of the seven displayed basic co
121. Export dialog windows displayed when exporting a file The following file types can be exported DraftBoard 4 5 DraftBoard s native file format File extension vlm Vim 3 0 4 0X In DraftBoard Unlimited 4 5 the file format was modified and is therefore incompatible to all previous versions With the Vlm 3 0 4 0X format files can be exported into previous versions File name extension vlm Text ASCII characters This option is available only if in DraftBoard the Text tool is the active tool File name extension Ext BOM Attributes This format exports all Bi s of Material Attributes of a drawing as ASCIT Table File name extension txt Bitmap Microsoft Windows Bitmap file an interchange for mat specifically used for pixel graphics File name extension bmp Windows only PICT The Macintosh graphics file format which uses object oriented bitmaps or resolution independent graphics Macintosh only MetaFile The format is used by the Windows Clipboard an interchange format specifically used for graphics commands The precision equals the computer screen precision and exports graphics as vectors and pixel as represented on the screen File name extension wmf for the 16 bit Window version ot emf for the 32 bit Window version Windows only PNG Portable Network Graphics Format a graphic for mat mainly used for distributing Internet graphics File name extension png DXF DWG AutoCAD Data eX change Form
122. Hatches This chapter describes the features you can use to add detail to your drawing text crosshatching and solid fills Text When you want to annotate your drawing you ll use the Text tool to create a text box for entering characters from the keyboard You can create import and edit text on screen You can use the Text menu to set the characteristics such as font text size style alignment line spacing and indentation Text Tool Al This tool on the tool palette allows you to create and edit text on screen The text you enter has the characteristics set in the Text menu Creating text 1 Select the Text tool from the tool palette 2 Create a text box by dragging or by clicking two locations to place the opposite corners of the text area The text box which appears is as tall as a single line of text and as wide as you indicate The text cursor appears in the box ready for your typing 3 Enter the desired text from the keyboard Pressing the Delete key erases characters to the left of the cursor The text you enter automatically word wraps to the next line when it reaches the right side of the text box If you resize the text box the words rewrap automatically Importing a text file You can import an ASCII file that contains text you want to use in your drawing For example you can place specifications you ve written with a word processor on your drawing without retyping it The entire file is imported
123. It is recommended to delete Sheet into View command in the Views menu all existing detail views be fore using the Sheet into 3 Align the model within the view windows and the view windows View command within the drawing format according to the standard drawing rules 4 Flatten a view in case you want to edit the geometry in that view window without modifying the geometry in the other view windows 5 Dimension the geometry on the sheet or in the view windows Since each view is associated with the model all changes made in one view will be reflected in the other views The same is not true for Text Dimensions Crosshatching and Fills 261 3D Basics The following Standard Drawing Formats are available in the Layouts folder for the use with 2D Draftings A4 Portrait amp 4 Views Al Portrait amp 4 Views A4 Landscape amp 4 Views A1 Landscape amp 4 Views A3 Portrait amp 4 Views AO Portrait amp 4 Views A3 Landscape amp 4 Views A0 Landscape amp 4 Views A2 Portrait amp 4 Views A2 Landscape amp 4 Views The object geometry on the sheet will be placed in four views Top Front Right and Trimetric within a Standard Drawing Format A4 A3 AZ Al AO 262 3D Modelling Work Plane The Design Process 3D Features and Tools 3D Construction Rules 3D Modelling 3D Modelling This chapter provides all information you need for modelling three dimensional objects e Work Planes e Desig
124. Lock Spline Control Points from the Spline tool subpalette 5 If necessary select the point you want to lock but not the endpoint 6 Use the Selection tool to select the point at the end of the tangent control arm you want to move 7 Drag the point to a new location Function Plotters The two integrated Function Plotters parametrical and explicit allow to create complex curves by calculating curve points that can be connected by a spline or line segments Supported mathematical Operators Creating Geometry The following mathematical operators are supported by the two function plotters Operators Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Square Root Parenthetical Exponentiation Sine of Angle Cosine of Angle Log Base 10 Absolute Value Largest Smaller Integer Function f x f x y Example 3 0 5 3 5 3 0 5 2 5 3 0 5 1 5 3 0 5 6 sqrt 2 1 4142 3 4 1 0 5 0 5 2 7 128 sin 30 0 5 cos 60 0 5 log 100 2 abs 2 2 floor 1 4142 1 The explicit Function Plotter calculates functions of y dependent on x or functions of z dependent on x and y When you choose the Function f x f x y command in the Modules menu the following dialog box is displayed The value m must be en tered into the boxes f x and F x y as PI in capital EE Function Plot Explicit Equation Of sing Offxy sinfx cosf y Connect Points along X Connect as along Y Lines
125. Macro If you call the Macro command in the Utilities menu the following dialog box is displayed lo Macro E Names Strokes Commands stroke82223 Layout Show Grid e Ei Fe JO In Utilities Menu The Macro dialog box is modeless in the sense that there are no Start Recording or Stop Recording buttons Whatever action you perform selecting menu items or defining strokes will be recorded automatically in the relating list boxes as long as the Macro dialog box is displayed The Macro dialog box contains the following buttons New Clicking the New button adds a macro named Macrol to the Names list box You can rename the macro in the Rename field by overwriting Macrol with a new name and then clicking the Rename button Rename Clicking the Rename button overwrites the selected macro name in the Names list box with the name you entered in the Rename field Remove The Remove button will remove any selected entry from one of the three list boxes File The File button will write all currently defined macros to files in the Scripts folder of the DraftBoard directory The file names are generated directly from the macro names The files are output in such a way that when DraftBoard is subsequently started the macros will be activated automatically Macro files can be moved to other locations or to other machines fot use in other copies of DraftBoard Run The Run button will run the macro currently selected in the Name
126. Preferences from the Preferences submenu on the Layout menu You cannot save geometry in this way you would have to open the preferences file create the geometry and save the file Save When you select this command the Status visible Palettes hidden and the Position of all palettes are saved to preferences When you restart DraftBoard all palettes that were displayed when you closed DraftBoard are automatically reopened Position and Status for the following palettes are saved with this command e Dimension palette e Symbol palette e Function palette e BOM palette Status and Position of these palettes are saved in the DraftBoard ini file under the section Palettes The preferences file name is prefs vlm Macintosh DraftBoard Prefs The file must be stored in the same directory as the DraftBoard application If you want to use different settings for your work you can change the default settings and then every new document opens with the settings you have selected The following specifications can be set in the preferences file e Pen styles e Text characteristics e Text Margins Preferences settings Snap Grid Units and Selection indicator Auto Save Document Properties and Directory settings Grid display e Layer and sheet specifications e Work layer e Dimension and tolerance formats Arrowhead type and display e Drawing size and scale e Zoom scale e Fillet radius e Chamfer angle and l
127. Selection tool palette you find as well the Tracer tool for automatically selecting boundary lines All Selection tools allow when pressing the Shift key to select or deselect additional objects Selection Tool Ly The Selection tool on the tool palette selects one or more objects or points in the drawing area Selecting a single object 1 Click the Selection tool in the tool palette 2 Move the pointer to an object and click The object is selected and previously selected objects are deselected Selecting multiple objects by shift clicking 1 Click the Selection tool in the tool palette 2 Move the pointer to an object and click 3 Press and hold down the Shift key 4 While holding down the Shift key click other objects to be selected The objects you clicked are selected If you then click one of the selected objects it is deselected 5 Release the Shift key Selecting multiple objects by dragging If you want to select more than one object you can drag with the mouse button pressed a selection marquee around the objects 1 Click the Selection tool in the tool palette 2 Drag a selection marquee around the objects you want to select Selected control point selected r object Selection marquee hk All objects that lie completely inside the selection marquee are selected If a portion of an object is outside the region youdragged that geometry is not selected but the contro points of that geo
128. Undo s and Redo s is limited to 32 If you are using a tool which involves a multistep process such as constructing con nected lines or creating a 3 point fillet choosing Undo reverts to the beginning of the process Some other activities can be stopped by pressing the Escape key An asterisk appearing beside an entry field indicates that you can fill in the box by dragging the mouse in the drawing area to indicate the length 90 The Clipboard The Cut and Copy commands both place a copy of the selected object on the Chipboard The Clipboard is a buffer a temporary storage place that holds the last cut or copied selection The contents of the Clipboard are objects not bitmaps Erasing Geometry You can use several methods to erase objects e You can select the object s then press the Backspace key e You can retrieve what you deleted with the Undo command You can undo the last eight actions e You can select the object s then choose the Delete command from the Edit menu You can retrieve what you deleted with the Undo command e You can select the object s then choose Cut from the Edit menu You can retrieve what you cut by using the Paste command as long as you bave not cut or copied anything else Delete This command in the Edit menu deletes a selection without placing it onto the Clipboard You can Undo this deletion but you cannot paste what is deleted In addition to this command you
129. Views and Models are very helpful to display several components of a part created by different drafters on one sheet The following simple example shows how to perform this task 1 2 3 4 5 6 Open a new document Draw an ellipse Save the drawing as Ellipse vlm Open a new document and draw a rectangle Select Sheet Into View in the Views menu Choose the Layout Top View set the Scale to 1 and click OK __ Model space 2 n You now have one Sheet with one view window showing the Rectangle Model 1 The Sheet camera is aligned to Model 2 created with the Sheet Into View command displaying a blank model space on the sheet Make the sheet active by clicking on it and draw a circle Select Sheet Into View the sheet still active and choose Top View again with the Scale factor 1 _ Modellraum 3 lt 4 rs __ Modell 2 Kreis aai rn de _ Modell Rechteck 179 10 Now you have one Sheet with two view windows one displaying the rectangle Model 1 and one displaying the circle which be came Model 2 The Sheet camera is moved to the new Model 3 and an empty model space is displayed on the sheet Activate the sheet by clicking on it and select Import in the File menu Select the file Ellipse vlm and click OK The ellipse is imported on the current sheet and added to Model 3 which was active when you performed the Import command __ Model 3 Ellipse ar 1 __ Model 2 Circle
130. Web Page www draftborad de 62 Setting the Environment All commands for adding functions and commands to DraftBoard are listed in the Extra menu Utilities Reload Add Command Add Function Show Palette Macro All functions and commands you want to bind into DraftBoard must be in the Function directory or folder of DraftBoard Reload This commands allows you to reload additional functions and commands while DraftBoard is already running since only loaded functions and commands can be added into the Utilities menu and displayed in the additional function palette All functions and commands that are placed in the Function folder are loaded automatically when DraftBoard is launched If you copy additional functions and commands into the Function directory while DraftBoard is already running they must be reloaded using the Reload command in the Extra menu Add Commands When you call this command the following dialog box is displayed E Add Command Commands Menu gt gt File antidot fe The Add Commands dialog box allows the following settings Commands This list box contains all commands from the Function folder that can be added into the Utilities menu These commands were automatically loaded when DraftBoard was started or reloaded using the Reload command when DraftBoard was already running File This field shows the file name of the source code file for the selected com
131. X boxes as PI in capital letters followed by empty brackets When defining functions only Periods are allowed as decimal indicators no Commas After clicking the Plot button no more values can be specified with the mouse on the drawing area After clicking the Plot button no more values can be specified with the mouse on the drawing area 29 Creating Geometry The value nm must be specified for the variables X y and z as PI in capital letters and entered into the Start X and End X boxes as PI in capital letters followed by empty brack ets When defining functions only Periods are allowed as decimal indicators no Commas 30 Plot Plotting a Parabola or in both directions with a Spline or Line segments When you click the Plot button the curve will be calculated for the specified function values and automatically plotted on the drawing area as a Spline or Line segments when the option Connect points is activated In the following example we will calculate and plot a parabola that will be offset by 1 unit from the x axis and by 2 units from the y axis and will be stretch by the factor 2 1 Choose the Function f x f x y command from the Modules menu The Function f x f x y dialog box is displayed 2 Select the option f x Enter the formula 2 x 1 2 2 into the f x entry box 4 Enter the value 0 into the Start x entry field or click with the mouse a point on the drawing ar
132. _ ne that extends beyond the citcle gt as illustrated here D 2 Use the Rotate tool on the Transformation subpalette to move the endpoint of the circle to the tangent point of the line that extends beyond the circle 3 Divide the line into two segments which join at the tangent point Parametrics Pay attention to single points Remember the parametric mechanism connects the dots Fre quently one constraint or dimension can solve several problems at once 209 Parametrics 210 Relationships Involving Symmetry If you create geometry with a mirrored copy the parametric mechanism cannot resolve and maintain the symmetry without more information H1 E AU PROBLEM t A The problem message shows thtee unrelated w S groups the trapezoid on the left and the two a rightmost corners as shown below H2 2 Each of these points is considered an unrelated group Hi x Unrelated Groups of Geometry Problem shown 1 of 3 Cancel Next N If parametrics swings an arc of the radius H1 and H2 it doesn t know where the point is supposed to be on the arc The point has a distance but no 7 direction unless an angle dimension is added H2 SOLUTION A Single points that are considered a group n N provide a clue to the solution In this example the parametric mechanism does not know where those points are rela mie tive to the original trapezoid You can solve the
133. a hexagon but you can specify the number of sides in the status line Note The status line shows a diameter for the circle the standard way of describing a polygon circumscribed around a circle Using the Circumscribed Polygon tool e Click the center of the polygon and the midpoint of one of the sides or e Drag from the center of the polygon to the midpoint of one of the sides You can create a copy of the last circumscribed polygon by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and clicking where you want the center X Y DJ Sides 6 The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center the diameter of the circle defining the polygon and the number of sides The default number of sides is 6 Diameter is the default status line selection Spline Tools NIN Ice The spline tools on the tool palette create NURBs Non Uniform Rational B Splines which are a superset of Bezier curves These splines are curves created by a complex mathematical formula NURB splines provide designers with two interrelated functions First curvature continuity remains intact when the curve is changed Kinks don t develop as the spline is altered Second NURB splines provide localized control of a complex curve You can isolate an area and make changes without affecting the remainder of the spline These properties are essential in aerodynamic designs Air molecules moving o
134. about the target area appears in a box with a GD amp T feature control frame Pape 300 amp o 002 MA B c Y Y F c Basic Dimensions Since the tolerance for a dimension is in the feature control frame GD amp T dimensions are also basic dimensions and appear in a box The value defines the theoretically perfect location and implies that the tolerance is in the featute control frame gt To specify the basic dimension format set the GDST Format in the Dimension Editor Choose Preferences in the Dimension menu to display the Dimension Editor GD amp T Feature Control Frame This section discusses the GDET Labelling of the left hole in the plate below Typically the GD amp T Feature Control Frame appears as shown below Dimension Geometric Characteristic Diameter 315 Position Tolerance 310 Z Material Condition amp 0 02 MA B C Datum Datum nv B lt Datum gt A Geometric Characteristic The first section of the Feature Control Frame contains the geometric characteristic symbol The feature control shown above describes True Position how to locate the circular target area for the hole The possible characteristics are as follows Straightness The axis of an item of revolution or ele ment of a surface is a straight line S 00 04 a 7o m
135. al dimensions 120 view modes 289 shaded 289 visible lines 290 visible lines analytical 291 292 view scale 153 171 view the plane command 259 viewport manager 149 views 168 associative detail views 168 bring to front 171 defining 3D views 255 detail view tool 169 draw view boundaries 172 flatten all views command 260 flatten view command 260 layouts 258 multiple 257 plot scale 178 properties 171 scaling 173 scrolling within a view 171 send to back 171 sheet view 168 standard views 253 tools 147 unfold view command 259 view scale 171 view the plane command 259 zooming in detail views 171 visible line style 54 visible lines analytical 291 292 visible lines comand 290 visualization 289 antialiasing 292 background color 292 dynamic rotation 292 lights 294 max angle 291 max chord length 292 max edge length 292 preferences 291 vim 189 Vim 3 0 4 0X 193 W wall symbols 19 walls and layers 163 smart wall tool 19 symbols 19 weight 49 welding symbols 142 wireframe comand 289 wireframe models 251 witness lines 130 wmf 189 work plane 265 Z zoom commands 147 stroke commands 148 tools 147 viewport manager 149 windows 149 Index 321
136. amp T label 1 Choose GD amp T from the Dimension menu The GD amp T dialog box appears Pop up Men s Entry Boxes El GD amp T Label ine OOO ine IC IC II Proj P 9 Stand Alone Datum O Arrow Line O Witness Line 2 Click a button Stand Alone Arrow Line or Witness Line to indicate the way you want the DET symbol connected to the geometry you re labelling 3 Enter the appropriate data to create the DET abel Two types of entries are possible in this dialog box 139 Dimensions It is not possible to modify the font size using the Edit button in the Surface Symbol dialog box 140 e Selecting symbols from pop up menus that appear when you press the square buttons Stand Alone O Arrow Line O Witness Line e Entering text in the rectangular boxes by clicking to place a text cursor and then typing the entry 4 Indicate the location of the label The message line displays the instructions you need e If you want a Stand Alone label click the location for the upper left corner of the GD amp T label e If you want a label connected with an arrow line or witness line click on the geometry you wish to label and then click on the drawing area to indicate
137. and in the Layout menu or the Sheet Into View command in the Views menu Since both commands affect elements of a drawing the same way while scaling the following sections describe only scaling with the Drawing Size command Scaling Object geometry Let s assume that a drawing exists only of object geometry created with solid lines In that case you can see the result of the scaling only by the changed size Of the paper format represented by a grey rectangle in the drawing area for the printing plotting region of the page If the grey rectangle for the page size isn t visible you can t see the reduced or increased size of the object geometry caused by the scaling command since the size of the individual objects didn t change in relation to each other but only in relation to the paper size Scaling Line patterns and Crosshatch patterns When you use hatches and dashed lines in a drawing the line dashes and hatch patterns are displayed at their true size When these ine dashes are very small in relation to the remaining object geometry size of object geometry in meters and size of ine dashes in mil limeters you can t identify these ine dashes on the screen before scal ing since they are displayed at actual size When you scale the drawing the object geometry is scaled while the dashes of the lines and hatch patterns keep their true size Therefore line and hatch patterns change size in relation to each other When you reduce th
138. angle defining the ellipse If the three points are on the vertical or horizontal axis a straight line is drawn You can create a copy of the last ellipse by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and clicking where you want the center Y L1 A1 L2 A2 90 The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center point and the ength and angle of the sides of the parallelogram 3 Corner Ellipse Tool This tool draws an ellipse inscribed in the parallelogram calculated from the three corners you specify Using the 3 Corner Ellipse tool 1 Indicate one corner of the parallelogram defining the ellipse 2 Indicate another corner of the defining parallelogram 3 Indicate the final corner of the defining parallelogram If the three points are on the vertical or horizontal axis a straight line is drawn You can create a copy of the last ellipse by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and clicking where you want the lower left corner of the parallelogram Y L1 wi L2 w gt 2 90 The status line allows you to specify the x y coordinates of a corner and the length and angle of the sides of the parallelogram Polygon Tools QEEelsfolo These tools on the tool palette draw rectangles inscribed polygons or Use the entry boxes D and circumscribed polygons Some of the rectangle tools create si
139. anism cannot recognize e Parallel lines may not remain parallel e Perpendicular lines may not remain perpendicular e Symmetrical geometry may not remain symmetrical Using the parametric mechanism you create objects covering a wide range of validity due to their variable dimensions This general validity expires whenever you assign true values to an object and transform it to a defined shape and size Due to the rules of parametric this precise shape cannot be reverted to its original state under certain circum stances Therefore return always to the original part between tests Creating Parametric Objects When approaching the problem of resolving geometry evaluate it as though you were going to draw it on paper Remember the assumptions and requirements for geometric relationships as outlined in the previous Basic Rules section Parametric Dimensions The essence of parametrics is in the dimensions The dimensions may be the actual value which you get by default a constant which is not the actual value a single variable or an algebraic expression involving constants variables mathematical operators functions and condition al operators Constants are specific numeric values such as specifying a radius as 25 inch Variable expressions may be as simple as a single letter such as L for length or a mathematical expression such as 2 Dia where Dia may be the diameter The arithmetic operators are addition su
140. ant to assign the new settings to a selected dimension All selected dimensions are redrawn and reflect the new appearance set in the dimension editor Dimension Text All settings for dimension text including Welding and Surface Symbols are done in the Dimension Text dialog box When you click the Dim Text button the following dialog box is displayed The Font more Size Other Style Dimension Text Size _ apt Position O Leading 0 s J Trailing O s DO Leading 0 s Trailing 0 s Tol Text Size Cl temp Text related arrowsize Dimension Tolerances Dimension Text dialog box allows the following settings This pop up menu allows you to choose the text font for the selected standard and for all selected and future dimensions The Font submenu can display up to 20 fonts 1f you have installed more than 20 fonts you have to click the more button to get access to all available fonts BE More Fonts e The Fonts dialog box lists all fonts installed on your computer including DraftBoard s plotter fonts This pop up menu allows you to choose the tex size for the selected standard and for all selected and future dimensions The text size can be specified either in pont in mm Ot inch depending on the units you have set under Units in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu Choosing Other from the Size submenu brings up a dialog box allowing you to specify a
141. art j i T E E A Add and group these lines Be sure these groups match the endpoints on the geometry Triangle Link For a final example of using parametrics with groups see how a triangle becomes the foundation for three different groups of a rod and piston Begin with a parametric triangle that resolves with one variable the angle A A mE Lu Then create the geometry below and group it into three separate groups Sl Once the groups are linked to the parametric geometry two control points of the group match two endpoints of the line you can resolve the triangle and the groups will change accordingly Two control points Two control points Two control points 45 Resolved geometry where A 45 Resolved geometry where A 15 Kinematic Kinematic is an enhancement to Parametrics the animation of parametrized parts To control the motion of these kinematic parts you can define specific parameters The Calculate Motion command in the Parametrics submenu creates and plays a series of frames which resolve the parametric geometry as specified If you define a measure point using the Define Measure Points command in the Parametrics submenu the path of this point can be tracked and displayed Creating a kinematic part The following steps describe how to create a parametric part 1 Create a part having only one variable for the Rotation Angle For rotary motions you should define an angle as
142. assignment like 2 50 If you use the sign the format must be Text not Number Select a format for the new attribute In the examples given above the format is Number Geometric Analysis Click into the Format pop up menu and drag the mouse pointer with the left mouse button pressed to the desired format As soon as you release the mouse button the selected format displays in the pop up menu Text Text Number Quantity System 5 Click the Redefine button The new attribute name appears in the attributes list and the specified value and format is assigned to the attribute 6 Close the Define Attributes dialog box by clicking the Close button in the title bar of the dialog box Defining Numerical Attributes All attributes that are calculated and displayed in 2D Analysis can be defined as numerical attributes for the Bill of Materials If you want to use these attributes in the BOM you have to define them according to the following list in the Define Attributes dialog box e Perimeter e Area e Weight Centroid X Centrojd Y Inertia IXX Inertia IYY Inertia IXY Por numerical attributes enter only the attribute s name since their values and formats are predefined Numerical attributes are not assigned but only defined for the extraction see as well BOM Layout in this chapter Therefore you must hide them before assigning any non numerical attributes Defining parametrical Variables It is
143. aste command You can also paste the selection into another document or into a document created with another application If you want to create an even distribution of geometty you can use Linear Duplicate or Polar Duplicate in the Edit menu Editing objects The difference between the Cut and Copy commands is that cutting a selection removes it from the draw ing area while a copied se lection remains in the draw ing area You can also erase selections with the Delete or Backspace key or by choosing Delete from the Edit menu Selections erased in this way do not go on the Clipboard and cannot be pasted You can restore them however by using Undo If you want to move an ob ject from one layer to an other use the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu You can also create a copy of an object or text box with the Selection tool First select the object then hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and drag a copy of the object to a new location You can copy an object using any of the Trans formation tools by holding down the Ctrl key Mac intosh Option key while using the tool If the object was cut or copied from a DraftBoard document when it is past ed it goes on the layer it was on when it was cut or copied A pasted selection retains its original attri butes Objects cut or cop ied from non DraftBoard documents are pasted onto the work layer 89 Editing objects The number of
144. at of AutoCAD This data interface supports the AutoCAD Formats DXF DWG of Versions 10 11 12 13 14 and 2000 2002 File name extension dwg ot dxf EPS AI Encapsulated PostScript Format a data format for PostScript printers or for the export in PostScript compatible applications DraftBoard supports the EPS Format of the Adobe Illustrator and com patible EPS Formats File name extension eps IGES IGES 4 0 Initial Graphics Exchange S pecification format to standardize the exchange of graphics File name extension igs Stereo Lithography tereo Lithography Tessellation Language a format for Rapid Prototyping that is required for the creation of prototypes This format exports only three di mensional structured surfaces and surfaced ob jects File name extension stl ProE Render ProEngineer Render File Format a format from Pro E for Rendering 3D models File name extension stp Export This command in the File menu saves a document in the format you specify Exporting a document 1 Choose Export from the File menu The Save as dialog box appears Additional information about exporting data you find in the Appendix of this manual For best possible translations see DXF Configuration in the Appendix of this manual 193 DraftBoard Documents 194 Save as Ax Save in DraftBoard x O em Zuletzt verwendete D Es Desktop Eigene Dateien Arbeits
145. ater use the Selection tool Click the dimension once then drag it to the new location You can also drag to select the dimension text or to select the entire dimension or several dimensions at once 7 a F jazi AE k Using the dimension status boxes The status boxes shown below appear when a dimensioning tool is selected Upper 001 Lower 001 Text The symbol in the tex box indicates that the dimen sion is the actual value of the object s measurement If you delete this symbol the dimension will no longer be associative that is it won t update if you change the geometry it measures If you are going to use Parametrics you must delete the symbol and enter values algebraic expressions or variables in the text box Parametrics are described in the Parametrics chapter of this manual Some of the dimensioning tools such as the Radial tools add a letter in the text status box which appears in the dimension itself You can add text before or af ter the symbol You can enter parentheses to enclose the resulting dimension in parentheses or enter 2 Pics to display the dimension followed by the text 2 Plcs When you include the symbol DraftBoard displays the measurement of the geometry as well as the text you add Tolerance The Upper and Lower boxes appear if you have specified a tolerance format in the dimension editor under Preferences in the Dimension me
146. ations remain in effect for the document in which they are set until you change it again with the Edit Style command Redefining the specification of a single pen style When you only want to modify the characteristics of a pen as long as you use this pen you must proceed as follows 1 Select the pen style you want to change 2 Specify the characteristics color weight and pattern you want for that style When you want to restore the original characteristics of the pen you select any other pen and then again the pen whose attributes you have modified Defining new Pen Styles 1 Choose the Edit Style command from Style in the Pen menu The Edit Style dialog box is displayed 2 Click the More button The More Pens dialog box is displayed a Balloon Center a Construction Dash Phantom Rename 3 Click the New button A new line with the default name Line 1 is created that you can rename using the Rename button 4 Click in front of the name of the new line in case you want to lock the line to prevent any modification A lock in front of the name is displayed If you want to unlock the line again you must click on the lock in front of the line name 5 If necessary create or rename more pens The pens Dimension Balloon Outline and Construction ate permanently locked and can t be modified Close the More Pens dialog box Select the new pen by pressing the Style entry box When the list of pen
147. ave to consider the following Even though only the visible edges if the geometry are displayed in the Hidden Lines view mode the original wireframe geometry and the surface mesh of the NURB Surfaces are still existing in the background While dimensioning the Drawing Assistant snaps to the construction points of the original wireframe geometry that is lying invisible behind the displayed object edges The Drawing Assistant can t identify the visible objects edges since they are not made up by single lines but by so called segmented polylines whose construction points the Drawing Assistant is un able to snap to This is also valid for the Flatten View command when used for a view displaying a surfaced object in the Hidden Lines view mode be cause this command flattens not only the visible object edges but also the invisible original wireframe geometry In this case the visible object edges are placed onto the current layer and the original wireframe geometry goes onto the layer Wireframe The layer Wireframe is automatically created and hidden with the AutoSurface command and must be redisplayed when dimensioning circles in a flatten view since the visible edges cannot be dimensioned Hatches and Solid Fills Hatches and Fills are placed parallel to the current work plane only in that view in which they were crated In other words hatches and fills will be only displayed correctly when you can look at the hatch or fill along the 2 a
148. ax Aspect Ratio This value describes the aspect ratio of the min edge length to the max edge length of a approximation triangle The value 1 equals an equilateral triangle When 0 is entered this parameter is ignored The default value is 0 Min Edge Length This value describes the minimum possible Edge Length of a approximation triangle A small value increases the precision of the model representation but also increases the calculation time When 0 is entered this parameter is ignored The default value is 0 Max Edge Length This value describes the maximum possible Edge Length of a approximation triangle A small value increases the precision of the model representation but also increases the calculation time When 0 is entered this parameter is ignored The default value is 0 Max Chord Length This value describes the maximum Chord Length between the NURB Surface boundary and the adjacent triangle edge of a approximation triangle A small value increases the precision of the model representation but also increases the calculation time When 0 is entered this parameter is ignored The default value is 0 192 DraftBoard Documents Export Data Interfaces Occasionally you may need to save a document in a format other than the DraftBoard format so you can use it with other application software All settings for the export of drawings are specified either automatically or by option buttons in the respective
149. axis 5 Click the other end Endpoint of the rotation axis 6 Select the Copy option if you want to rotate a copy of the select ed object 7 Click the Apply button The object is rotated around the specified axis 8 Select the next object for rotation or close the Object Rotation dialog box 3D Construction Rules Por many of the DraftBoard Drawing Tools and Commands cettain rules must be observed Drawing Tools in 3D All DraftBoard Drawing tools behave in a three dimensional work space according to certain rules When you know these rules you can create any object geometry using these tools Lines Single Connected and Parallel Lines have no 3D restrictions Tangent lines pulled off a curve circle or spline will be tangent if created in the same plane as the curve circle or spline Arcs Center Point Arcs will be drawn parallel to the work plane 3 Point Arcs and Tangent Point Arcs will be in the plane designated by the three points defining the arc Circles Center Point Circles and Opposite Point Circles will be drawn parallel to the work plane 3 Point Circles will be drawn in the plane designated by the three points defining the circle Tangent Circles will be in the plane of the two defining entities Ellipses Ellipses will be drawn parallel to the work plane 3 Point Center Ellipses and 3 Corner Ellipses will be drawn in the plane designated by the three points defining the ellipse
150. ayer is indicated by the check mark and can be set by double clicking on the desired layer Renaming a Layer Group 1 Select the desired Layer Group from the Group list 2 Enter a new name in the Layer Group entry box 3 Click Rename Deleting a Layer Group 1 Select the desired Layer Group from the Group list 2 Click Delete Structuring Drawings Making a Layer Group the work group 1 Select the desired Layer Group from the Group list 2 Click Set Group This changes the layer settings for the current model to those specified by the layer group These settings are shown in the Layers list Changing the layer settings of a Layer Group 1 Select the desired Layer Group from the Group list 2 Change the layer settings as desired Visible layers are indicated by the Eye Symbol and can be hidden by clicking on the symbol Hidden layers can be displayed in the layer group by clicking in the location where the Eye Symbol should be The work layer is indicated by the check mark and can be set by double clicking on the desired layer The new settings automatically replace the old settings Sheets A Sheet is an infinite planar area DraftBoard allows you to have multiple opaque sheets within a drawing A drawing can be a simple part or a complex assembly and you can organize related geometry on as many sheets as the scope of the project calls for You can have as many sheets as you want but only one sheet can be vis
151. ayout command in the File menu you can check size and orientation of the printing area that is displayed by a grey border to make final adjustment if necessary 10 Choose Print from the File menu The drawing is printed or plotted on the specified printer or How you have to proceed if you added text and dimensions before you scaled the drawing is plotter Text and dimensions are printed in the size you specified since they were added after you scaled the drawing When you have set for example the size for ext and dimensions to Yescribed in the following y sections of this chapter 3 5 mm ex and dimensions will be printed in a size of 3 5 mm p Flange plotted with a standard drawing format including block and title Flange plotted without a standard drawing format The above described procedure recommends to scale the drawing to adjust the visual scale to the specified paper size before you add ext and dimensions Of course you can scale drawings in DraftBoard after you have added tex and dimensions But that requires that you understand the different techniques DraftBoard uses fot scaling These procedures are described in the following sections of this chapter Drawing at Full Scale In DraftBoard you create all parts at its actual size It doesn t matter whether you design a large industry building or a small detailed blueprint When printing you adjust the visual scale the view of the drawing to f
152. ble to change the default Plotter font The default font size is 3 5 mm When you want to use another font size you must modify the font size in the Dimension Editor before placing a Surface Symbol The Surface Symbols dialog box resembles a Surface Symbol Dimensions Basic and Modified Symbols Field to indicate the to indicate the Surface Texture Production Method Text attributes and Arrow head types tor Surface Surface Symbol Y Upper Roughness polished Field for ifi predefined values 16 Oln7_ O 2 D lt iketerence Data Symbols must be modified to indicate the in the dimension editor be roughness Lower Roughness C Din 1342 f lacina the Surf i ore placin e ourrace O 8 8 O N7 Round Brackets E gt Symbol It is not possible to change the default Plotter font Stand alone O Arrow Line Edit complementary Indications Symbols to indicate the basic Surface Symbol Waviness Direction The Surface Symbols dialog box contains besides several Text entry fields some pop up menus from which you can select symbols or predefined values Surface Symbols From this pop up menu you can select the following basic and modified ba Waviness Direction sic symbols From this pop up menu you can select the following symbols for the waviness direction BaD a Roughness From the two pop up me
153. bols dialog box The Welding Symbol dialog box is closed automatically when you select a function from the Function palette 143 Basic Drafting Zooming Screen Redraws The Drafting Process Drawing At Full Scale Paper Size and Drawing Scale Scaling Drawings Scaling Commands Printing or Plotting a Drawing Basic Drafting This chapter describes techniques for Printing and Scaling There are two different ways to change the drawing size Zooming You can change the magnification of your drawing by zooming in and out using commands zoom tools and strokes Zooming changes the visual size of the drawing never the physical size of the objects Scaling Scaling means to set the visual size of the drawing to fit to the selected paper size when printing or plotting Scaling too changes the visual size of the drawing never the physical size of the objects This chapter describes the following techniques e Zooming e Full scale drawing How scaling affects text dimensions line patterns and hatch pat terns e Scaling commands e Printing or plotting drawings on standard paper sizes Most drafters begin a project by deciding how to scale the part first Using DraftBoard you create all parts at full scale 1 1 You never physically scale the part instead you set the visual scale of the geometry the visual size of the drawing to fit to the selected paper size when printing ot plotting the drawing Zooming Draft
154. brary 1 Select Library 1 Library 1 is displayed in the Rename field Overwrite Library 1 with an appropriate name Click the Rename button The new library name is displayed in the Library list field Adding Symbols 1 6 Choose the Library command from the Symbols submenu The Libraries dialog box is displayed Select the library you want add symbols to Click the Add button in the Symbo s section The Add Symbols dialog box is displayed Choose a Symbol file you want to assign to the selected library Click the Open button The dialog box is closed and the new symbol is added to the Symbol list of the selected library Optional you may modify the file name using the Rename button Adding Libraries 1 Mak Choose the Library command from the Symbols submenu The Libraries dialog box is displayed Click the Add button in the Library section The Add Library dialog box is displayed Select a Library Reference file with the file extension vlb Click the Open button The dialog box is closed and the new library with all its symbols is added to the existing libraries Using the Rename button you can modify the file name of the new library ing libraries accessible to other users DraftBoard handles all symbol libraries in the reference file vsg ib fe and all symbols of a library in the its related vIb file When you want to configure a library not only for your computer but for other compute
155. btraction multiplication division mod the remainder after division and exponentiation See the Appendix for a list of functions and conditional operators However you choose to specify the dimensions they must define all geometry and any relationships that exist between different parts of the geometry Creating parametric dimensions 1 Construct the geometry 2 Display the dimension palette and choose the appropriate dimensioning tool The status line displays a symbol in the text box to show that the dimensions are entered as actual measurements 3 Click the geometry to dimension as usual The Text entry box in the status line is highlighted 4 Type whatever expression variable or constant you want to use for the dimension and press Enter If you want the actual value to be used do not change the symbol in the text box The expression you type replaces the symbol EW Example of an object with parametric dimensions Using conditional expressions in parametrics You can use the conditional operators as parametric dimensions R 250 Create the dimension as usual and enter the conditional expression as text in the status line The example below shows a conditional ifelse expression H 4 a Per H 4 2 ifelse L1 gt L2 L1 L2 When the above ifelse statement is resolved the rectangle with the larger value L1 or L2 will touch the L3 rectangle mE L3 gt Oars L1 L2 The
156. but not the geometry displayed on the sheet DraftBoard handles Models and Sheets separately The geometry you create is the model what you see on the sheet is only an image view of that model So when you delete the sheet you delete only the Sheet View or Detail View of the model but not the geometry model it self You can display the deleted geometry any time on another sheet using the Models command in the Views menu Making a sheet the current sheet 1 Select the name from the list 2 Click the Current button Models Models are composed of the geometry you are creating Even if it looks like the geometry is created directly on the sheet it is not What you see on the sheet is only an image of that model The model itself is created in an infinite three dimensional area we call Model space Projected Model Image The image you see on the sheet is the projected Sheet View of the model picked up by the Sheet Camera which is aligned parallel to the sheet and looking from a top view at the model YA Model 1 Rectangle Sheet camera is _ ridgidly fixed and parallel aligned to the sheet Image of the Y Rectangle Model 1 i 1 Model projected on the current Sheet When you use the Zoom commands in the Arrange menu or the Zoom tools from the Too palette you change the view scale of the model by zooming the Sheet Camera like you would with a video camera Multiple Models There are t
157. c You cannot assign more than one tem Number to an object if you do the original Item Number is deleted To get the original Item Number back do an Undo twice An Item Number s font is specified in the BemText dialog box of the Dimen sion editor 243 Geometric Analysis An Item Number s font is specified in the BemText dialog box of the Dimen sion editor 244 Editing Item Numbers 1 Select the desired Item Numbers 2 Select the Edit Objects command from the Edit menu 3 Enter the new Item Number in the Text field 4 Click Apply The Item Number of the selected Izem Number balloon will be updated accordingly All higher Item Numbers will be adjusted automatically Editing the Size of the Item Number Balloon 1 Select the desired Item Number balloon 2 Select the Edit Objects command from the Edit menu 3 Enter the new diameter in the width field 4 Click Apply The diameter of the selected Item Number balloon will be updated accordingly Editing the Text size 1 Select the respective Item Number balloon Select the Edit Objects command from the Edit menu gt Enter the new Text Size into the in the Size field Click Apply The text size of the selected Item Number balloon will be updated r accordingly Item Number text size can be changed dynamically by selecting the Item Number balloon and changing the BemSize in the Dimension Editor Deleting Item Numbers 1 Select the desired I
158. c Analysis Normally you hide at tributes only for defining BOM layouts See BOM Layouts later in this chapter The section Re moving attributes in this chapter describes how you remove attributes from ob ject geometry 238 Define Attributes v Material v RefNo v Attribute 1 v Attribute Name Default Yalue Layout Layout 1 The Define Attributes dialog box contains the following items New Clicking the New button creates a new attribute like Attribute 1 2 3 You can rename the attribute by typing the name in the Attribute Name entry box and clicking Redefine Delete Clicking the Delete button deletes the selected at tribute from the attribute list Redefine Clicking the Redefine button does three things First it renames a selected attribute with the name you have specified in the Attribute Name entry box second it assigns a value to the attribute which may be entered in the Default Value entry box and third it assigns the format for the attribute you selected from the Format pop up list Show Hide With this button you show or hide attributes Hidden attributes are not displayed in the Status Line upon assignment Hidden attributes are indicated by a checkmark being removed in front of the attribute name Format In this pop up menu you select a format for the attribute value You can choose between three attribute formats Text Number and Qty Text Text i
159. cale The Sheet Into View dialog box allows the following settings Layout In this pull down list you can select a paper size with view s in a standard drawing format Scale In this entry field you can enter a scaling ratio such as 1 8 a size ratio such as 1cm 1m or a factor Factors greater than 1 enlarge all objects in the views and factors less than one reduce all objects Cancel This button closes the Sheet Into View dialog box without executing the Sheet Into View command OK When you click the OK button all geometry on the sheet including dimensions text hatching and fills is placed into one or several view windows at the scale you specify Using Sheet Into View 1 Draw the geometry 2 Delete all existing Detail View windows 3 Choose Sheet Into View from the Views menu A dialog box is displayed 4 Choose the drawing format and the number of views you want from the Layout list 5 Enter the scaling value in the Scale box 6 Click OK 7 Select Zoom All in the Arrange menu to see the results The geometry is scaled and the views are layed out as specified If you specify a drawing format it is imported into the view and scaled appropriately for the drawing size you have specified with the Drawing Size command in the Layout menu Scaling Views The Scale you specify in the Sheet Into View dialog box changes the view scale property of that view only in relation to the object geometry on the
160. can select the object and choose Lock from the Arrange menu If you are doing a lot of editing you may want to leave the Edit Objects dialog box displayed In that way you can select the object make the changes in the dialog box click Apply and then go on to the text object If more than one object is selected when you choose Edit Objects only the common information is displayed Entries are blank when the information isn t common For example if you select two concentric circles the center will be displayed in the Edit Objects box but the diameter box will be blank If you select several objects and then choose Edit Objects all of the objects will reflect the changes you make in the dialog box For example if you select all dimensions and change the text entry in the Edit Objects dialog box to 2 all the dimensions will display a 2 Editing objects Moving an object to a different layer Select the object s to be moved Choose Edit Objects from the Edit menu Click the arrow for the layer entry box Click the layer from the list Click Apply oo oS Arranging Geometry The Arrange menu contains some commands that enable you to subdivide geometry group geometry so it behaves like a unit and lock geometry to prevent changes In addition this menu contains a command to refresh the screen after you have changed geometry This menu contains also commands to sort objects on the screen The display order set with When usi
161. cets This increases the precision of the model representation but also increases the calculation time Max Edge Length This value describes the maximum possible Edge Length of a approximation triangle A small value increases the precision of the model representation but also increases the calculation time When 0 is entered this parameter is ignored The default value is 0 Max Chord Length This value describes the maximum Chord Length between the NURB Surface boundary and the adjacent triangle edge of a approximation triangle A small value increases the precision of the model representation but also increases the calculation time When 0 is entered this parameter is ignored The default value is 0 Background Color This button allows you to set the Background Color for the active view Sheet View or Detail View When you click this button the Windows or Macintosh Color Palette is displayed where you can specify a new background color The selected background color applies only for the view modes Shaded and Visible Lines Antialiasing When you activate this option all edges of a model are smoothed while the calculation time slows down This option applies only for the view mode Visible lines not for the Shaded view mode Dynamic Rotation This option specifies if a model when rotated by the Trackball will be represented in the view mode Wireframe or Visible Lines and if the model representation should be updated w
162. ch patterns of which you can modify the spacing and angle You will find these hatches organized in groups such as metals fluids etc in the Hatch dialog box All hatch patterns contained in this library are listed below Mineral Materials Rock Sand Clay Sandstone Peat Humus soil Salt Other natural Materials Masonry Concrete Masonry brickwork increased strength Masonry light brick Pumice stone waterproof Glass Masonry pumice Plaster plate Plaster Mortar Fibre y cans er AR i 2 Ad Cater een 7 ee Concrete Concrete Ceramic Porcelain Plaster Mortar Il reinforced non reinforced Y Firebrick Insulating Sealing So lt X L
163. change When you click in the drawing area that position is displayed in the center of the screen and the drawing is reduced by a factor of 0 5 Scale f The status line shows the current zoom scale If you enter a different scale that scale takes effect when you press Enter Pressing the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while using this tool causes a Zoom In Zoom Stroke You can use stroke commands to zoom maegnify or reduce your drawing Stroke commands ate useful because they don t require you to get out of the tool you re using to zoom Hold down the Ctrl and Shift key Macintosh 3 key and drag the pointer that appears diagonally across the screen as described below The pointer takes on the shape shown below when you hold down the Ctrl and Shift key Macintosh amp key Using Stroke zoom Depending of the stroke direction you can execute different Stroke commands Drag the pointer diagonally Drag Diagonally Result Upper left to lower right Zoom in enlargement centered over the stroked area Lower right to upper left Reverses Zoom In stroke to the previous magnification Upper right to lower left Zoom out reduction the current screen reduces to the size of the area defined by the stroke Lower left to upper right Reverses Zoom Out stroke to previous magnification Basic Drafting Saving Drawing Areas The Viewport Manager command in the Arrange menu allows you to save s
164. characters into DraftBoard Examples Alt 0176 Alt 0216 Alt 0248 Alt 0177 Alt 0169 Alt 64 Alt 0128 o OHS Special Characters for Macintosh Computer Many symbols and characters are available from the keyboard To see the characters associated with a particular font choose Key Caps from the Apple menu and select the font from the Font Menu When you press the Command Option Shift or Control key or combinations of these keys the keyboard graphic changes to show which characters are available In addition of those characters you see in Key Caps you can use the Option key to generate international accents in the current font including DraftBoard s Plotter font Accent Key Combination Option e then letter to be accented Option then letter to be accented Option n then letter to be accented Option t then letter to be accented Option u then letter to be accented The following list includes common symbols which are available in all fonts Accent Key Combination 2 Option Shift 8 Option O letter or number Option Shift O ar Option Shift Appendix Data Interfaces This appendix contains additional information on the data interfaces already described in the manual DWG DXF Interfaces In general it is recommended that you show all your layers before you export from DraftBoard or any other CAD package so that you know what objects are exporting e DraftBoard will
165. choose Show Points from the Layout menu the points are visible on the selected object Unselected point Selected point If you select a point without selecting the geometry it defines DraftBoard treats S __aaeaaj 1 the point as an object A line without points displayed A line with points displayed Point selection is described in a section later in this chapter Note Keep in mind you need to select an object and than the function 11 Selecting objects You shouldn t use black for indicating selection because many of the standard pens use black lines Red is a good choice unless you are color blind in which case blue may be a better choice It is not recommend to use the color Black to indicate the selection since many lines are displayed in black Using the Save Preferen ces command you can save the new settings permanently 72 Indicating Selection When you select an object its appearance on the screen shows that it is selected it is a specific color such as red it blinks or both Draft Board usually displays selections according to your monitor type red for a color monitor and blinking for a monochrome monitor You can change the color or turn blinking off and on for the selection indica tor You can choose both color and blinking if you want Selection This command in the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu determines the appearance of selected objects If you have a color monito
166. cintosh version of DraftBoard The graphic shows the Convert dialog box for Windows 196 Important Tips for the Export of DWG DXF Files For exchanging data with other CAD Programs you should prefer the file format DXF DWG 2000 and for exchanging data with NC Programs the file format DXF 12 Until version 13 AutoCAD doesn t accept any special characters such as a 8 character in layer names Therefore remove all special characters from layer names before exporting any file into Auto CAD Otherwise AutoCAD will not import the file and generate an error message instead In case line patterns are disorted too big or too small in Auto CAD after importing a DraftBoard DXF File change the AutoCAD variable LTSCALE to a smaller number to display the line patterns at an appropriate scale Converting Files DraftBoard can not only import and export files but also convert files directly between different file formats Convert This command in the File menu starts the Convert batch translator which allows you to import and export multiple files in an unattended mode It imports all files of the same type from one folder and saves these files in the selected format into a destination folder The Convert command displays the following dialog box Convert Multiple File Translation Output File Format lv Vellum Document ev Input File Format Vellum C Draw each file In the Convert dialog you can specify t
167. circle with the color Yellow 3 Select the yellow fill area without the black perimeter 4 Select the Send to Back command in the Arrange menu The yellow fill area is send to back and covered by the black perimeter circle 5 Select the circle and the fill area and choose the Group command in the Arrange menu The yellow fill area and the circle perimeter are grouped as sorted Draw a rectangle with the color Black and a line weight of 1 5 mm Fill the rectangle with the color Blue Select the blue fill area without the black rectangle line O PNA Select the Send to Back command in the Arrange menu The blue fill area is send to back and covered by the black perimeter lines 10 Select the Group command in the Arrange menu The blue fill area and the perimeter lines are grouped as sorted 11 Select the blue rectangle and move it partly over the yellow circle 12 Deselect the blue rectangle by clicking anywhere onto the drawing area The blue rectangle in the foreground covers the yellow circle 95 Editing objects If you move the group all components move together If you change the size of a group the individual objects change proportionally To create temporary groups you can drag a selection marquee around several objects to treat them as a single unit while they are selected 96 13 Select the yellow circle 14 Select the Bring to Front command in the Arrange menu The yellow
168. ck the Delete button the selected annota tion or text group is deleted When you delete a text group all related annotations are deleted as well Rename With the Rename button you can rename the selected annotation ot text group Options With the Option button you display a dialog box listing selectable attributes such as a border frame ot position line for the selected text block and define the text style Extensions In the Extended dialog box you can assign an imported text to a selected text block 90 When this option is marked the annotation is placed vertically on the drawing area 0 When this option is marked the annotation is placed horizontally on the drawing area Extended dialog box When you select an annotation in the TextBlocks dialog box and click the Extended button the following dialog box is displayed Extended Text Text In this dialog box you can assign to the selected annotation an extended text that is placed on the drawing instead of the selected text block You cannot type extended text but only imported it as ASCH Text with the Import button Annotations that contain extended text have a checkmark in front of the name The width of the placed text frame equals the longest text line of the imported ASCIT file Text attributes such as Text style Text size for all text blocks are set in the Options dialog box Editing extended text Imported text cannot be edited in the Ex
169. ckness i Wh ce ae eis ee E ie ee ct 5 Save the symbol Creating Value Tables for Parametric Symbols When you place a parametric symbol in a drawing all parametric variables are listed in the Symbols dialog box Instead of entering the final values into the related entry fields you can create underlying value tables that allow you to select predefined values for a selected symbol For that it is necessary to create a value table for each parametric symbol in a tex editor or spreadsheet Save the value table as an ASCII txt For the Macintosh you must create the file extension to txt as well file under the name of the related symbol with the file extension The file must be saved in the same folder as the related symbol Value tables may not only contain parametric variables but also user defined attributes as material or order number that can be extracted in a Bill of Materials It is optional to specify values for the two required labels PartID and Quantity at the beginning of each table since these attributes are automatically assigned to each symbol for a possible BOM extraction Labels for additional user defined attributes as Material have to be defined after the labels for the defined variables Since these user defined attributes are not automatically attached to a symbol they must be assigned when creating the symbol using the Symbol Attributes tool Creating value tables 1 Create a Norm part at a scale of
170. command in the Parametric submenu from the Edit menu The kinematic Control Panel is displayed 5 Select a variable for which you want to calculate the motion If you want to use all defined variables for the calculation choose All 6 Mark the option Track Curve on if you want to record the path Important The Track of a defined Measure Point Curves on option is only active when at least one 7 Mark the option Track Geometry if you want to display the Measure Point is defined resolved geometry for each calculated step 8 Click the Parameter button The Parameter dialog box is displayed 9 Specify for each variable a starting and an ending value and the Increment per Step 10 Click OK The Parameter dialog box will be closed 11 Click the Options button The Options dialog box is displayed 12 Select a Layer and a Color fot the Tracked Curve the Tracked Geometry and the Collision Points in case you have marked any of these options in the Control Panel 13 Click OK The Options dialog box will be closed 14 Click the PLAY button The motion of the selected part will be calculated and displayed on the screen When the option Tracked Curve is active the path of all defined Measure Points will be recorded on the selected layer and color When the option Tracked Geometry is active the geometry will be calculated for each step and displayed on the selected layer and color If you start the animation with the Step bu
171. creen contents with their current Zoom factor The Viewport Manager offers a big help when navigating through large 2D drawings Viewport Manager When you select this command the following dialog box is displayed Viewport Manager Save Delete Rename Show The Viewport Manager dialog box contains the following elements New When you click this button the current content of the screen is saved with the name View 1 2 3 and is displayed in the View list You can rename the default name View 1 using the Rename button Existing views cannot be renamed Delete This button allows you to delete the view selected in the view list Rename This button allows you to rename a view selected in the view list with the name entered into the Rename Held Name Into this field you can enter a name for a view selected in the view list and rename it with the Rename button Show This button displays the saved drawing atea of the selected view on the screen Saving a View 1 Select the View Manager command in the Arrange menu The Viewport Manager dialog box is displayed Zoom into the desired drawing area using the Zoom In or Zoom Out tool in the Views subpalette Click the Save button A new view with the default name View 1 is created and the displayed screen content is saved Enter a proper name for the new view into the Rename field Click the Rename button The selected view is a renamed with the
172. cript compatible applications DraftBoard supports the EPS Format of the Adobe Illustrator and compatible EPS Formats Displayed option EPS Al File name extension eps DXF DWG AutoCAD Data eX change Format of AutoCAD Selecting this format in the Import dialog box and clicking the EPS Al displayed Options button you can choose from the AutoCAD Formats BDXF DXF DWG and Versions 10 11 12 13 14 and 2000 2002 File name extension dwg or dxf IGS IGES 4 0 Initial Graphics Exchange Specification format to standardize the exchange of graphics This file format allows as well to import 3D NURB Surfaces Displayed option IGES File name extension gs Import This command in the File menu imports a document from Draft Board ot another application into DraftBoard and places it in the current model When you select the Import command the names of documents DraftBoard can tead ate displayed in a dialog box that works like the Open dialog box When you select a document in this dialog box and click the Open button DraftBoard detects the format of the document and displays the Import dialog box Import Speaker vim DraftBoard EPS AI C Grouped Text IGES Geometry Only Spline MetaFile CI Onto Work Layer Bitmap C Unscale DYYG DXF Drawings created with DraftBoard on the Macin tosh don t have to be im ported but can be read us ing the Open command in the File menu Using the DWG DXF Import
173. ct the text block 101 Text Fills and Hatches If you want to change the characteristics of a word or portion of a text block use the Text tool to select what you want to change Selectable Points in the Edit menu must be active for selecting the control points of the text box When you want to set the size of the text box accurately you select the text box with the Selection tool and choose the Edit objects command in the File menu In the Width and Height entry boxes you can enter values for the box size 102 Changing the characteristics of a text block You can change the font text size style spacing and indentation of a text block 1 Use the Selection tool to select the text block to be changed 2 Select the new characteristic from the Text menu The selection shows the new characteristic Modifying text margins 1 Choose the Text Margins command from the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu The following dialog box is displayed F Text Margins Right Bottom 2 Enter values for the Left Right Top and Bottom text margins This values are valid for all future text placed with the Text tool from the Function palette You can save these margins permanently using the Save Preferences command from the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu Moving Text Each text object has nine snap points for the Drawing Assistant These snap points will help you to move and or align text wi
174. ction Mask command in the Edit menu Creating a new layer Click New to create another layer You can name the layer by typing the name in the Rename entry box and clicking Rename You can have as many as 256 layers Renaming a layer 1 Select the name of the layer from the list box 2 Type the new name 3 Click the Rename button Deleting a layer 1 Select the name of the layer from the list box 2 Click the Delete button Caution The layer and everything on that layer is deleted however a warning appears before this happens Making a layer the work layer 1 Select the name from the list 2 Click the Set Work button The layer must be visible before you can make it the work layer Using the layer box to specify a different work layer You can use the pop up layer box at the lower left of the drawing area to specify a different layer as the work layer 1 Press the mouse button on the box and the menu displays 2 Drag to the layer you want to be the work layer and release the mouse button Hiding a layer 1 Click the layer s you want to hide in the list 2 Click the Hide button The visible mark beside the layer name disappears Displaying a hidden layer 1 Click the layer s you want to make visible in the list 2 Click the Show button A visible mark appears next to the layer s name in the list Determining how many objects are on a layer 1 Choose Selection Mask from the Edit menu 2 Select the d
175. ctive Edit command displays the following dialog box Edit Perspective Focal Distance The Perspective Edit dialog window allows the following setting Focal Distance This value determines the Focal Distance like the lens settings of a camera The smaller the value the greater the perspec tive effect The lowest allowed value is 0 1 The default value is 25 Setting a large Perspective Create for that example a simple cube and surface it using the AutoSurface command Choose for the cube a trimetric view with a shaded view mode 1 Choose the Perspective on off command in the Views menu The model is displayed in a perspective view according to the set default values 2 Select the Perspective Edit command in the Views menu The Perspective Edit dialog box is displayed 3 Substitute the default value 25 for the Focal Distance by the value 5 The model is displayed in a large perspective angle but smaller due to zoom factor used 4 Enlarge the model using the Zoom In tool from the tool palette until the model fills the screen Setting a small Perspective Create for that example a simple cube and surface it using the AutoSurface command Choose fot the cube a trimetric view with a Shaded view mode 1 Choose the Perspective on off command in the Views menu The model is displayed in a perspective view according to the set default values 2 Select the Perspective Edit command in the Views menu The Perspective Ed
176. cts with tools 87 corner trim tool 84 crosshatch 110 adding patterns 110 boundaries 110 crosshatch command 111 defining patterns 110 hatch command 112 origin 111 patterns 110 specifying patterns 67 309 Customer Services 312 customization add commands 63 add functions 64 function interface 62 macros 60 cut command 89 D dash line style 54 DAssistant command 36 data exchange 188 ProE Render 193 Vim 3 0 4 0X 193 data interfaces 305 decimal indicators 303 default settings 59 define plane command 269 delete command 90 delete constructions com mand 41 design 4 258 detail views 168 non associative 179 diagrams 302 dimensions symbol 118 and status boxes 118 angular 124 appearance 126 129 arc length dimension 125 arrow size 132 arrows 129 associative dimensions 117 attributes 133 automatic 66 balloon symbols 125 center mark 125 decimal indicators 303 diametral 124 dimension editor 126 dot size 133 dual dimensions 128 extended radial arrow in 123 fixed 119 formats 127 GD amp T 134 horizontal 119 instantaneous modifica tion 129 keep dimension text size 154 155 layer 118 129 161 leading 0 132 line style 54 lines 130 oblique 121 parametric 133 202 perpendicular 122 precision 127 radial 123 repositioning 118 setting units 57 settings 125 show palette 117 standards 126 surface symbols 140 text 118 131 tolerances 118 127 tools 117 trailing O s 132 vertical 1
177. current sheet active by clicking anywhere outside the view window on the sheet 4 Create anew model using the Model command in the Views menu 5 Make the new Model 2 the current model in the Models dialog box 6 Copy the view window as often as you want with the Copy command in the View Window menu and the Paste command in the Edit menu 7 Set each view window to the desired view orientation with the Views commands in the Views menu or in the Trackball menu 8 Select the Properties command in the detail view window s control menu to scale each view window 9 Save the new layout under a proper name in the Layouts folder Unfold View The Unfold View command in the Views menu allows you to create a view orientation from the active view window by specifying a line about which to unfold the new view orientation Drehen dieser gt Ansicht um 90 entlang dieser Linie i erzeugt dieses Ansichtsfenster ii mit dieser Ansichtsausrichtung By specifying a line you define a 90 plane along that line which is coming toward you away from the screen This plane is folded by 90 and creates the new view orientation from the active view Note You should use the Unfold View command only in a view orientation which is aligned parallel to an object face If you use it in ta a differently aligned view folding line NI a kaos unid after unfolding object face is not parallel to the screen this com
178. d If you don t need a specific scale you can click the Fit button to scale the drawing to fit the paper 3 When text and dimensions should keep their true size choose the options Keep Text Size and Keep Dimension Text Size If you don t select these options you have to adjust text and dimensions after scaling 4 When you want to control the scaling on the screen click the Apply button The drawing is scaled and the Drawing Size dialog box remains open The geometry itself does not change scale it only changes visually not physically 5 If you want to print multiple sheets and tape them together fol low the directions for T7 ed Printing described later in this chapter 6 Click OK Setting up the drawing size using the Sheet Into View command For scaling a drawing you can use as well the Sheet Into View command in the Views menu The Sheet Into View command imports automatically a standard drawing format and scales a drawing at the same time to fit into a view window placed within the drawing format The Sheet Into View command does not keep the text size when scaling 1 Create the object geometry 2 Choose Zoom All from the Arrange menu The screen is filled with the object geometry 3 Choose the Sheet Into View command from the Views menu The Sheet Into View dialog box is displayed 4 Enter a Scale factor for the drawing into the Scale box This Scale factor should correspond with the selected paper si
179. d Features section of the Tutorial for a step by step example 111 Text Fills and Hatches You can edit hatch patterns with the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu The best way to select a fill boundary is with the Tracer tool A solid filled object will only cover permanently its background if it is brought to front with the Bring to front command in the Arrange menu To change the tolerance of an existing fill first select the fill by clicking on it Choose Solid Fill from the Pen menu Change the Tolerance and press Apply You can also change the Tolerance in the Edit Objects dialog box 112 3 Select the pattern you want from the crosshatch list for example Bricks 8 in the folder Extended 4 Change the spacing and angle if you want As you make changes to the angle or spacing the pattern box shows the revised pattern exactly as it will be when the specified object is crosshatched 4 Specify in the two entry fields Origin X and Origin Y a value for the new origin of the hatch pattern Alternatively you can click first in one of the two fields and then in the lower left corner of the hatch boundary on DraftBoard drawing area for the new origin of the selected hatch pattern The values are automatically filled in into the two Origin fields 5 Click Apply The origin of the hatch pattern is moved accordingly Editing an existing crosshatch pattern 1 Select the existing crosshatching by clicki
180. d and future text the margins in the text area Text alignment is controlled from the Text menu You can align text with the left or the right margins with both margins or centered between the margins Leeder ee E A EA A A A A A Align Right This command in the Text menu aligns the selected and future text at the right margin of the text area Text alignment is controlled from the Text menu You can align text with the left or the right margins with both margins or centered between the margins Justified This command in the Text menu aligns both the left and right margins of the selected and future text in the text area Text alignment is controlled from the Text menu You can align text with the left or the right margins with both margins or centered between the margins Text spacing The Text menu has commands for single spacing double spacing or using a space and a half between the lines of your text Text spacing is controlled from the Text menu Text can be single spaced as You can change the default setting by saving changes in the Preferences file in the first paragraph or paragraph Text can also be spaced at one and a half spaces as in this paragraph double spaced like in this The check Y in the Text menu indicates the current line spacing Single Space This command in the Text menu sets the spacing of selected and future lines of text so each line occupies one
181. d dimensions after scaling or e you must select all ext and dimensions and assign their text size again Scaling Commands If your unscaled construction is very large or very small compared to the size of the specified page format you have to adjust the view scale of your drawing to fit the selected paper size To do this you can use e the Drawing Size command in the Layout menu or e the Sheet Into View command in the Views menu The Drawing Size command with its options Keep Text Size and Keep Dimensions Text Size offers the better control for text and dimensions when scaling Whereas the Sheet Into View command imports automatically a standard drawing format and scales a drawing at the same time but doesn t keep the text size when scaling Drawing Size This command in the Layout menu allows you to see the size of the maximum plotting printing area relative to the drawing and to specify the scaling of the drawing so it fits the paper size and orientation set by the Print Setup command Macintosh Page Setup Basic Drafting Itis advisable to use the Selection mask to select all text and dimensions in case you have to assign the accurate text size after scaling All Plotter Fonts available with DraftBoard are listed in Appendix A of this Reference Guide It is advisable to use the Selection mask to select all text and dimensions in case you have to assign the accurate text size after scaling 155 Basic D
182. d each one must have four or fewer edges This is done by adding more wireframe geometry In the following example the Non Planar Surface is broken up into two surfaces with a maximum of 4 edges by adding an ellipse Auto Badia rface An additional Ellipse brakes the surface into two separate surfaces with 4 edges or less Non planar Surfaces are not supported This is largely because in most cases it is not possible to represent the hole on a non planar surface with any wireframe geometry When extruding citcles to make cylinders the extrusion line must be connected to the Endpoint vertex of both circles 2 Endpoint a Extrusionslinie Endpoint Extrusion Line connected through Extrusion Line not connected endpoints through Endpoints FT Y One endpoint on one endpoint off Endpoints rotated 3D Surfaces Don t have more than one extrusion line for circles that have been extruded into cylinders When extruding a circle into a cylinder to create a wireframe mod el it makes sense to make 4 or 8 copies of the extrusion line around the cylinder in order to make it look more like a cylinder For surfaced models simplicity is the key for successful auto surfacing More than one extrusion lines isn t necessary and might even cause problems When doing a Revolve operation use 1 or 2 for of Steps A higher number of spoke lines aren t necessary and may cause trouble Only for 360 Revolu
183. dded to the existing library symbols Remove This button removes a selected symbol or library from related list field 221 Symbols The name for the Library reference file must not be identical with the name you choose for the library in the Library dialog box It is recommended to save the Library reference file in the DraftBoard folder Important When you assign a symbol to a library the symbol will not be copied but only the path to the folder where the symbol is stored This path is saved in the Library reference file of the selected library When you move a symbol to an other folder the saved path becomes invalid and the symbol cannot be found anymore by the library 228 Rename This button allows to modify the name of a selected symbol or library Save This button saves all changes made in the Libraries dialog box When you close the dialog box using the Close field in the title bar a message reminds you that all changes will be lost without saving Creating a new Symbol library 1 Choose the Library command from the Symbols submenu The Libraries dialog box is displayed Click the New button The Set Libraries File dialog box is displayed Overwrite the default name Library vlb with an appropriate name Select a folder where you want to save the Library reference file Click OK The dialog box is closed and the new library is added to the existing symbol libraries with the default name Li
184. def Hell 120 Blau 127 AA Grundfarben Ei e eee ees ee EG Ae 5 5 Us A ERE EEE 5 EE EEE Eee BEES mM Benutzerdefinierte Farben 2 Click the Define Custom Color button The extended Color Palette is displayed 3 In the color palette on the right place the cursor within the target cursot and drag to the area of the color desired Note a larger atea of the color is displayed in the Color Solid box below If desired you can also adjust the bue saturation luminance and the percentage of red green and blue by entering your own values The of black can be adjusted by moving the cursor over the arrow in the color scroll bar to the right of the large color palette and drag up or down to the desired location When you adjust this all the values in Luminance Red Green and Blue data fields change as well Hue and Saturation do not change 4 Click the Add to Custom Colors button The defined color is displayed in the first highlighted box for custom defined colors 5 Click the OK button Die Windows Color dialog box closes and you are returned to the Define Colors dialog box 6 Click the Use button in the Define Colors dialog box An icon of an eye will appear indicating that the color will be visible now in the DraftBoard Color Palette The new color name remains in the color list in the position you placed it since the color names are not alphabetized 7 Close the Define Color
185. defined and the Define Plane dialog box is closed By definition 1 Select the Define Plane command in the 3D menu The Define Plane dialog box is displayed Select the plane of which you want to change the orientation If necessary click the Lock icon to unlock the plane Click the Redefine button The Redefine Plane dialog box displays and the Origin specification is already highlighted On the drawing area click the location for the new origin The first Right entry box is selected Click a location on the positive x axis on the drawing area The first Up entry box is selected Click a location on the positive y axis on the drawing atea Click the OK button The Define Plane dialog box is closed and the plane is redefined as indicated Set Plane to Screen This command sets the work plane to be coincident with the screen where the Origin of the plane is in the Center of the screen the x axis is coincident with the Width of the screen and the y axis is coincident with the Hezght of the screen This sets the Work Plane to match the screen in all views which is particularly useful when you are moving from view to view while drafting The Design Process In DraftBoard you can create three dimensional wireframe models You can view them from different angles and export them as wireframe models For the creation of wireframe models you proceed as follows You create the three dimensional wireframe model With
186. detail view So it is also possible to have a model that is not displayed in any view And you can have a single model displayed in many views at the same time When you make a Model current in a sheet view it is like the Sheet camera is moved to the new model When you make a Sheet current the Sheet camera is moved to the related model whose image is projected on that sheet _ Model space 2 ge Model 1 not visible since a related to Sheet 1 The Sheet camera moves automatically to Model 2 when Sheet 2 is made current Creating a new Model with the Sheets command 1 Select Sheets in the Views menu The Sheet Dialog box displays 2 Select Models in the Views menu The Model Dialog box displays 3 Since the Model dialog box is placed at the same location on the screen move it to another location so you can see both dialog boxes ET K Delete Modei 1a ne Delete Current current Rename N J Rename S J ENTE Rename IATA Rename Default Setup after launching DraftBoard Now you can see that a new drawing in DraftBoard has one Sheet and one Model by default The checkmark in each dialog box shows that Sheet 1 and Model 1 are current 4 Display the Sheets Dialog box and click New to create a new sheet You see also that a new model automatically appears in the Mod els Dialog box Model 2 Note You cannot delete the current model A model which is sti
187. dit menu The Selection Mask dialog box appears Selection Mask Surface The highlighted items respond to all selection methods and can be detected by the Drawing Assistant 2 Click the items you want to be able to select so they are highlighted While the dialog box is visible you can select create and edit geometry You can move the dialog box if it covers geometry you want to work on The selection mask remains in effect even after you close the dialog box until you select a tool When an item in the dialog box is not highlighted the Drawing Assistant and all the tools cannot detect it even though it is visible to you on the screen Deselecting To deselect an object click anywhere in the drawing area where there is no object or click any tool in the tool palette You can deselect an object that was selected in a multiple selection operation While the objects are still selected hold down the Shift key and click the objects you want deselected Selecting objects Select All is useful if you want to make a global change in a drawing such as changing the width of all lines If you want to specify that only certain objects layers or colors are selected you should use the Selection Mask com mand in the Edit menu The selection mask is useful when you have created a complex drawing and want to change particular groups of objects You can use this feature to export some but not all geometry To
188. dix of this manual you find a repre sentation of all available hatch patterns The best way to select a hatch boundary is with the Tracer tool It is important that you do not select extra objects when you specify the crosshatch or fill area be cause DraftBoard does not know how to treat the extra objects 110 Crosshatching and Solid fills DraftBoard can crosshatch and fill any enclosed area in your drawing and then automatically update the crosshatching when you change the dimensions of the enclosed area You can specify a closed area that has a hole or other cutout in it and DraftBoard accurately excludes the hole area from the crosshatching and filling In the Pen menu you will find two fill commands Fill and Solid Fill and two crosshatch commands Crosshatch and Hatch Fill creates a solid fill for a selection with the current pen color and Hatch cross hatches the selection with the current pattern If you want to change the patterns choose Crosshatch and specify the pattern you want to use If you want to change the default hatch pattern make changes to the preferences file as described in The Basics chapter Crosshatch Patterns DraftBoard offers a multitude of DIN and ANSI hatch patterns of which you can modify the spacing and angle You will find these hatches organized in groups such as metals fluids etc in the Hatch dialog box Adding and specifying Hatch Patterns In addition to the hatch patterns shi
189. drawing format using the Sheet Into View command is described in the previous section the following task describes how that is done using the Import command Structuring Drawings Importing Drawing Formats 1 qe A A Scale the drawing using the Drawing Size command in the Layout menu Mark the option Always display Page bounds in the displayed Drawing Size dialog that allows you to compare the true size of the drawing with the displayed printing area of the drawing format Activate the current sheet by clicking on 1t with the Selection tool in case your drawing contains any detail views The window boundaries are displayed by dotted lines to indicate that the next step is executed on the current sheet and not within a detail view Choose the Import command of the File menu The Import dialog box is displayed Open the folder Layout and select the drawing format you want Click the Open button Mark the option unscaled in the displayed dialog box Click the OK button The Drawing Format is imported onto the current sheet The imported drawing format is grouped Now you can drag the drawing format on the sheet until all objects lie within the drawing format In case the size of the imported drawing format is to small or to large to frame the entire drawing you can scale the content of the drawing Modifying Drawing Formats All drawing formats provided in the Layout folder can be modified to meet your need
190. e Locked Control Points Selected Point e Drag 4 way pointer to adjust area between locked points Unlocking spline control points Use this tool and click the pointer to unlock it Locking more than one spline control point You can lock more than one point by simply clicking each point Editing control points of a spline 1 Select the spline with the Selection tool 2 Choose Show Points from the Layout menu If the menu says Hide Points you don t need to choose it 3 Click on the drawing area to deselect the spline 4 If necessary select Lock Spline Control Points from the Spline tool subpalette 5 If necessary click the points you want to lock the points on either side of the point you will change 6 Use the Selection tool to select the point you want to change Drag the point to the new location The dotted lines that appear tangent to the end portions of the spline are tangent control arms They allow you to adjust the curvature of the spline leading up to the endpoints without moving the endpoints themselves To do this select the endpoint of the tangent control arm and drag it to another location with the 4 way pointer that appears Editing the end slope of a spline 1 Select the spline with the Selection tool 2 Choose Show Points from the Layout menu If the menu says Hide Points you don t need to choose it 3 Click in the drawing area to deselect the spline 4 If necessary select
191. e The distance dragged will always be entered in the Offset box as a positive val ue regardless of the direction dragged Before you can define a point on the drawing area you have to click in the Entry field where the values should go 40 3 Drag the mouse vertically or horizontally away from the midpoint The construction line appears through the center and you are still in the process of creating connected lines The Construction Command Stroke construction lines are useful for creating lines through existing points If you want to create a construction line at a location other than an existing point or at a particular angle you can use the Construction command Construction Ctrl K Macintosh 88 K This command in the Layout menu creates a construction line on the Construction layer of the current document EN Construction bg You can specify the angle of the construction line or the offset from a reference point defined by the X Y coordinates The asterisk shows that the values can be specified by clicking or dragging the mouse values can also be typed into the boxes Specifying the construction line angle with the mouse 1 Click the Angle box 2 Drag a vector in the drawing area The angle of the vector line appears in the Angle box Specifying the construction line offset with the mouse 1 Click the Offset box 2 Drag the offset distance in the drawing atea The distance you drag appears in th
192. e Connected Line tool to draw the wave form of the desired specifications 6 Use the Stretch tool to stretch the wave form to half and full cycles Using parametrics for wave forms You can use parametrics to speed up this process as illustrated below The dotted lines are constraint lines GT GT2 22 GT GT GT al T You can place the con straint lines on another lay 22 0 er and hide them if you want Decimal Indicators DraftBoard can handle both American and European decimal entries in the status line 24 5 or 24 5 303 Appendix The ANSI Code you enter must have 4 digits If the code exists only of 3 digits you must place a leading 0 since the four digit code 0216 doesn t have the same result as 216 304 Special Characters You can use special characters and accents which are available with your computer Usually these characters are described in the user manual of your Operating System Special Characters for Microsoft Windows You can enter many special characters from the keyboard If necessary unlock the keypad with the Num Lock key and then hold down the Alt key and enter the numeric code for the character you want The character appears in the current font including DraftBoard s Plotter font The codes ate listed in the Microsoft Windows User s Guide You can as well use the Windows Charset in the Accessories submenu of the Start menu to insert special
193. e Define Plane command in the 3D menu Setting the Work Plane 1 Select the Planes command in the 3D menu The Planes submenu is displayed 3D Planes gt v World Right Front 2 Select one of the displayed planes The work plane in the sheet or active view window is rotated as specified and the work plane name is checked in the submenu Often it is useful to align the view with the current work plane using the View the Plane command in the Views menu Specifying the position of the work plane In conventional CAD programs you have to specify both the Orzen tation of the work plane and its exact Location along the z axis In DraftBoard you need only to specify the Orientation of the work plane Once that is done then all planes parallel to that orientation act equally as the current work plane e g the Drawing Assistant identifies the Location of the work plane automatically Z z Parallel current work plane x Er 5 Lito Work plane 2 gt Grid za olga Grid the new object geometry is created on When you identify one point of an the work plane of the identified object object with the Drawing Assistant wu Work plane Z If you do not identify an object the new object geometry is placed onto the work plane at the origin If you have used other computer applications you may be familiar with the terms World Coordinate System and User Coordi nate System The World Top wo
194. e Edit Objects dialog box to specify display points If you intend to move a point be sure to lock the adjacent points so you don t change the slope of the rest of the spline 21 Creating Geometry The function Lock Spline Control Points locks both the control points and the end points of a spline In contrast to control points spline endpoints are automatically unlocked after each modification of the spline while control points remain locked until they are unlocked or another tool is selected The Lock and Unlock com mand in the Arrange menu is used to prevent changes to objects and doesn t affect spline control points If you create a spline that crosses over itself the Drawing Assistant will not be able to find that inter section This is by design You cannot move both endpoints of a spline at the same time You must select and move the endpoints individually 28 Lock Spline Control Point Tool This tool allows you to lock the specified points on an existing spline so you can change the slope between the points without affecting the rest of the spline Using the Lock Spline Control Point tool 1 Choose Show Points from the Layout menu 2 Click the vertices you want to lock The Lock Spline Control Point tool is used to lock or immobilize selected control points on an existing spline You may then adjust the curvature of the spline between the locked points without disturbing other areas of the splin
195. e Offset box Be aware that the offset is determined by the angle of the construction line as shown 90 Specifying X Y coordinates with the mouse The coordinates of the last point you specified appear in the X and Y boxes but you can change them by following these instructions 1 Click the X box 2 Enter new coordinates Or In the drawing atea click the location of the point through which the construction line should pass The coordinates are entered automatically for both the X and Y boxes Creating multiple construction lines You can create multiple construction lines through the same point by entering the angles you want separated by semicolons Creating parallel construction lines You can create parallel construction lines by specifying a single angle value with different offsets separated by semicolons You can also create parallel lines by creating one construction line using this box then creating new lines with the Parallel Line tool Creating Construction Geometry Non construction geometry is placed on the work layer You can create temporary construction geometry such as arcs or circles by making Drawing Assistant the Construction layer the work layer creating the geometry and switching to another layer to continue your work You can use the Construction pen style if you like but it s not essential Creating construction geometry 1 Choose Layers from the Layout menu 3 Construction gj Dimensio
196. e Views menu 6 Search for the before displayed geometry by activating each Mode followed by a Zoom All command until the previous geometry is displayed on the new sheet Identifying Models If you do not know which view is displaying which model open the Models dialog box When you click on the drawing area the check mark moves to the model displayed on the sheet If you click in a view window the check mark moves to the model displayed in the detail view Structuring Drawings Creating a non associative detail view You may want a detail view that is not associative that is when you make changes to the original geometry the geometry in the view does not change 1 Create a detail view on an open space containing all geometry you want to be non associative Use the Selection tool to click inside the view to activate it Drag a selection marquee around all of the geometry inside the original view The geometry inside the view is selected Choose Copy from the Edit menu Choose Models from the Views menu Click the New button to create a new model by default model 2 Click the Current button to make the new model the current model in the new view The geometry in the detail view disappears Choose Paste from the Edit menu The geometry is pasted into the new detail view but it is no long er associative since it is part of a different model Displaying several components on one sheet Sheets
197. e attribute by clicking the lock icon On or Off 4 Click Redefine The new attribute name appears in the attributes list and the new value and format are assigned to the attribute Deleting Defined Attributes 1 Select the name of the attribute from the list box of the Define Attribute dialog box 2 Click Delete The selected attribute will be deleted Show or Hide Attributes Only visible attributes indicated by a checkmark beside the attribute name can be seen during assignment The user cannot edit hidden attributes 1 Select the attribute you want to show hide from the list box of the Define Attribute dialog box 2 Click Hide The checkmark besides the attribute name disappears Saving Attributes With the Redefine button you rename an attribute or assign a new value or format to the attribute If you want to save all attribute definitions permanently you have to choose the Save Preferences command from the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu BOM Tool Palette All BOM tools are on a separate palette which you can drag around the drawing area Show Palette Hide Palette This command from the BOM submenu in the Modules menu displays ot hides the BOM Palette Attribute tools Item numbers BOM tools The BOM Palette contain all tools for assigning User defined and Symbol attributes for assigning Item Numbers and creating BOM Tables You activate BOM tools like any other tool in the DraftBoard too pa
198. e between the two file formats used These filters cannot transfer features specific to one application such as DraftBoard s Smart walls into another application where these features are unknown Smart walls for example would be exported as a group of simple lines all smart wall features known in DraftBoard would be lost Importing drawings The import feature of DraftBoard allows you to use existing drawings from DraftBoard ot other applications within a Draft Board document The following file types can be imported VLM DraftBoard native file format Displayed option Draft Board Files File name extension vlm TXT ASCII text file Displayed option Text Files File name extension txt Spline This option allows to import Spline coordinates Draft Board creates then automatically a spline on the drawing area File name extension txt PICT The Macintosh graphics file format which uses object oriented bitmaps or resolution independent graphics Macintosh only WMF Windows Metafile Format An interchange format used by the Windows clipboard for graphics commands Displayed option MetaFi e File name extension wmf Windows only BMP Microsoft Windows Bitmap file format The file name extension bmp is automatically appended to the file name Displayed option Bitmap File name extension bmp Windows only Encapsulated PostScript Format a data format for PostScript printers or for the import in PostS
199. e geometry within view windows is associative since they are displaying allthe same model When you make a change in one view window the change effects the model and therefore the geometry in all views Important Hatches Text and Dimen sions are view dependant and appear only in the views they were created in The Flatten View command inthe Views menu that is described in a later section of this chapter allows you to cancel the associativity existing between the displayed view windows You might look at one of the files in the Layouts folder to see how it is set up Be sure not to make any unwanted changes to these layout files 258 Something similar but more elegant is to load a View Layout using the Sheet into View command in the Views menu since the Sheet into View command creates automatically a new model projects it on the current sheet and puts all geometry into one or more view windows View Layouts View Layouts allow you to create 3D models simultaneously in several view windows without having the geometry displayed on the current sheet at the same time There are two View Layouts optimized for 3D Design Design 4 and Draft 4 Both layouts are stored in the Layout folder in the Draft Board folder and can be loaded with Sheet into View command Design 4 Design4 vim This layout contains four views The Trimetric View is scaled as specified in the Sheet into View dialog box and the other three views a
200. e it 10 Click the Save button All active attributes in the Define Attribute dialog box will automatically be saved under the current layout name for the current DraftBoard session Editing Layouts 1 Choose the Layout command from the BOM submenu in the Layout menu The Define Layout dialog box is displayed 2 Select the layout you want to edit 3 Click the Current button 4 Choose the Attribute command from the BOM submenu in the Layout menu The Define Attribute dialog box is displayed 5 Show or Hide the attributes you want to show or hide visible attributes are indicated by a checkmark As soon you make any changes in the Define Attributes dialog If you want to save layouts box a is displayed behind the name of the current layout When permanently you must choose the Save Prefer ences command from the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu you save the changes made the disappears 245 Geometric Analysis All values you specify are based on the current units specified in the Units dialog box in Preferences submenu of the Layout menu The order by which the attributes are displayed in the Bill of Materials is determined by the order the attributes were defined in the Define Attribute dialog box and cannot be changed in this dialog 246 Layout Options For all BOM layouts you define you can set some preferences globally When you select the Options command from the BOM submenu in
201. e name you specified Playing a movie MAC 1 Choose the Calculate motion command in the Parametric submenu from the Edit menu The kinematic Control Panel is displayed 2 Click the Play Movie button The File open dialog box is displayed 3 Select the name of the movie and click OK A new window display the movie 4 Use the VCR like controls at the bottom of the window to replay the movie Il gt e II all dl 5 Click the Close box on the window when you are finished Parameter When you click the Parameter button the following dialog box is displayed Parameter Parameter R v Start Value End Value Increment per Step Y only active if R wl yo stop simulation if R lt ko The Parameter dialog box allows the following settings Parameter In this list field you select variables for which you want to specify values for the simulation 217 Parametrics Important To avoid Start Value possible parametric con straints during a simulation you should enter the start ing and ending value as decimal numbers like 0 1 to 45 1 with an increment per step of 5 for an angular variable End Value In this entry field you specify a starting value for the selected variable In this entry field you specify an ending value for the selected variable In this entry field you enter a step value for the selected va
202. e the units the ap pearance of the grid spacing remains the same and the values listed in this dialog box change automatically When you change the units existing dimensions update to reflect the change converting automatically between English and metric Altering the precision does not affect any dimen sions The precision of dimensions is selected in the Preferences submenu of the Dimension menu The options Leading 0 and Trailing 0 s set only the number of decimal places in all data fields Edit Ob jects Status Line Position Indicator and in dialog boxes like Edit Objects 2D Analysis etc Leading O and Trailing 0 s for dimensions are set in the Preferences submenu of the Dimension menu 57 Setting the Environment When you make any changes in the Grid dialog box the grid is auto matically displayed after closing the Grid dialog box Displaying the Grid is rarely required since the Drawing Assistant offers in most cases a better support than the Grid 58 Grid This command in the Preferences submenu on the Layout menu allows you to set the spacing of the grid lines You can specify the number of ticks subdivisions per unit spacing You can change the default setting by saving changes in the preferences file Show Grid Ctrl G Macintosh 38G This command on the Layout menu controls the display of the grid The grid is made up of horizontal and vertical lines of dots The spacing of the
203. e view scale of the drawing the size of the object geometry is reduced in relation to the dashed lines with the result that line and hatch patterns are now visible on the screen and on a print out Scaling Text and Dimensions If your unscaled construction is very large or very small compared to the size of added zex and dimensions you have to scale the view of the drawing While scaling DraftBoard distinguishes if the options e Keep Text size Keep Dimension Text size are checked or not When both options are checked text and dimensions are not scaled and keep the size you have assigned in the Text menu or in the Dimension Editor With these options checked the size of the object geometry will be increased or reduced in relation to ex and dimensions However when you scale a drawing without having these options checked e text and dimensions are scaled textand dimensions that you add after scaling are not scaled and displayed at true size This feature allows you to scale tex and dimensions if necessary Options Keep Text size and Keep Dimension Text size The options Keep Text size and Keep Dimension Text size are only available with the Drawing Size command not with the Sheet Into View command Therefore you must when scaling a drawing using the Sheet Into View command select after scaling all text and dimensions and assign again the original text size in the Text menu or the Dimension Editor This procedure i
204. ea for the Startpoint of the curve you want to calculate 5 Enter 3 into the End x entry field or click with the mouse a point on the drawing area for the Endpoint of the curve you want to calculate 6 Enter the value 12 into the Steps entry field for the number of curve points you want to calculate 7 Select the option Connect points and the option Splines 8 Click the Plot button The specified number of curve points is calculated and the parabola is automatically plotted onto the drawing area Function param The parametrical Function Plotter calculates the x y and z graphs dependent on the parameter t When you choose the Function param command in the Modules menu the following dialog box is displayed C Only 2D ignore z Connect Points Lines Splines The Function param dialog box contains the following elements X Start t End t Steps t only 2D Connect Points In this entry field you enter the mathematical definition for the x coordinate In this entry field you enter the mathematical definition for the y coordinate In this entry field you enter the mathematical definition for the 2 coordinate In this entry field you enter the Startpoint for the parameter t In this entry field you enter the Endpoint for the parameter t In this entry field you specify the number of curve points you want to calculate When this option is activated the 2 ax
205. earance All settings for Dimension Appearance are done in the Appearance dialog box When you click the Appearance button the following dialog box is displayed Dimensions Appearance Unit mm e 7 i a a UL Affects only newly created dimensions The Appearance dialog box allows the following settings Units In this pop up menu you select the units mm or inch for all settings in the Appearance dialog box These units are only valid for the setting in the Appearance dialog 129 Dimensions When you click the Apply button in the Dimension Ed itor the new settings are assigned to the selected dimensions except the two values you entered in the fields which will affect only future dimensions If you want to modify the Appearance for another Dimension Standard you must first change the Standard in the Dimension Editor and then modify the Appearance in the Appearance dialog box Click the Standard button in the Dimension Editor if you want to reset all parameters to its original values If you want to make these changes permanent you must choose Save Prefer ences in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu 130 Entry fields Symbols OK box and do not affect the units set for the drawing in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu In these entry boxes you enter the desired offset values for the different elements of a dimension Values you enter in the two
206. ed with a Text Editor Title Blocks With the Forms command in the Text menu you can fill in the title blocks of all standard drawing formats that are saved in the Format folder of the DraftBoard folder As long as no standard drawing format is placed in a drawing the Forms command is greyed It can be only selected if you place a drawing format with a Tztle block using the Import command in the File menu or the Sheet into View command in the Views menu DraftBoard allows you to create your own drawing formats that you can use with the Forms command This procedure is described in Chapter 10 Structuring Drawings Text Fills and Hatches Forms When you select this command in the Text menu a dialog box is displayed that contains all entry fields of the selected drawing format Filling in a Title Block 1 Place a Standard drawing formate from the Layout folder of the DraftBoard folder using the Import or Sheet Into View command 2 Choose the Forms command from the Text menu The displayed Forms dialog lists all entry fields of the title block 3 Type in the desired parameters into the related entry fields You don t have to fill in all entry fields 4 Click OK The Forms dialog box is closed and all entry fields of the selected title block are filled in according to your specifications Editing Title Blocks 1 Select the Forms command from the Text menu The Forms dialog box is displayed 2 Modify the entries of the
207. efine all color continuously after the last predefined color Pen Weights The Weight submenu in the Pen menu offers 8 pen weights that are all user definable This submenu contains also the Define command that allows you to specify for each of the pen weighs displayed in that menu a specific weight Weight This command in the Pen menu sets the pen width of the current pen and selected lines without changing any other pen characteristics 49 Setting the Environment The line weights shown in this submenu are dependent on the selected Units in the Preference Submenu If you have selected metric units the line weight will be shown in mm instead of inches Any line thickness of less than 0 07 mm appears one pixel wide on the screen When you print or plot such lines you can see the different weights The Line weight of dimension lines can be only modified in the Preferences submenu of the Dimension menu and should be always 0 25 mm Remember that pen weights thinner than 007 mm will show up on the screen as one pixel thick However you should be able to see the difference in pen weights on your prints and plots Edited pen weights are not backwards compatible with previous versions of Draft Board Opening a file that contains edited pen weights in a previous version of DraftBoard will revert the pen weights back to their original settings 50 Pen Style gt Color gt _ Weight g
208. elow shows the completed parametric drawing 3 000 gt 875 e 062 REF Be 813 REF 500 REF 1 750 001 1 625 002 1 000 O65 3 000 REF 250 125 1 00 Example Keep It Simple or Testing as You Go When you have unconnected multiple views the parametric mechanism can t determine the relationships between them The coin chute example below describes the parametric drafting of three views You can dimension these views according to standard drafting practice m as shown Section 1 Parametric Drafting 1 Construct and resolve one section at a time Solve any problems with this bracket before moving on Parametrics Additional Tips 813 REF You should place the additional information on a separate layer so you can hide the layer when you plot the draw ing If you use a yellow pen which is hard to see against a white back ground you won t con fuse the additions with the actual geometry 211 Parametrics 212 2 2 Add a centerline between the holes to g Pry maintain alignment 3 Add a line connecting the lower 3 edges of the flanges to keep the lines colinear The section below would resolve without problems so you could go on to the next section La OL OL BC 2 sa BC gt OL Sw 2 Te H FW Once this view resolves properly you can add the side view Section
209. emoved from the Extra menu when DraftBoard is launched again 64 Commands you want to remove from the Utilities menu you must move from the Menu item list box to the Commands list box using the Arrow buttons showing in the opposite direction Click the Save button All commands contained in the Menu list box are added into the last section of the Extra menu Remove single commands 1 Select the Add Commands in the Utilities menu The Add Commands dialog box is displayed Select the command in the Menu list box you want to remove from the Extra menu Click the appropriate Arrow button The selected commands are moved from the Menu list box to the Commands list box Click the Save button All selected commands are removed from the Utilities menu Remove all commands 1 Select the Add Commands in the Utilities menu The Add Commands dialog box is displayed Click the Clear button All commands are moved from the Menu list box to the Commands list box Click the Save button All commands are removed from the Utilities menu Add functions This command allows you to add additional functions into a separate function palette When you call the Add Functions command the following dialog box is displayed F Add Function Functions Palette x Main Set attributes Icon O Sub File element fe The Add Function dialog box allows the following settings Functions The Functio
210. ength e Parametric Resolve values e User Defined Colors e Visualization Parameter for 3D Models Changing the default settings 1 Create a file which has the preferences you want 2 Choose Save Preferences from the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu The preferences are set for subsequent new documents Customization DraftBoard can be customized to your personal needs by displaying a Floating Tool Palette creating Macros or adding commands and functions via the Function Interface Both the Floating Tool Palette and Macros can be executed by Stroke commands Customizations can also be made by changing the contents of the DraftBoard ini file If a palette is not visible it could be that it was saved at a position outside of the screen In this case you look for the name of the palette in the DraftBoard ini file in the DraftBoard directory or folder under the section Palettes and enter there the Pixel Coordinates 20 20 Then you have to re start DraftBoard You cannot save geometry into the preferences file with the Save Preferences command only your settings are saved Be careful to use the Save Preferences command when your drawing contains several Sheets Models Detail Views and Layers Although this command doesn t save any geometry it saves the setup of the current draw ing as default for all future drawings you create That means that any new draw ing will contain the same number of Layers Detai
211. ensioned Preferences The Visualization command in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu allows you to set various options for the representation of surfaced objects Visualization The Visualization command allows you to set some Shaded Options to change the Background color to select the Appearance of the removed Hidden Lines and to deactivate the Default Lighting The Visualization command displays the following dialog box Visualization Control View Mode Shaded Yisible Lines Max Angle Max edge length o Max chord length Background Color M Antialiasing for Visible Lines Dynamic rotate Y Update Silhouettes TT Wireframe Visible Lines analytical Line Color Line Width Y Show hidden lines Hidden line type Cancel Apply IL ok The Visualization dialog box contains the following elements Shaded Visible Lines For the view modes Shaded and Visible Lines all NURB Surfaces are triangulized what means that all non planar NURB Surfaces are approximated by small triangles The settings Max Angle Max Edge Length and Max Chord Length describe the ratio of the NURB Surface Edge to the adjacent triangle edge Max Angle Max Chord Length Max Angle This value describes the maximum possible Exterior Angle between two approximation triangles Allowed are values gt 0 The default 291 3D Surfaces value is 20 The smaller the value the larger becomes the number of fa
212. ent sheets that you can turn on and off This feature is particularly useful for designs with several variations of a component A common use of layers is to draw the different floor plans and plumbing and wiring plans for a building on different layers The following examples show simplified drawings using layers Layer 1 The foundation Layer 2 First Floor Layer 3 Second Floor In order to print or plot the layers simply use the Layers dialog box to turn on the layers you want to print and turn off all other layers When you can see what you want to print on the screen choose Print from the File menu Using Smart Walls with layers You can also observe how smart walls function in these examples Note Smart walls merge The interior walls on Layers 2 and 3 overlay the exterior walls of only on the same layer therefore the interior walls are not merged with the exterior walls the foundation Layer Groups and walls on Layer 2 are j A f not merged with walls on Layer Groups are particularly useful for viewing and plotting different Layer 3 layers of a complex drawings For example the document described in the Layers section that shows the floor plan of a house might have several layers illustrating the plumbing layout and several layers illustrating the electrical plan The plumbing layers can be shown in the Plumbing Layer Group but hidden in the Electrical Layer Gro
213. entry fields which have a Symbol in front affect only newly created dimensions not selected dimensions These two entry fields dis play values for the perpendicular distance between ob jects being dimensioned and for the first and all further dimension lines When you click the OK button the Appearance dialog box is closed and all settings are assigned to the cur rent standard Modifying the dimension appearance 1 Select all dimensions you want to modify If no dimensions are selected all changes are valid only for future dimensions Choose Preferences in the Dimension menu to display the Dimension Editor Drag in the Standard pop up menu to the standard you want to modify Click the Appearance button in the Dimension Editor The Appearance dialog box is displayed Select mm or Inch in the Units pop up menu for all changes you want to make in the Appearance dialog box Modify the Dimension Appearance by entering appropriate values in the related entry fields Click OK The Appearance dialog box is closed Click the Apply button if you want to assign the new settings to selected dimensions All selected dimensions are redrawn and reflect the new appearance set in the Appearance dialog box except the two val ues you entered in the fields which will affect only newly cre ated dimensions Dimension Lines All settings for Dimension Lines are done in the Dimension Lines dialog box When you click the D
214. epresenting the calculated NURB splines NURB Surfaces are displayed as a wireframe gt surface mesh made of Splines You can rotate surfaced objects in any view mode using the Trackball Draft Board will automatically recalculate and redisplay the image in the new view structured surface as wireframe surface mesh orientation Shaded This mode displays surfaced geometry as a solid looking object The object must not be selected for a shaded representation 289 3D Surfaces For a good representation of the shaded model any color except black is recommended When you want to shade an already surfaced model in different colors you must use the Ungroup com mand keep the surfaces and then assign different colors to the individual parts You can rotate surfaced objects in any view mode using the Trackball Draft Board will automatically recalculate and redisplay the image in the new view orientation 290 Due to the new OpenGL Support 3D models can in real time be rotated and to a certain extend edited in the Shaded View Mode move copy etc Also commands such as Polar and Linear Duplicate can be executed vety fast The display speed depending from the processor used and the available memory can be accelerated further by OpenGL Graphic boards Further settings for View precision dynamical Rotation etc are done in the Visualization dialog window in the Preferences menu of the Layout me
215. er New CYR Courier New Greek Courier New TUR Curlz MT The fonts listed in the menu are those installed on your computer and include DraftBoard s plotter fonts The font you choose stays in effect for the current document until you choose another font Special characters and accents are available as described in the Appendix of this manual Extended font selection The Font submenu can display up to 20 fonts If you have installed more than 20 fonts select More in the Font submenu of the Text menu to get access to all available fonts Choosing More from the Font submenu brings up a dialog box allowing you to specify the font text size and text style The text size is measured as point size If you want to specify the size in the units you have set for your drawing you have to type the exact unit such as for inch or mm for millimeter after the value 1 Choose More from the Font submenu in the Text menu The Character Format dialog box displays et haracter Format y Font Arial iv Size 12 000p v Bold Ditalies 2 Select the character format The text size is always measured as point size pt If you want to specify the size in another unit like in Millimeter include mm with your numeric entry All selections made in this dialog box take effect immediately for all selected text or text boxes A checkmark in front of a menu item shows the current attribute Text can be rotated with the Rotate functio
216. es containing simple and parametric symbols The Libraries command displays the following dialog box E Libraries Libraries Symbols i Nut 1 Library u Ed an Ore SSE ESAS tive P Misc Symbc LP Motor ensor The Libraries dialog box allows the following settings Libraries This list field contains all available symbol libraries Symbols This list field shows all symbols of the selected library New This button creates a new library When you click the New button the Set Library file dialog box is displayed where you can select a folder for the new Library reference file and overwrite the default library name Library vlb When you click the Save button the dialog box is closed and the library list shows the new library with the default name Library 1 that you can modify in the Rename field Add Library This button allows to add an existing library When you click the Add button the Add Library dialog box is displayed where you can select a Library reference file with the file extension vlb When you click the Open button the dialog box is closed and the selected library is added to the existing libraries Symbol This button allows to add a symbol to the selected library When you click the Add button the Add Symbol dialog box is displayed where you can select a symbol file with the file extension vlm When you click the Open button the dialog box is closed and the selected symbol is a
217. es that you can fill in the box by dragging the mouse in the drawing area to indicate the length The X Y values can be also dragged on the drawing area If the copies should be arranged semicircular the Total Angle must be 180 If you want to place an ob ject three times in a semi circle the Number must be 3 and the Step Angle 90 If the option Rotated Objects is selected in principle any point on the object becomes a Reference Point The Ref X and Ref Y coordinates can be speci fied by entering the values in the respective enter fields or clicking a point on the drawing area If you begin a duplication and discover that it is not what you want you can stop the process by pressing the Escape key and then choosing Undo to remove the copies from your document 92 Rotated Objects Upright Objects When you select the Polar Duplicate command in the Edit menu the following dialog box is displayed Polar Duplicate Number asd O Rotated Objects Center X 0 000 O Upright Objects Center 0 000 Ref x The Polar Duplicate dialog box contains the following settings Number The total number of objects you want Be sure to include the selected object itself in this total count Center X The Center X and Y values determine the center of Center Y the circular array Total Angle The total number of degrees between the center of the selected object and the center of the last co
218. es you the ability to select points that aren t displayed When Selectable Points is not set you cannot select points by dragging a marquee If points are displayed simply click the point to select it If points are not displayed you can select a point by dragging a selection marquee around it The following example illustrates the use of Selectable Points The line s control point is selected with the rectangle The line s control point is not selected with the rectangle With Selectable Points turned on the Move tool moves the lower rectangle and the line endpoint With Selectable Points turned off the Move tool moves the lower rectangle but not the line endpoint Selecting objects If you select and drag a line the line and the end points move If you select and drag only an end point of the line the end point moves and the line length changes while the other endpoint of the line remains fixed 11 Editing Objects Editing Tools Moving Objects with Tools Copying Objects with Tools Sizing Objects with Tools Editing Commands Duplicating Objects Changing the Characteristics of Objects Arranging Geometry Editing objects Editing Objects Once you create an object you can select and alter it by choosing a All procedures in this command or selecting a tool to edit it This section describes the chapter are described for single objects they naturally are valid as we
219. esired layer from those listed in the center box 3 Choose Select All from the Edit menu 4 Choose Edit Objects from the Edit Menu The number of objects is listed at the top of the dialog box 5 Close the Selection Mask and Edit Objects dialog boxes Using colors with layers Many CAD drawings show different components in different colors When you specify a different color for a layer the layer remembers the color so that if you add geometry to a layer later the new geome try appears in the same color as the last geometry constructed on that layer In this way you can use the Visible pen in red on one layer green on another layer and so on 1 Select Layers from the Layout menu 2 Create a new layer and rename it Outline green indicating you always want to use the pen style Outline with a green color on this layer Structuring Drawings 3 Make the layer Outline green current 4 Select Outline in the Style submenu from the Pen menu 5 Change the pen color from Black to Green by selecting Green in the Color submenu from the Pen menu 6 Draw a circle The circle is created with the green color 7 Select the Single line tool 8 Make Layer 1 current 9 Draw a line The line is created in black the default color for the Outline pen style 10 Select the Rectangle tool 11 Make Layer Outline green current and draw a rectangle The rectangle is created in green A Layer Example Layers are like transpar
220. ess the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key Pressing the Shift key you can select additional objects If you select more than one object they remain in the same position relative to each other Stretching objects 1 Select the geometry you want to stretch 2 Select the Stretch tool 3 Click a point on the object that you want to remain stationary 4 Click a second point on the object you want to move Reference point 5 Click a third point to indicate the new location of the Reference point Factor Angle 0 The Status Line allows you to enter the exact Scale factor and Angle Editing objects If the mirror axis should be aligned in a precise angle you have to create a con struction line before Using the beginning and ending reference point for the Expand Shrink tool is particularly useful if you want to change the size of an object relative to the size of another object When you want to change the size of an object relative to the size of an other object you should click the Reference and Destination point instead of dragging the Reference point 85 Editing objects 86 Moving Objects with Tools When an object is selected move the pointer near the object until the Move symbol appears and drag the object to a new location Using the Drawing Assistant for Moving When the pointer becomes the Move symbol you can drag the object around and see the Drawing Assistant s
221. essing the Shift Ctrl keys Macintosh Command ey and dragging the cursor on the Trackball in a circular motion the geometry will rotate around the screen Z axis circular Selecting Standard Views DraftBoard provides the following predefined orthogonal standard views that offer a perfect environment for creating 3D wireframe models Top View of the x y plane from above Bottom View of the x y plane from below Front View of the x z plane from the front Back View of the x z plane from the back Right View of the y z plane from the right 253 3D Basics With the Trackball you can rotate the view in an active view window or the Sheet view as long as there are no detail views 254 Left Isometric Dimetric Trimetric View of the y z plane from the left The view of the axes is rotated as shown x 30 y 30 X Z 90 The view of the axes is rotated as shown x 7 ax y 42 z 90 The view of the axes is rotated as shown Trackball View menu The Trackball has a pull down menu for specifying a Standard View of the current view window or the sheet if there are no view windows Selecting a Standard View with the Trackball menu 1 Move the pointer to the current view name displayed at the bot tom of the Trackball menu 2 Press the mouse button The Trackball menu is displayed v Top Bottom Front Rear Left Right Isometric Dimetric Trimetric
222. eted Therefore you must use the Zoom all command if you want to project all geometry in a view window When exporting DXF DWG Files not all views have to be flattened since several views are automatically de tected during export and a dialog box with correspond ing options will be display ed See as well Exporting DXF DWG Files in this manual The left graphic shows a Detail View window for Windows the right graphic for the Apple Macintosh 170 Flatten View This command in the Views menu allows you to remove hidden three dimensional geometry in direction of the Z Axis in a view window The command Flatten View in the View menu places all geometry visible in a view window with the current scale factor onto the current sheet and removes overlapping lines of equal length and all lines paral lel to the view direction The object geometry is no longer associative to the related model When you edit a flattened view the related model remains unchanged and vice versa Flatten a View 1 Select a view window 2 Choose the Flatten View command in the Views menu A dialog window is displayed warning you that the selected view will be disassociated from the related model All dimensions in the view window will be deleted since three dimensional dimensions would not be correct in a two dimension al drawing 3 Click OK The object geometry will be placed with the current scale factor onto the current sheet
223. etric Problems section later in this chapter describes typical problems you may encounter If you have not given all of the dimensions required to draw the geometry the geometry is divided into unrelated groups The missing information determines how the groups relate to one another An alert box shows how many groups exist To see each group click the Next button Examine the groups shown to determine why the position of each one is not relative to any other A group consisting of a single point is particularly telling This investigation can require some clever thought because the solution may not be obvious Specifying Parametric Variables in a Text File If you frequently use parametrics which contain many variables you can create a text file to specify the variables and avoid entering them in the Resolve dialog box each time you resolve the paramettics Create a text file which alternates the variables and the values using white space Spacebar Tab or Return between entries Draft Board assumes the first entry is a variable and the second is the value for that variable Your text file might look like the examples below or any other arrangements Height 12 Height R17 12 Diameter 5 R 17 Diameter S Height 12 R 17 Diameter 5 Using a text file for parametric variables 1 Create the text file using any word processor or spreadsheet and saving it as Text only 2 In DraftBoard select the geometry a
224. etry 207 problem messages problems 207 resolve command 207 203 203 rigid links 213 single points 208 symbols 224 symmetry 210 tangency 202 209 testing 206 triangle link 214 unrelated groups 208 vatiables 202 variables as text file 204 paste command 89 pattern 51 pen arrows 56 characteristics 46 color 46 editing line styles 55 pattern 51 styles 45 weight 49 perimeter attribute 239 permanent construction lines 39 perpendicular dimensions 122 perpendiculars 36 perspective view 292 phantom line style 54 pict 189 planes 3 point plane 268 define plane command 269 moving the origin 268 planes command 267 Redefine Plane 270 271 set plane to screen command 271 standard planes 267 temp plane 268 triad 266 work plane 265 plot scale 178 plotter fonts 155 308 plotting 157 PNG 193 point light 295 points creating a point 18 displaying 76 selectable points command 76 selecting invisible points 76 show points command 76 polar duplicate command 91 polygon tools 23 postscript 308 precision dimensions 127 precision units 57 pref vim 59 preferences autosave 58 dimensions 125 directories 58 document properties 184 grid 58 invert 58 nits 58 palettes 59 saving 58 selection 58 setting units 57 snap 58 text margins 58 preview layout command 153 print 155 page setup command drawing size 153 preview layout command 157 print setup command 155 print command 152 p
225. f an object or objects on the opposite side of a reference line You can copy the selection by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while you select the objects If you select more than one object they remain in the same position relative to each other 1 Select the object s to be mirrored 2 Select the Mirror tool If necessary use Shift Click to select more objects 3 Specify the reference line by clicking two locations or by dragging The reference line need not be parallel to the object The status line has no entries Expand Shrink Tool This tool enlarges or reduces objects while maintaining the proportions You can copy the selection by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while you select the objects If you select more than one object they remain in the same position relative to each other Expanding or shrinking objects 1 Select the object s to be expanded or shrunk 2 Select the Expand Shrink tool If necessary use Shift Click to select more objects 3 Click a point on the object that you want to remain stationary 4 Drag the selected object to a new location pressing to set a reference point and releasing to indicate the new location Factor il The status line allows you to enter the exact scale Factor in the status line Stretch Tool This tool allows you to scale objects along one axis and a specified angle You can stretch a copy when you pr
226. f pages you specified to cover these objects you want to print 7 Click OK Your drawing 1s scaled to fit the number of pages and layout as you have specified Structuring Drawings Layer Sheets Models Associative Views Drawing Formats Working with Sheets Views and Models Structuring Drawings Structuring Drawings DraftBoard provides the following features to structure drawings e Layers e Sheets e Associative Detail Views e Models These tools allow you to use DraftBoard individually for your de sign tasks Especially the combination of Sheets Views and Models add a great amount of flexibility to the design process Layers Layers are particularly useful in helping you view and plot complex drawings For example when you dimension a part the dimensions can be placed on a separate layer which you can display or not as your needs require Layers allow you to plot different versions of the same document for quick and easy specialized blueprints e You can hide the dimension layer to exhibit the idea of a design to a planning team and show the dimensions when presenting the drawing to engineers e You can hide some drawing components when you plot For example you can hide the construction layer so that construction lines and geometry don t plot but they remain in the drawing ready for use when you want to alter it e You can construct different layouts using one layer as the basis For example you ca
227. f the selected symbol including all its dimensions Path Below the Preview window you find the path to the folder where the selected symbol is stored Variables For parametric symbols this list contains entry fields for all variables defined for the symbol Parameter When you click the Parameter button the Parameter dialog box is displayed containing all attributes defined in the corresponding value table If no value table exist the Parameter button is deactivated To place the symbol in your drawing click or drag a vector on the drawing area If you click the symbol is inserted in the location you click in its original orientation If you drag the starting point of the dragged vector specifies the Insertion point for the symbol and the direction of the dragged vector indicates the orientation When you click OK the symbol is placed at the current scale of the drawing Placing a symbol 1 Choose the Insert command from the Symbols submenu The File open dialog box is displayed Select the symbol file you want to use and click the Open button Enter a value for each parametric dimension or click the Parame ter button if an underlying value table for the symbol exists The Parameter dialog box is displayed DIN 609 M 8 x 55 4 Select a symbol from the Parameter list The symbol values are transferred into the related entry fields of the Symbol dialog box 5 Click the OK button The Parameter dialog box
228. f the front break the upper and lower boundary lines of cube intersect the front face of the rear cube the front face of the rear cube into two pieces and Since the these two lines are x only divided into two pieces all surfaces can be autosurfaced In the following example the front face of the back cube is broken into three pieces 285 3D Surfaces Surfaces are called planar surfaces when all surface points lie in a two dimen sional plane When a circle is extruded using the Extrude command this happens automatically 286 Intersection points divided boundary lines The left and right face of the front cube intersect divide the upper and lower boundary lines of the front face of the rear cube and the front face of the rear cube into three pieces Since these two lines are divided into three pieces the top bottom and the front face of the rear cube cannot be autosurfaced 10 Whenever you want to delete the surfaces and return to the original model try to use Undo instead of Ungroup When you ungroup a surfaced model using the Ungroup command and delete its surfaces you may get back a different wireframe model then the one you started with Because of Rule 9 some lines may be divided that weren t divided before 11 When working with multiple objects select each one individually and autosurface them one at a time for best results Summary of Rules 1 Planar surface
229. fillets the parametric mechanism doesn t understand 4 PLCS and doesn t know the corners ate symmetrical R 25 4PLCS SOLUTION Dimension each fillet Return to the Original Part between Tests If you resolve parametric geometry more than one time you can introduce unintentional constraints Parametrics 1 PROBLEM If you first resolve this geometry by spec Y ifying that R is half the measurement of X R X 2 the resolved geometry would appear as shown in the lower illustration D You would now be able to resolve this geometry only with the same X value of R 2 because the undimensioned line is vertical and according to the basic rules y vertical lines remain vertical idi If you tried to use a value for R or X other than the R X 2 relationship the parametric mechanism would display this problem message SOLUTION Use the Undo command to return The Undo command is G t traint bosa Circle tangent to line to the original shape You could always available for any of Problem shown 1 of 1 the previous eight actions also solve this problem by changing the geometry Parametric Problems This section illustrates problems you may encounter when you resolve parametric geometry It provides examples and shows you what caused the problem and how to solve it When you resolve parametric geometry problems which prevent resolution appear in a message box stating the type and nu
230. for the location 002 plus the tolerance for size 005 Least Material Condition Least Material Condition LMC indicates that a feature contains the minimum amount of material within its specified tolerance limit For holes the swept area is the largest and the drill bit drills the largest hole For shafts the tolerance is the smallest allowable dimension In the example above this material condition symbol means that the tolerance 002 applies to the location of the largest hole 315 As the hole size nears its lower limit 310 the tolerance for the location of the hole increases from 002 to 007 the tolerance for the location 002 plus the tolerance for size 005 Dimensions If the diameter symbol is appropriate for the geometry you should display it It is usually not used with flatness round ness cylindricity profile of line or surface angularity runout or total runout Maximum Material Condi tion is the most commonly used symbol for parts Least Material Condition is most frequently used to control wall thicknesses of parts as well as for tool fix tures and inspection gauging 137 Dimensions 138 Regardless of Feature Size The Regardless of Feature Size RFS material condition means the tolerance applies regardless of the size of the feature within the specified tolerance limit For holes the location tolerance is the same regardless of whether the hole is the smallest or larges
231. form of conditional expression RNG T V1 N1 V2 N2 V3 N3 Vi Ni V 1 In this function the first argument T is tested against every N value in the other arguments and returns the value V that lies between the two N values that bracket T Each of the test N values must be greater than the preceeding N For example the expression RNG A 1 10 0 20 1 returns 1 if A lt 10 0 if 10 lt A lt 20 1 if A gt 20 Units of Measure You can use different units of measure such as inches feet inches and feet x y millimeters mm centimeters cm and meters m You can also mix the units in the mathematical expression as long as you label the units properly for example 10 25 4 cm Nanoseconds DraftBoard is well suited for computer hardware design such as diagrams of timing devices For example you can draw in nanoseconds a billionth of a second Designs which include nanoseconds typically consist of wave forms made of horizontal and vertical lines which mimic the functions of a timing device 1 Specify Millimeters as the unit of measure in the Units submenu of the Preferences command in the Layout menu 2 Choose Grid from the Preferences submenu Appendix 3 Set the grid spacing to 34 and the number of subdivisions to 2 A megahertz is approximately 34 nanoseconds and this becomes the base cycle with two tickmarks for drawing half cycles 4 Turn on the Grid 5 Use th
232. g box is displayed 4 Enter a name for the print file 5 Click OK The drawing will be printed to file and saved under the name you specified Plotting to a file on a Macintosh computer 1 Choose Chooser from the Apple menu 2 Select a printer or plotter from the Chooser list A message appears telling you to confirm settings in Page Setup in the File menu Click Continue Click Setup in the Chooser dialog box Specify the printer and options you want to use Choose Print from the File menu 7S ye oe Click the File button in the lower right corner of the Print dialog box 8 Enter the file name and click OK The drawing will be printed to file and saved under the name you specitisd Tiled Printing If you are using a printer rather than a plotter you may want to tape pages together to get a larger drawing than laser printers allow Specify the layout for those pages by choosing Drawing Size from the Layout menu 1 Choose Drawing Size from the Layout menu 2 Specify the number of pages across for the final drawing 3 Specify the number of pages down for the final drawing 4 Specify the order for printing the pages across then down ot down then across Across then Down then Down Across 112 113 314 214 5 Click the Fit button The drawing will be scaled to fit to the number of pages you specified 6 With the mouse button pressed reposition the displayed rectangles representing the number o
233. g certain tools you have to define a work plane other than the standard planes For example if you want to create an object on an angled face using a tool that defines an object by only two points You can define a new plane with two commands on the 3D menu 3 Point Plane and Define Plane With the 3 Point Plane command you set a new wotk plane that you can name and save using the Define Plane command 3 Point Plane This command in the 3D menu sets a temporary work plane by simply indicating the Origin and the horizontal X and vertical Y directions If you want to work lt a on this face you have to click using the 3 Point Plane command on points 1 2 3 Point 1 for the Origin Point 2 2 for the new x axis and i Point 3 for the new y axis Specifying a temporary Work Plane 1 Choose the 3 Point Plane command from the 3D menu 2 Click in the drawing area to indicate the point you want for the Origin of the new work plane 3 Click a point to define the positive x axis 4 Click a point to define the positive y axis A temporary work plane is created and named TempPlane The work plane is moved but the view does not change If you do not name the new plane with Define Plane it will be replaced by the next 3 point plane you specify and will be removed from the list of available planes when you quit DraftBoard Define Plane Allows you to define a new work plane name a temporary plane ot c
234. g it depressed and pressing then the key F1 The Key edit box will display Ctrl F If you try to create a Control key combination you will not be able to execute the macro if the key combination is already in use In Utilities If you mark this option the macro name will be included as a menu item in the Utilities menu to access the macro directly Creating a macro 1 Select the Macro command in the Utilities menu The Macro dialog box is displayed Click the New Button The name Macrol is displayed in the Rename field Overwrite the name if desired Select menu commands in the order you want the new macro to execute The selected commands are automatically filled in the Commands list box Define a Stroke command on the drawing area Depress the Control and Shift keys Macintosh Command Rey and drag a symbol on the drawing area you want to be associated to the new macro That can be letters or a figure like a circle You can not use DraftBoard s Standard Stroke commands like Zoom ot Construction strokes since they would be executed immediately A letter and number combination describing the executed Stroke will be filled into the Stroke list box automatically When you define a stroke you must repeat it several times to define all variations of the stroke so that all possible variations are covered and can be recognized by DraftBoard Mark the In Utilities Menu option if you want the new macro included in the Ut
235. group and layer attributes are subsequently modified either by the Layer dialog box or by changing the work layer in the Layer Indicator pull down list the Layer Group loses its work status A check mark by a Layer Group indicates that the current settings in the Layer dialog box match those of the indicated Layer Group This is only valid just after displaying the Layer Group dialog box The Layer Group dialog box allows the following settings New This button creates a new Layer Group called Groupl Group2 Group3 etc by default Use the Rename button to rename the Layer Group with an appropri ate name You can have up to 256 Layer Groups in a single file Delete This button deletes the selected highlighted Layer Group Set Work This button sets the currently selected highlighted group as the work group This changes the layer set tings for the current model to those specified by the layer group Rename This button renames the currently selected highlight ed group with the name in the Layer Group entry box Creating a Layer Group 1 Click New A new Layer Group appears in the group list It records the current layer settings and displays these settings in the Layers list 2 Change the layer settings as desired Visible layers are indicated by the Eye Symbol and can be hidden by clicking on the symbol Hidden layers can be made visible by clicking in the location where the Eye Symbol would be The work l
236. h with i a right indentation i AutoText The two AutoText commands TextBlocks and Forms in the Text menu simplify and accelerate the placing of text blocks Size gt Style gt mn te Autotext Forms They allow you to define often used annotations as Standard Text that can be placed with only one mouse click in a drawing and to fill in and edit Title Blocks in a dialog box In addition you can create your own Standard Drawing formats and Title Blocks or modify existing ones Defining Text blocks Using the TextBlocks command you can define often used annota tions as standard text blocks group annotations in logical groups and place predefined annotations directly on the drawing area TextBlocks The TextBlocks command displays the following dialog box Text Fills and Hatches Autotext Group 1 lv Go Ow Rename The TextBlocks dialog box contains the following settings New When you click the New button a new annotation ot text group is created depending which list item is active When a annotation is selected while clicking New a new annotation is created for the selected group with the name Text 1 Clicking New when a tex group is selected a new text group with the name Group 1 and a new annotation for the new group named Text 1 is created You can overwrite the predefined names Text 1 or Group 1 with a more suitable name in the Rename entry field Delete When you cli
237. hange a standard plane Standard planes cannot be changed unless you click off the lock icon If you change any of the standard planes you can always revert to the World Plane Top Plane to return to the original orientation When you select the Define Plane command from the 3D menu the following dialog box is displayed E Define Plane Rename The Define Plane dialog box contains the following items Planes List This list box contains all defined planes The work plane is indicated by a Checkmark all locked planes by a Lock icon Locked planes must be unlocked for editing by clicking the lock icon New Clicking this button displays the Redefine Plane dialog box that allows you to define a plane As soon as you click the OK button the dialog box is closed and the new plane Plane 1 is added to the Planes List Using the Rename button you can give the plane a more appropriate name Delete This button allows you to delete a selected plane Locked planes and the current work plane can not be deleted Redefine Clicking this button displays the Redefine Plane dialog box that allows you to redefine the selected plane Set Work This button allows you to make a selected plane the Work Plane The work plane is indicated by a Checkmark Rename This button allows you to rename a selected plane in the Rename box Locked planes and the current work plane can not be renamed Selecting the Work Plane 1 Se
238. hatching tor solid fills and for 2D Analy sis because it eliminates the need to segment geometry Important You can press the Escape key to stop the Tracer Important The Tracer tool does not work on a 3D model 13 Selecting objects The Tracer tool creates a temporary copy of the boundaries Temporary because it s copied to a temporary layer which is deleted as soon you activate the Tracer tool or select a command other than Hatch or 2D Analy sis As long as the tempo rary boundaries are se lected they can be copied to another layer 74 If you click on the outside of the perimeter line the Tracer selects the outer most perimeter If you click on the inside of the line the Tracer selects the inner most perimeter The crosshatching on the figures below shows the boundaries selected when you click the Tracer tool at the cursor locations shown Intersecting areas If you want to determine and isolate the overlapping part of two intersecting areas you proceed as follows 1 Select the Tracer tool from the Selection Tool subpalette 2 Click on the overlapping area The overlapping area is selected Select Layer in the Layout menu Create a new layer Select Edit Objects in the Layout menu a A A A Select the new layer in the Layer list box and click the Apply button 7 Close the Edit Objects dialog box 8 Make the new layer in the Layer dialog box the work layer 9 Hide the layer
239. he drawing that were created for example by erroneous mouse clicks Removing dots 1 Choose the Remove Dots command from the Extra menu All isolated construction points are removed from your drawing Text Lines This functions creates horizontal Text lines Creating Text lines 1 Draw a horizontal line 2 Select Show Palette in the Extra menu 3 Mark the line where you want to insert text using the Selection function in the standard Function palette 4 Select the Text Line function 5 Enter in the status line the desired text 6 Press the Enter key The text is inserted into the middle of all selected horizontal lines The line segment behind the text is deleted You can edit the text using the Text function in the standard Function palette If you want to move the Text within the line you have selected with a selection marquee the text and the endpoints of the adjacent lines Automatic Dimensioning This function dimensions automatically Limes independently from their angle Circles Ellipses and ares Using Automatic Dimension 1 Draw a circle several lines in different angles and an arc 2 Select Show Palette in the Utilities menu 3 Choose the Automatic Dimensioning function 4 Click at each object with the Automatic Dimensioning function All ines are dimensioned correctly all circles arcs and ellipses are dimension with a radius dimension Setting the Environment Specifying Crosshatch Patte
240. he Open dialog window a Preview of the saved drawing in case this option was activated for this document the Author if de fined and the Original Creation date All other defined attributes for the drawing are stored in the Document Attributes dialog window after opening the drawing Search in Drawings v e gt E fe R Pump lm R Factory vim XK Ball vim RR Player vim RB House vlm R Mice vim QR Engine vim RR Garage vim XK Hydraulic vim R Liftervim RR Fluid scheme vim R Escalator vim lt File name Mice vim il File type DraftBoard Files Document Properties Preview I Author DraftBoard Unlimited Inc Date Mi 19 Dez 2001 12 03 57 TIT Bite tt tt A ol Preview Displaying Document Properties in DraftBoard 1 Open a drawing that was saved with document properties you have specified in the Document Attributes dialog window Select the Document Properties command in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu The Document Attributes dialog window containing the attributes saved with the Save as command is displayed 185 DraftBoard Documents A detailed description how to open files you find also in the User Manual for the Operating system of your computer The name of the sheet is only displayed in the Title Bar if more than one sheet exists Note Use the Import command if you want to use drawings of other format types
241. he Status Line with Drawing Tools Once you have drawn an object you can adjust its specifications such as length angle and location in the status Line You must make these changes immediately before you construct another object select a different tool or choose a command You can make only one series of changes in the status line in as many boxes as necessary after you press the Enter key DraftBoard redraws the object to your specifi cations Once you have pressed the Enter key you must make subse quent changes with the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu Try the following exercises to create and change a single line with the Status Line Altering geometry in progress with status boxes 1 Select the Single Line tool 2 Click 2 locations in the drawing area The length L box is highlighted in the status line 3 Type3 The 3 is entered directly in the L box 4 Press the Tab key to select the next status box The angle A box is now highlighted 5 Enter 15 6 Press the Enter key Pressing the Enter key completes the data entry for this object The line is redrawn 3 units long and at a 15 angle Creating additional geometry with status boxes 1 With the Single Line tool still selected from the previous example click 2 more points 2 Type 4 3 Press the Tab key and type 25 4 Press Enter Another line is drawn Creating new geometry with status boxes 1 Select the Selection tool so the Single Line status box c
242. he Style submenu in the Pen menu This com mand is described later in this chapter 46 Pen Characteristics The following characteristics are available from the submenus in the Pen menu Pen Pen Pen Style gt Style gt Style gt Color gt Define Color Color gt Weight gt Palette gt Weight F Edit Weight Weight gt Pattern oO Ze Pattern gt Pattern gt Define Pattern i Diack m Edit Pattern Red 0 15 Yellow v 0 25 v Solid Green 0 35 Dotted Cyan 0 50 Center Blue 0 70 Dashed Magenta 1 00 Hidden More 1 50 Phantom Dashdot Border divide Cutting Stitch More Whenever you change the characteristic Color Weight or Pattern of a pen these characteristic are valid until you end the current Draft Board session or select a new pen charactetistic Changing one characteristic of a pen style 1 Choose the pen you want to modify 2 Choose a characteristic color weight or pattern from the characteristic submenus in the Pen menu To return a standard pen to its original specifications choose a differ ent pen style from the menu and then choose the modified pen again All selected objects will reflect the new pen characteristic as will all future lines drawn until you end the current DraftBoard session or select new pen characteristics Changing the pen characteristics of an object without changing the pen 1 Select the object 2 Choose Edit Objects from the
243. he following Convert options Draw each File If you mark this option you will see each file during the conversion process If this option is not selected DraftBoard will open a blank drawing window perform the conversion close the blank window and repeat the process for each file in the folder For large drawings or large quantities of drawings turning off Draw each file will speed up the operation Converting multiple files 1 Create two folders One folder will be used to store the original files the FilesIn folder the other folder will store the converted files the FilesOut folder Copy all files you want to convert into the FilesIn folder Select the Convert command from the File menu The Convert dialog box appears Select the file type you are translating from in the Input File Format list Select the file type you are translating to in the Output File Format list Mark the option Draw each file if wanted Click OK The Open file dialog box displays Open the folder FilesIn that contains the files to convett Select a single file and click Open The selected file must be of the same type as was selected for Input File format or DraftBoard will generate an error message DraftBoard Documents 10 Select a destination folder FilesOut for the translated files or create a new one Specify a new extension to identify the converted files 1t 1s reasonable to use the standard file type extensi
244. he standard drawing rules While you don t have to follow the these suggestions in order you may want to use the following scheme until you have enough experience to know how each step affects the overall project Creating a drawing 1 Start DraftBoard DraftBoard automatically displays an Untitled document 2 If necessary set the Units of measure you want to use with the Preferences command in the Layout menu 3 Use the Drawing Size command in the Layout menu to set the drafting scale to 1 1 Basic Drafting 4 Construct the geometry at full size saving the construction as you work Use the Zoom commands and tools to display the part at an appropriate magnification so that you can see what you ate doing 5 Use the Print Setup command Macintosh Page Setup in the File menu to set the paper size you will use for plotting or printing 6 Use the Drawing Size command in the Layout menu to set the visual scale of your drawing to fit on the specified paper size for plotting or printing You may specify the drafting scale such as 1 100 or 1cm 1m for 1 centimeter to represent 1 meter If you are not concerned about scale and you only want the final geometry to fit on the selected paper size you can specify Fit to adjust the geometry automatically to the paper size 7 Dimension the part and add text 8 Import a standard drawing format with the Import command in the File menu from the Layout folder 9 With the Preview L
245. hen the corner point of the rectangle You can create a copy of the last rectangle by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and clicking where you want the center point A default 1 inch square is drawn if you have not previously drawn a rectangle X Y Angle Length Width The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center point as well as the angle length and height of the rectangle Length is the selected status box If you modify the Angle in the status line the rectangle is rotated around its center point when you press the Enter key Rectangle 3 Corners This tool draws a rectangle as a single object specified by the 3 corners of the rectangle you indicate Using the Rectangle 3 Corners e Indicate 3 corners of the rectangle The third point defines the distance from the Or axis defined by the two o Drag the mouse from the first corner to the second corner and click corner points then the hird corner specifying the distance to the before defined axis You can create a copy of the last rectangle by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and clicking where you want the first corner of the rectangle A default 1 inch square is drawn if you have not previously drawn a rectangle X Y Angle Length Width The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the first corne
246. hen the mouse button is released Visible Lines analytical For the view mode Visible Lines analytical all model edges are recalculated as NURB Splines This precise vectorized model representation takes longer than the pixel representation of visible edges For the representation of the calculated NURB Splines the following setting are possible Visible Lines analytical Line Color In this Pop up Menu you can specify a line color for all vzszble edges Line Width In this Pop up Menu you can specify a line width for all vzszble edges Show Hidden Lines Hidden Line Type In this Pop up Menu you can specify a line type for all visible edges Perspective View In DraftBoard surfaced models can be displayed in a perspective view using the Perspective on off command in the Views menu The settings for this perspective view can be modified with the Perspective Edit command in the Views menu Perspective on off This command in the Views menu switches the perspective on or off A checkmark will appear to the left of the name when the Perspective is activated Perspective View activated 292 3D Surfaces The Perspective on off command is a toggle switch that can be used only with the view modes Shaded and Visible Lines Perspective viewing is not available in the Wireframe view mode The default settings of the perspective can be modified with the Perspective Edit command in the Views menu Perspective Edit The Perspe
247. hickness you specify in the status line The position of the automatic wall depends on your last activity If the second wall is on the wrong side of the construction line press the Shift key to flip It a A A A EO Tehn Using the Smart Wall tool 1 Select the Smart Wall tool 2 In the status line specify the thickness T of the wall 3 Click or drag to indicate the ends of the wall segment You can press the Shift key to flip the wall to the opposite side 4 Continue specifying both endpoints for wall segments as needed If you delete a merged segment the remaining walls redraw T X Y A The status line allows you to specify thickness of the wall the X Y Z coordinates of the beginning point the wall length and the angle from horizontal Once the wall segment is created wall Length is the selected status box Wall symbols Parametrized symbols with an underlying wall segment like the door symbols you find in the Architect Library will automatically cut wall segments where they are placed When you move the symbol along the Creating Geometry The second method allows you to control the direction of the offset by entering or in front of the indicated values Entering offsets the object to the right or downwards on the screen entering to the left or upwards Automatic trimming of smart walls occurs only when the walls are on the same layer If you want to fillet o
248. howing the values of the current view on the screen 4 Click the OK button The Redefine View dialog box is closed and the selected view is redefined or a new view is created with the name View 1 that can be renamed using the Rename button By definition 1 Select the Define View command in the Views menu The Define View dialog box is displayed 2 Select a view and click the Redefine button if you want to redefine the view with the current values or click the New but ton if you want to create a new view based on the current values The Redefine View dialog box is displayed The Normal Line of Sight specification is highlighted 3 Drag a vector with the mouse to indicate the Normal Line of Sight The Up entry boxes become selected 4 Drag a vector with the mouse to indicate the Up direction of the Sight 5 Click the OK button The Redefine View dialog box is closed and the selected view is redefined or a new view 1s created with the name View 1 that can be renamed using the Rename button Designing in multiple Views As soon as you place any detail view you can only change the view ori entation within a view window but not the view orientation of the sheet that is then rigidly fixed in the Top view Therefore it makes sense to design three dimensional models using multiple view win dows that allow you to view the geometry from different view angles simultaneously i a PE FE gt
249. i brary the path of the sym bol saved in the corre sponding vib file If no path exists the Symbolman ager search the symbol in the folder of the vib file 229 Symbols 230 2 gt SymbolManager t Symbol Preview Libraries Bearings Library List Symbole Roller thrust bearing DIN 711 List of available Annular ball bearing DIN 625 single row Annular contact ball bearing DIN 628 Sees the Cylindrical ball bearing DIN 5412 selected brary Variables Entry field for all definedsymbol variables and attributes of the selected Norm Part t List of available Norm Parts Offset entry fields for Angle and Length Keep Layer Structure Option buttons for O Edit Editing and Placing gt Set symbols The Symbolmanager allows the following settings Preview window Library list Symbols Parameter Variables A Angle L Length Keep Layer Structure Edit Set The Preview window displays a picture of the selected symbol This list field displays all available libraries This list field displays all symbols of the se lected library This list field shows all Norm parts of the se lected symbol if an underlying value table ex ists This list field displays all variables of the Norm part selected in the Parameter list All values of these variables can be modified When you want to place a symbol offset to the first location you click on the drawing area
250. ialog box that you can open in the Symbols dialog box LISTBOX 80 140 356 358 Palettes This section contains all palettes available in DraftBoard Behind each palette name the position of the palette is specified and in a sec ond section if the palette is visible or not true False Misc 190 80 Windows 100 275 Drawing 130 275 Bom 30 350 Dimension 10 345 Functions 30 440 MiscVisible false WindowsVisible false DrawingVisible false BomVisible true DimensionVisible false FunctionsVisible false 311 Customer Services Thank You for joining the world of DraftBoard Please take your time and read the following lines carefully They contain important informations concerning support and customer services Registration By registering your new software you ll receive e The right to Updates and Upgrades e Replacement of damaged media e Notification of product updates upgrade and new products Filling out and returning the registration card is a painless process Don t forget to enter the name of the respective user even if the soft ware is registered to a company Media Replacement If your product is defective or damaged all defective or damaged media will be replaced at no cost during the 3 month warranty period Updates and Upgrades As registered user you will be notified of product updates upgrade and new products e Updates When we make minor improvements to a product we will release an updated
251. ible at a time the active sheet You activate a sheet with the Current command in the Sheets dialog box in the Views menu If you have multiple sheets imagine them arranged as a stack of sheets behind your computer screen If you make a sheet current you bring it to the front That is why you can see only one sheet at a time the current sheet Multiple sheets are stacked behind the screen The current sheet is always in front and the only visible one Using Sheets Sheets ate DraftBoard s equivalent to pieces of paper you use with a drawing board Every document contains automatically Sheet 1 Sheets This command in the Views menu allows you to create delete rename sheets and set the work sheet The checkmark Y in the list of sheets indicates the work or current sheet E Sheets v Sheet 1 an Rename You may want to use several sheets to create related components and associated detail views With the drafting board you use a new sheet of paper for a project with DraftBoard you create a new sheet Creating a new sheet Click New to create another sheet You can name the sheet by typing the name in the Rename entry box and clicking the Rename button Renaming a sheet 1 Select the name of the sheet from the list box 2 Type the new name 3 Click the Rename button A check mark by a Layer Group shows the active Layer Group and indicates that the current settings in the La
252. ide Bars for Red Green and Blue The specified color is displayed in the New box below the Original box and its color values are displayed in the boxes for the colors Red Green and Blue 7 Click the OK button The Apple HSL Color wheel or the Apple RGB Color display depending which system was displayed will be closed and you are you are returned to the Define Colors dialog box 8 Click the Use button in the Define Colors dialog box An icon of an eye will appear indicating that the color will be visible now in the DraftBoard Color Palette The new color name remains in the color list in the position you placed it since the color names are not alphabetized 9 Close the Define Color dialog box Saving user defined colors User defined colors are automatically saved with the drawing as soon as you save the drawing using the Save command from the File menu To save user defined colors permanently choose the Save Preferences command from the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu Arranging the color palette All user defined colors are automatically displayed in the DraftBoard Color Palette when an eye symbol is displayed in front of the color name in the Define Color dialog box If there are any undefined colors between the last predefined color Color lt 64 gt and the last user defined color all these undefined colors are shown in the color palette by a cross If you want to have a continuous color palette you must d
253. ilities menu Enter a Key short cut in the Key entry field Click in the Key entry box and enter the key combination or type it directly in the Key entry field Close the Macro dialog box by clicking the Close box in the upper left corner of the dialog box 61 Setting the Environment Editing a Macro 1 Display the Macro dialog box 2 Select a Macro in the Names list box 3 Rename the Macro in the Rename entry box and click the Rename button 4 Redefine the Macro by executing menu items and assigning a new stroke equivalent to the macro 5 Alter the Macro key combination in the Key entry box 6 Close the Macro dialog box by clicking the Close box in the upper left corner of the dialog box Removing a Macro 1 Display the Macro dialog box 2 Select a Macro in the Names list box 3 Click the Remove button Running a Macro Each Macro has a unique name and can be run in one of four ways 1 It can be invoked with a Control key combination Subsequent typing of that Control key combination will cause the associated macro to run 2 A macro can be invoked by a family of stroke commands you defined in the Macro dialog box 3 You can select the macro in the Extras menu if you marked the option In Extras Menu in the Macro dialog box 4 You can display the Macro dialog box select a macro in the Names list box and click the Run button Executing a macro with the Run button is useful for testing a macro Sh
254. im Lines button the following dialog box is displayed Dimension Lines Dimension Line O ar Witness Lines Weigh The Dimension Lines dialog box allows the following settings Witness lines Color Weight OK The Dimension line options allow you to choose whether the witness lines are connected by a dimension line DIN or not for all dimension text that is not placed between witness lines In this pop up menu you select the number of witness lines eft side right side both sides or no witness lines In this pop up menu you select the color for the dimension lines In this pop up menu you select the 2ne weight for dimension lines You can choose from the same ine weights offered in the Weight submenu of the Pen menu When you click the OK button the Dimension Lines dialog box is closed and all settings are assigned to the current standard Modifying dimension lines 1 Select all dimensions you want to modify If no dimensions are selected all changes are valid only for future dimensions Choose Preferences in the Dimension menu to display the Dimension Editor Drag in the Standard pop up menu to the standard you want to modify Click the DIM Lines button in the dimension editor The Dimension Lines dialog box is displayed Select the all options you want to set for dimension lines Click OK The Dimension Lines dialog box is closed Click the Apply button if you w
255. imensions When you bring in a parameterized part with the Import command the geometry is drawn as you specify but the dimensions display the variables and expressions which defined them as symbols You can change the dimensions to be associative so that they reflect the actual measurements of the geometty even if you change the geometty 1 Select the dimensions 2 Choose Edit Objects from the Edit menu GD amp T GDET stands for Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing a DIN ISO 1101 and a U S government standard Since this annotation may be new to you this section is an overview of GDGT standards and includes a brief explanation of the components of a GDET abel using the true position of holes as an example Background Before World War II a single vendor did most military manufacturing However during the war it became a matter of national security to diversify weapons manufacturing so a single plant was not the only source of a vital part When more than one manufacturer interpreted specifications and blueprints difficulties arose When several companies manufacture the same part each must drill holes within the same tolerance for the parts to be interchangeable Even though manufacturers thought they were following the tolerance specifications the parts were not interchangeable The problem arose from the order in which measurements were made Alignment Information A part was usually laid on a flat surface A and a
256. imensions and tolerances in the corresponding pop up menus 3 Click the Apply button The specified precisions are valid for all selected and all future You can save the selected dimensions until the end of the current DraftBoard session precision permanently with the Save Preferences command from the Dimension Formats Preferences submenu of Dimension formats including tolerance formats can be specified in the the Layout menu main window of the Dimension Editor Format Linear im Angular 10 Arrows Lay Dimension rd Ll 09 10 10 10 inch mm Adding Tolerance Formats 1 Choose Preferences in the Dimension menu The Dimension Editor is displayed 2 Select Dimension formats for linear and angular dimensions The illustration below shows the appearance of each Dimension format for linear dimensions if you entered the limits shown in the status line 1 391 7 1 394 1 390 yyy XXX XXX limits 1 3914 003 fro 1 391 za GD amp T Dimensions use the C e en on 003 139001 fig 1 391 gt xxx upper lower scale 1 394 1 390 The illustration below shows the appearance of each tolerance format for angular dimensions if you entered the limits shown in the status line 127 Dimensions GD amp T Dimensions use the GD amp T Format The default value for the DIN standard is 70 of the dimension text size You must press the Enter key to activate the ent
257. ing a specified view to the back 1 Select the view 2 Choose Send To Back from the Views pull down menu This counteracts the Auto Front command so when you click you activate another view rather than selecting objects Auto Front The Auto Front command in the Views menu overrides the Bring To Front or Send To Back settings When this setting is in effect you can simply click on a view to bring it to the front and make it active Handling overlapping views The view control commands in the Views menu allow you to control the active view When you have overlapping views you can think of them as a stack where only the top view can be active If the Auto Front command is turned on and you click a view it comes to the top of the stack and you can work in it This may cause some problems when you click an object in the top view to select it but an underlying view is activated instead To remedy this situation turn off the Auto Front command Select the view you want to work in and choose Bring To Front from the Views menu The objects in the view you brought to the front remain on top even when you click a different view visible in the top view s space Draw View Boundaries This command in the Views menu shows the boundaries of all inactive views This boundary will be printed if you leave it displayed when you choose the Print command If you want to print the view without boundaries deactivate Draw View Boundaries in the Vie
258. ing its handle or by typing in a value in the Dash Length entry box Add a new Dashes by clicking the Add button or remove dashes by selecting its handle and clicking the Remove button When the pattern element is properly defined click OK All existing lines drawn in the line pattern you edited will be changed to reflect the new pattern element as will all future lines drawn in the line pattern Clicking Cancel ignores the all changes made to any pattern elements and closes the Edit Pattern dialog box Undoing a Pattern Edit 1 Click the Revert button in the Edit Pattern dialog box A message is displayed warning you that clicking Revert changes all the line patterns back to their defaults not just the pattern selected from the Edit Pattern pull down list Click the Yes button AU of the patterns are changed back to DraftBoard s original settings Pen Styles The following styles are the default settings of those pens that are available in the Pen menu Outline Pattern Solid Weight 0 35 mm Color Black This is the default pen setting Visible Pattern Solid Weight 0 5 mm Color Black AA Pattern Hidden Weight 0 35 mm Color Red Hidden lines are actually visible on the screen and in your drawing they represent lines that would be hidden in a solid object Dash ee es ss ees es aM Pattern Dashed Weight 0 35 mm Color Yellow Center Ez AA ee ee Pattern Center Weight 0 35 mm Col
259. ingers are curled Axis of Rotation Direction of Rotation Rotating Objects In DraftBoard you can not only rotate the view orientation to view the geometry from any angle but also objects in relation to other objects Object Rotation The Object Rotation command in the 3D menu allows you to rotate geometry around any axis you specify The Object Rotation command displays the following dialog box Object Rotation Rotate Angle Origin X y 0 000 z O Copy Cancer Carpa Cox The Object Rotation dialog box contains the following elements Rotate Angle In this field you specify the angle you want to rotate the geometry Origin In these entry fields you enter the coordinates for the Startpoint of the Rotation axis Axis In these entry fields you enter the coordinates for the Endpoint of the Rotation axis Copy When you select this option a copy of the geometry will be rotated Apply When you click the Apply button the geometry will be rotated as specified and you can select another object for next object rotation Rotating objects With the Object Rotation command you rotate geometry in relation to other objects 1 Select the geometry you want to rotate 2 Choose the Object Rotation command from the 3D menu The Object Rotation dialog box is displayed 3 Enter the angle you want to rotate the geometry into the Rotate Angle data field 4 Click the Origin Startpoin t of the rotation
260. ins boxes giving information about the current construction For example when the Single or Connected Line tool is the current tool the Status Line contains boxes for the x y and x coordinates of the beginning point and the x y and z values for the endpoint of the line It also contains the value of the ength and angle of the line x 7703 Jv Fizoss__J z h000_Jex s3266 Jdvrfos5s Jaz omo_ Misezes w 8 2142 You can use the Status Line in three ways e To create an object with keyboard entries only e To edit an object that was just created and is still selected e To create an additional object using the current tool Whenever you construct an object the status box containing the specification that you are most likely to change is selected the box is highlighted For example when you draw a line with the Single Line tool the Length box is highlighted so you can enter a value for the length Just type a value When you press Enter the line is redrawn at the new length Using the Status Line If you want to make an entry in a different status box you can use one of four selection methods e Press the Tab key to cycle the selection highlight through the status boxes from left to right e Click inside the status box and the pointer becomes an I beam text cursor e Click the box label to select the entire contents of the box e Double click inside the status box to select the entire contents of the box Using t
261. ion dx vo Ih Cancel The Extrude dialog box contains the following elements As default the xand y are Direction In the entry fields dx dy and dz you specify the on the current work plane number of units for the Height of the 2D object and ane Ge delo cocida the Direction x y or z axis in which the 2D object is that plane In the Top view the positive z axis is ex to be extruded tending toward you the You can enter either positive or negative numbers to negative z axis away from qe l ga indicate the units and direction or you can drag the you with the screen as origin This is not neces mouse to specify the distance and direction of the sary relative to the original extrusion x y and z axis that were used when the geometry Extrude When you select this option the 2D geometry is sur was constructed Therefore Surface faced the same time is extruded you should always align the current work plane with that side of the object you want to be extruded Important It is possible to indicate the extrusion values by dragging a vector on the drawing sheet in an Isometric or Trimetric view Therefore you should always switch to one of these views before extruding any 2D object Don t forget that the extrusion angle between the extrusion vector and the current work plane must be always greater O Extruding objects To create the following bracket by extruding a basic 2D shape you have to proceed as follow
262. ion 13 or higher For all previous versions NURB Splines ate approximated by line segments NURB Surfaces are exported as Meshes trian gulized surfaces using AutoCAD Version 13 or higher All previous versions don t accept NURB Surfaces Smart walls will be represented by simple lines Multi line text in a text frame is exported as separate text lines Tolerances are exported using AutoCAD Version 13 or higher In all previous versions tolerances will go lost but the dimensions are maintained Since AutoCAD supports only one Modelspace only one model can be exported from Draft Board into AutoCAD If in DraftBoard 2 or more models are displayed in detail views on the current sheet all views must be exported This will be automatically checked when exporting DWG DXF Files IGES The crosshatching is converted to symbol representation The view is lost but the dimensions and text are retained The leader style may change Fonts are not maintained The feature control frame is converted to a group of non GD amp T geometry The Surface symbol is converted to symbol representation The Welding symbol is converted to symbol representation The geometry is retained but it is no longer grouped The layers are lost but the geometry is retained The geometry is retained but it is no longer locked Each sheet must be exported individually The leader style may change The double lines are converted to
263. ion Tool This tool creates a vertical base chain dimension displaying the rising distance between objects and spaces to a base point When the dimension text appears you can drag it to a new location when you release the mouse button the dimension and extension lines are redrawn Oblique Dimension Tools 319512 These tools measure space or objects obliquely from point to point Oblique Dimension Tool 4 This tool dimensions an object or space from point to point obliquely Click the left point first then click the right Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display below the objects j When the dimension text appears you can drag it to a new location when you release the mouse button the dimension and extension lines are redrawn Oblique Base Line Dimension Tool This tool dimensions objects and spaces point to point obliquely from a base point Note The results shown reflect colinear dimension points EN 122 ee Oblique Chain Dimension Tool This tool dimensions objects and spaces oblique point to point Note The results shown end to end reflect colinear dimension points Lines are colinear if they have a common invisi ble carrier line DraftBoard can recognize colinear lines only if they touch at least in one endpoint gt gt 121 Dimensions Note Be certain that you click on the base line not on the endpoint of the base
264. ion key and clicking where you want the center Y L1 A1 L2 A2 90 The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center point and the ength and angle of the semimajor and semiminor axes of the ellipse Creating Geometry Opposite Corner Ellipse Tool This tool draws an ellipse inscribed in the rectangle specified by the Opposite corners you indicate Using the Opposite Corner Ellipse tool 1 Indicate one corner of the rectangle defining the ellipse 2 Indicate the opposite corner of the defining rectangle If the two points are on the vertical or horizontal axis a straight line is drawn You can create a copy of the last ellipse by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and clicking where you want the lower left point Y L1 A1 L2 A2 90 The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the lower left point and the ength and angle of the major and minor axes of the ellipse 3 Point Center Ellipse Tool This tool constructs an ellipse inscribed within the parallelogram calculated from three specified points the center point the midpoint of a side and a corner of the parallelogram Using the 3 Point Center Ellipse tool 1 Indicate the center of the ellipse 2 Indicate the midpoint of the side of the rectangle defining the ellipse 3 Indicate the corner of the rect
265. ions Steps 4 and 5 must be done in order If you change the entry in the text box and then press Enter you can no longer move the dimension because it will no longer be selected If you have this problem select the dimension and drag it to the location you want See as well Tolerances in this chapter For the DIN Standard the Dimension layer is the de fault layer 118 Dimensioning objects and space 1 If necessary display the dimension palette 2 Select the appropriate dimension tool The dimension pointer is a smart pointer with a hof spot the dot shows which side of the object to select first If you select as indicated by the position of the dot the text appears above or to the right of the leader If you select in the opposite order the text appears below or to the left of the leader 3 Click the points you want to measure All settings for dimensions can be set in the dimension editor under Preferences in the Dimension menu 4 Move the dimension to a new location if its placement is not where you want it oi If you are planning to use the dimension with Parametrics change the entry in the text box on the status line Repositioning the dimension When the dimension text appears it is selected so that you can move it to a new location Move the pointer to the dimension text When the pointer changes to the Move symbol drag the dimension to its new location If you want to move a dimension l
266. irection the dynamic construction lines will appear The figure below illustrates a 45 on X align 45 Displaying dynamic construction lines while constructing geometry 1 Click a point to begin new geometry 2 Move the pointer horizontally or vertically A construction line appears through the point 3 While the construction line is visible and the Drawing Assistant displays on click the next point The point is placed exactly on the construction line even though the pointer wasn t exactly on that line when you clicked The dynamic construction line disappears Displaying dynamic construction lines with existing geometry You can have as many as 1 Without pressing the mouse button move the pointer over an eight active points acti vating the ninth point in a f i caes dan ales te The point notation endpoint or midpoint for example shows first point that the point is active existing point 38 2 Move the pointer away from the point horizontally vertically or at a 45 angle A construction line through the point is visible 3 While the construction line is visible and the Drawing Assistant displays on click the desired point in the construction The point is placed exactly on the construction line even though the pointer wasn t exactly om that line when you clicked The dynamic construction line disappears The figure below illustrates intersecting construction lines drawn
267. is closed 6 Edit the symbol values if desired Symbols 7 Drag a vector on the drawing area for the nsertion point and the Orientation of the symbol In the Symbol dialog box a black triangle indicates the Insertion Point of the symbol 8 Click OK If no Insertion Point was specified when the symbol was Created the most left construction point of the symbol is grouped and selected symbol will be automatical ly used as insertion point The geometry resolves and appears in the current drawing at the location you clicked and sized as you specified The inserted Placing a symbol with its parametric dimension If you want to bring a symbol including its parametric dimensions Standard non parametric into the current document you must use the Import command in the dimensions are always placed with the symbol and File menu The symbol is placed at its original size in the current must not be imported document If you select the symbol including its dimensions you can resolve it using the Resolve command from the Parametrics submenu in the Edit menu Editing parametric Symbols If you want to edit parametric Symbols you must use the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu Symbol Libraries In addition to the symbol libraries shipping with the DraftBoard you can create your own libraries using the Libraries command from the Symbols submenu in the File menu Libraries This command allows to configure symbol librari
268. is will be ignored and a two dimensional curve will be calculated for the x y plane When this option is activated you can choose if the calculated curve points should be con nected with a Spline or Line segments Plot Creating Geometry When you click the Plot button the curve will be calculated for the specified parameters and will be automatically plotted on the drawing area as a 5p ne or as Line segments Plotting a Helix In the following example we will calculate and plot a helix for a screw thread The radius should be 20 mm the pitch of the screw thread 2 mm and the number of threads 4 1 Choose the Function param command from the Modules menu The Function param dialog box is displayed Enter the formula sin t 20 into the x entry box in which 20 equals the radius of 20 mm Enter the formula sin t 20 into the y entry box in which 20 equals the radius of 20 mm Enter the formula 2 t 2 PI into the z entry field in which the first value 2 equals the pitch of the screw thread of 2 mm Enter the value 0 into the Start x entry field Enter the formula 4 2 PI into the End entry field in which the value 4 equals the number threads Enter the formula 4 8 into the Steps entry field in which the value 4 equals the number threads Select the option Connect points and the option Splines Click the Plot button Since the initial pitch of the thread is calculated depending on the
269. isible attributes listed in the Define Attributes dialog box Visible attributes are indicated by a checkmark Therefore the Define Attributes dialog box should be displayed when defining a layout z Define Attributes Y Standard 2 New EA New ateria Z Quantity im Y Serial Nr Rename 2 Attribute Name Layout i aS Li tes Attribute Value Wedge Layout Standard Defining in new layout 1 Choose the Attribute command from the BOM submenu in the Layout menu The Define Layouts dialog box appears 2 Define all the attributes you want to use in different layouts 3 Make all the attributes visible that you want to save under one layout name 4 Choose the Layout command from the BOM submenu in the Layout menu The Define Layouts dialog box appears Click the New button Rename the layout in the Layout Name entry box Click the Rename button Click Set Work The new layout is now the current layout POCA N In the Define Attributes dialog box the name of the current layout is displayed in the lower left corner of the dialog box 2 Define Layouts Standard New Teen Name Attribute Value Rename Wedge Layout Standard Current Layout 9 Click in the title bar of the Define Attribute dialog box to activat
270. it dialog box is displayed 3 Substitute the default value 25 for the Focal Distance by the val ue 200 The model is displayed in a smaller perspective angle but larger due to zoom factor used 4 Reduce the model using the Zoom Out tool from the Tool palette until the model fills the screen Illumination For the visualization of surfaced objects you can either use the default light setting or specify and place you own light sources Default Lighting The Default Lighting consists of a single Ambient Light and two Parallel Lights and is set automatically for all new drawings It cannot be modified since the corresponding light sources are not placed as objects in the drawing but it can be deactivated using the Visualization command from the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu Besides the Default Lighting DraftBoard offers three types of light sources for setting the illumination 293 3D Surfaces The distance between the illuminated object and the parallel light source is unimportant Crucial is only the direction of the light source 294 Ambient Light This light source provides a uniform illumination on all sides of your geometry Point Light This light source provides a more directed illumination Parallel Light This light source allows in contrast to the other two light sources to specify the ocation and the direction The Parallel light source provides a linear type of illumination similar to what a f
271. it the paper you will use The true size of all objects saved in the DraftBoard Database is never affected by scaling DraftBoard saves all objects at their true measurements regardless of e which drawing scale you specify with the Drawing Size or the Sheet Into View command what extend you magnified the drawing with the Zoom commands 151 Basic Drafting Zoom All magnifies or reduces all objects on your drawing to fill the screen regardless of how big or small the objects are In case your printer is not listed in the list of available printers you must first install your printer under Windows A detailed description how to install a printer under Windows can be found in the Windows Reference Manual 152 With these commands you only change the visual size of the objects on the screen or on the paper but never its true size saved in the DraftBoard database In this way the part dimensions to its true to life measurements regardless how they are displayed on the screen or printed on the paper Drawing at full scale has the following advantages e scaling mistakes are eliminated e dimensions are automatic you must dimension manually if you do not draw at full scale associative dimensions update when the object is edited manual dimensions do not e the size relationship of imported parts is compatible e calculations for 2D analysis are accurate Creating and editing objects at full size When
272. k near the circle If you click outside the circle the di mension text appears outside and if you click inside it appears inside 838 Y 838 When the dimension appears the leader line is placed at the nearest 15 increment from the location you clicked You can drag the text to a new location Diametral Double Arrowhead Dimension Tool This tool measures the diameter of a circle To dimension the diameter of a citcle click near the circle If you click outside the circle the dimension appears outside and if you click inside it appears inside 0 838 0 838 When the dimension appears the leader line is placed at the nearest 15 increment from the location you clicked You can drag the text to a new location Angular Dimension Tool This tool measures the angle between two lines To dimension an angle click each line near the endpoint from which you want the angle measured The inside angle is measured between the sides with the extension lines extending from the endpoints nearest the location you clicked on the line The smaller angle is used The angle between the endpoints of the lines is measured so you do not have to click these endpoints just near them DraftBoard intet prets all mouse clicks left of the line midpoint as the left endpoint and all mouse clicks right of the line midpoint as the right endpoint midpoint left endpoint right endpoint lt gt Clicking here means left Clicking here means
273. k with your local distributor can lluminate using different light surface to understand about how the Autosurfacing routine works You need to know what to expect and you will need to pay a little bit more attention to the detail of how you construct your 3D wireframe models Construction Rules The automatic calculation of NURB Surfaces is done with the Auto Surface command in the 3D menu For the successful creation of NURB Surfaces you must observe some rules while constructing 3D wireframe geometry you want to autosurface Surface Types The Auto Surface mode distinguishes between several type of sutfaces Structured Surfaces The Auto Surface command always creates Structured Surfaces This is a grouped entity composed of the calculated NURB Surfaces displayed as a wireframe mesh and the original wireframe geometry In other words a Structured Surface consists always of the original wireframe geometry plus the calculated NURB Surfaces Structured Surface Auto Surface wireframe geometry original wireframe geometry NURB Surfaces NURB Surfaces Auto Surface creates always NURB Surfaces that are defined by NURB Splines even they ate planar surfaces Untrimmed NURB Surfaces a i Splinekurven Shaded view mode Wireframe view mode Trimmed NURB Surfaces ate called trimmed NURB Surfaces Surfaces whenever they are curved or their boundaries are trimmed for example by a hole Trimmed NURB S
274. ke a while when you open a symbol with an underlying value table for the first time since DraftBoard has to convert the ASCII table in an own format with the file extension var 225 Symbols If you want to enlarge part of the displayed symbol bring the mouse pointer over the area of interest and press the left mouse button As long as you keep the mouse button pressed the clicked area will be magnified When you want to indicate a layer in the Symbols dialog box where the symbol should go you must define the attribute Layer for the symbol using the Define Attributes The Parameter button is only active when a under lying value table exists 226 Placing Symbols The submenu Symbols in the File menu contains the two commands for placing symbols Insert and Symbolmanager The Insert command allows to place any DraftBoard drawing and any norm part as a symbol Whereas the Symbolmanager command allows only to place and edit symbols from Symbol libraries that were configured with the Libraries command or imported as Symbol libraries See as well under Symbol libraries at the end of this section Insert Choosing this command from the Symbols submenu in the File menu displays the following dialog box C Chap 13 Symbols Para 1 VLM Keep Layer Structure 3 7 Parameter i The Symbols dialog box allows the following settings Preview window The Preview window shows a picture o
275. king with multiple objects select each one individually and autosurface them one at a time for best results Calculating Surfaces When you have constructed a wireframe model according to the rules described in the section above you can surface the part automatically using the Auto Surface command in the 3D menu The Autosurface feature is a unique technology of DraftBoard that you don t find in any other CAD software With a simple mouse click DraftBoard takes your wireframe geometry and surfaces it Auto Surface The AutoSurface command in the 3D menu calculates automatically for a wireframe model a surfaced object that can be exported as a Surface or Volume model You only must select the wireframe geometry and select then the AutoSurface command from the 3D menu It doesn t matter if the wireframe geometry is selected on the drawing sheet or in a detail view 3D Planes gt Define Plane Set Origin 3 Point Plane Set Plane to Screen Show Triad Show Light Palette Object Rotation Extrude Revolve Auto Surface When the surface calculation is finished the resulting surfaces are represented by a wireframe surface mesh The structured surfaces are grouped an can be edited as one single object Auto Surface The Sructured Surface consists of the original wireframe geometry plus the calculated NURB Surfaces If you ungroup any structured surface it is dissolved into the NURB Surfaces and the
276. l This tool divides a line or curve at intersections with other lines or curves Segmenting an object 1 Select the objects that limit the segmentation 2 Select the Segment tool If necessary use Shift Click to select more boundary objects 3 Click the object to be segmented The selected object is segmented at the boundary objects Even though you can not see the segmentation on the screen you can select parts of the segmented line by clicking If you hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while selecting the line to be segmented the new segment appears in the characteris tics of the current pen style There are no status line entries Editing objects Rule Point to what you want to throw away Rule Point to what you want to keep In order to see the segmen tation on the screen first select the boundaries and the object you want to seg ment and then Show points in the Layout menu After the segmentation the endpoints of the segmented parts are displayed 83 Editing objects How to enlarge or shrink an object with the Move tool is described under Sizing objects with Tools in this chapter A positive or negative value entered in the status line determines the direction along the X or Y axis A negative value moves the object to the left or down on the screen A positive value to the right or up 84 Corner Trim Tool This tool creates a corner from the two objects you specify Line
277. l Views or Models as the drawing you used the Save Preferences command with Therefore check regularly your Preference File It should contain per default 1 Sheet 1 Model no Detail View and 4 Lay ers Layer 1 Construction Kinematic and Dimension The Save Preferences command saves as well 3D Parameters that are dis cussed in detail in the 3D Part of this manual 59 Setting the Environment Floating Tool Palette DraftBoard s standard Tool palette is fixed at the left side of the DraftBoard window But you may display an additional Floating Tool Palette which you can drag and place anywhere on the screen Displaying the Floating Tool Palette 1 Press and hold the Control and Shift keys Macintosh Command key 2 Depress the mouse button and drag the mouse pointer first down and then up _ Drag the pointer first down then up 3 Release the Ctrl and Shift keys Macintosh Command key The Floating Tool Palette is displayed You can close the Floating Tool Palette by clicking the Close box in the upper left corner of the Floating Tool Palette Macros The Macro capability of DraftBoard allows you to create macros and access them through menu commands stroke commands ot key combina tions providing an alternative way to invoke DraftBoard commands A macro automates a repetitive task by executing a group of simple commands If you can point and click you can define a macro That s how easy it is
278. l return you to the Edit Pattern dialog box without returning any patterns back to their original settings OK When you click OK all existing lines drawn in the line pattern you edited will be changed to reflect the new pattern element as will all future lines drawn in the line pattern 53 Setting the Environment Edited Patterns are affect only the patterns in the current file To save the edited pattern so that it is available in all future files choose the Save Preferences com mand from the Preferenc es submenu of the Lay out menu You cannot undo a pattern edit with the Undo command in the Edit menu Clicking No will return you to the Edit Pattern dialog box without returning any patterns back to their origi nal settings The Construction line style doesn t create dynamic or permanent Construction Lines This line style uses the same line pattern but is not automatically placed on the Construction layer and can t be deleted with the Delete Constructions command from the Layout menu 54 Cancel Clicking Cancel ignores the all changes made to any pattern elements and closes the Edit Pattern dialog box Editing a Line Pattern 1 Choose Edit Pattern from the Pattern submenu of the Pen menu The Edit Pattern dialog box appears Select the line pattern you want to change from the Edit Pattern pull down list Modify the line pattern by changing the lengths of existing Dashes either by dragg
279. l by importing a Standard Drawing Format or by loading a Standard Drawing Format with one or more views using the Sheet into View command Placing a 3D Object in a Standard Drawing Format 1 Create the 3D Object on the Sheet or using a View Layout with one As soon as you place a detail view windows on the sheet the Sheet View is 2 Import a Standard Drawing Format from the Layouts folder in the fixed in the Top view while DraftBoard folder using the Import command in the File menu the detail views can display different view orientations of your geometry the drawing format is imported at its original size How to import a drawing format is described in Chapter 9 Basic Drafting or more views Mark the option unscaled in the Import Option dialog box so 3 Align the geometry within the view windows and the view win dows within the drawing format according to the standard draw ing rules 4 Flatten a view in case you want to edit the geometry in that view window without modifying the geometry in the other view windows 5 Dimension the geometry on the sheet or in the view windows Since each view is associated with the model all changes made in one view will be reflected in the other views The same is not true for Text Dimensions Crosshatching and Fills Creating a 2D Drafting using the Sheet into View command 1 Create the 3D Model on the Sheet 2 Load a Standard Drawing Format with one or more views using the
280. lar or tangent you can then drag the line around the arc to the location you want and extend the line to the length you want Creating a point You can create a point by creating a line and setting its length to zero Set the starting point of the line with the mouse then type 0 in the Length entry field of the status line and press the Enter key The line point displays a to indicate its location You can also double click the Single Line the Center Point Circle or the Opposite Point Circle tool in the same spot to create a point These points can be selected and deleted as any other point These points that are displayed by a on the screen are printed as points Connected Lines Tool This tool draws lines in which the endpoint of one line segment is the beginning point of the next Using the Connected Lines tool 1 Click or drag to indicate the endpoints of the line segments If you click a point and then change your mind press the Escape key to remove the last line Pressing the Delete or Backspace key ot choosing Undo removes all connected lines in the current construction 2 Indicate the last point by double clicking or by choosing another tool If you want to create a connecting arc between two points rather than a line hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and then click the endpoint of the segment You must have constructed one line segment before you can use the arc function x Y dX dY A
281. ld be checked 4 units from the actual hole The GD amp T Label Feature control frames are created with GD amp T command in the Dimension menu GD amp T This command in the Dimension menu creates a label a feature control frame for showing dimensions alignment and tolerances The dialog box looks like a complex GD amp T symbol into which you may enter the information you need The GD amp T abe uses the plotter font so the font size corresponds to ANSI standards since the sizes of other fonts are not always con sistent with ANSI standards If you want the size of your dimensions to be the same as the font in a GD amp T abel you must select the dimen sions and change the font size or choose the plotter font The GD amp T dialog box resembles a GD amp T abel Geometric Characteristic Dimension Label Diameter Symbol Tolerance Value Material Condition Material Condition Datum Text DE Text Line1 y v KA Ju alla y Line2 _ IL 1 J I Proj A P Stand Alone Datum Pa l O Arrow Line O Witness Line Edit Datum Datum Text Datum Text Material Condition Tolerance Projection Zone Material Condition The square boxes are pop up menus from which you can select symbols You can use a single entry a line or a combination of lines as needed to specify the DET dimensions for your part Creating a GD
282. le contains several sections The following example explains the file structure describing a simple pattern at a specific angle i DraftBoard Definition Angle Hatch Pattern ANGLE Angle steel Ds 0 0 0 4275 27 2075 90 0 05 0 2273 277407 113 Text Fills and Hatches 114 Each file starts with a Comment line that is indicated by a semicolon before each comment All lines starting with a semicolon ate ignored by DraftBoard when interpreting the pattern description The Comment line is followed by the Header ine that starts with an asterisk followed by the pattern name and a pattern description Name and Description must be separated by a comma ot a space The Crosshatch dialog box of DraftBoard shows only the name not the description The name must be unique in the file If it isn t DraftBoard uses the first pattern it finds by that name The length of the Header line is limited to a maximum of 80 characters for Name Comma and Description The header line is followed by the Hatch data Every line of data uses the same format angle x origin y origin x offset y offset dashl Angle defines the angle that this line of hatch pattern data is displayed at O means that the hatch line is drawn hori zontally 90 means that the line is drawn vertically Comma separates the numbers x origin The first line of the hatch pattern passes through this x coordinate y origin The first line
283. le doesn t open correctly you should mark the options Onto Work Layer and Dimensions as Geometry in the Import dialog box and import the file again Importing ASCII text from another document 1 Choose Import from the File menu A dialog box appears similar to the Open dialog box Select the file name you want to import Click OK The Import dialog box is displayed If Text is not selected mark the Text option Click the OK button The text appears in a text box in the drawing Importing Splines When you import a text file that contains the coordinates for a spline DraftBoard will create the spline according to the imported coordinates 1 Select Import from the File menu A dialog box appears similar to the Open dialog box Select a text file that contains the coordinates for the spline The Import dialog box is displayed Specify the import option Spline Click the OK button DraftBoard begins creating the Spline Creating a text file for importing a spline 1 2 Use a text editor word processor or spreadsheet to create a text file Input X Y and Z values for your spline coordinates The text file should be tab or space separated Each line ends with a return Line feeds after each return should have no effect The text file should conform to the following columnar format 1 1 0 2 2 0 191 DraftBoard Documents You are allowed to specify decimal coordinates as well 1 33 1 1 0 2 4 2
284. lears 2 Click the Single Line tool again The X status box ts active showing that you can enter a value for the X coordinate of the beginning point of the line 3 Type 0 Note Do not press Enter until you reach step 10 4 Press the Tab key The Y box is highlighted 5 Type 0 6 Press the Tab key The dX box is highlighted The dX value is the delta X the nu meric difference between the beginning and ending X coordinate 7 Type 2 8 Press the Tab key The dY box is highlighted 9 Type 2 10 Press the Enter key The line is drawn Creating Geometry Offset from a Point If you want to create some geometry that is offset from an existing point you can use the Status Line to specify the offset Creating geometry offset from a point 1 Select the tool you want to use 2 Move the pointer over the contro point from which you want the offset 3 Click once to lock onto that point 4 Click in the appropriate X or Y box in the Status Line placing the text cursor at the end of the entry 5 Type the offset such as 3 and press Enter 6 Continue with your construction Drawing Tools The following section describes the drawing tools found on the Tool palette Line Tools The Line tools on the Tool palette create ine segments connected lines lines parallel to existing lines and smart walls As you create a line the coordinate locations line length and angle from horizontal ap
285. lect the plane you want to make the work plane in the Define Plane dialog box 2 Click the Set Work button Renaming a plane 1 Select in the plane you want to rename 2 Overwrite the name with anew name in the Rename box 3 Click the Rename button Locking Unlocking a plane 1 Select the plane you want to lock unlock in the Define Plane dialog box 2 Click the Lock icon to unlock the plane or in front of the name to lock the plane If the name was locked the Lock icon disappears if it was unlocked the lock icon is displayed in front of the name Deleting a plane Select the plane you want to delete in the Define Plane dialog box and click the Delete button New Redefine If you click the New or Refine button in the Define Plane dialog box the Redefine Plane dialog box is displayed 3D Modelling How to define a plane is described in the section New Redefine How to redefine a plane is described in the section New Redefine You can select the Work Plane also from the Planes submenu in the 3D menu You cannot rename the World Top plane all locked planes and the cur rent Work Plane You cannot delete the World Top plane all locked planes and the Work Plane You cannot edit the World Top plane all locked planes and the Work Plane 269 3D Modelling 270 Define Plane Enter values by typing or clicking the mouse in the drawing window The Redefine dialog box display
286. lette Assigning Attributes with the Attribute Tools The first tool in the BOM too palette contains the Attributes subpalette with the Attribute Selection tool and the Symbol Attribute tool With the attribute tools you assign attributes to object geometry or mark an object as a symbol When you select one of these tools all attributes of the current BOM layout will be displayed in the Status Line Numerical parametrical and hidden attributes are not displayed in the Status Line since their values will be not assigned but only extracted my Wedge Material Steel Quantity The attribute values shown in the Status Line can be entered or modified if they are not locked If they are locked the attribute has no entry box Attribute Selection Tool With this tool you can assign attributes of the current layout to a selected object Geometric Analysis Assigning attributes 1 Choose the Show Palette command from the BOM submenu in the Layout menu The BOM Too Palette dialog box is displayed 2 Select the Attribute Selection tool 3 Select with the Attribute Selection tool an object you want assign attributes to 4 Enter the desired values in the entry box in the Status Line Attribute values which are locked cannot be edited in the Status Line 5 Press the Enter key Macintosh Return key Important Note The attributes will be only assigned when you hit the Enter ke
287. ligned first with one straight edge B then with another C O O Surface A Side B Side C If one manufacturer aligned with edge B then edge C but another aligned with edge C then edge B the resulting measurements would probably be different The GDET Standards tell a manufacturer the order of alignment Bonus Tolerance In addition to the alignment information a manufacturer gets a bonus from GDET Tolerances In conventional drafting the tolerance for hole drilling results in a square target area For example examine the plate on the left below The positional tolerance for the hole is 001 The target area magnified and shown on the right is from 001 left of the perfect center to 001 right of the perfect center and 001 above the perfect center to 001 below the perfect center s ee 001 001 1 a A A 001 y 901 001 e GDET provides a circular target area for the hole First measure from the center in one direction by the distance of the tolerance then measure the same distance perpendicular to that point 7 001 L 001 T You can then use the distance from the endpoint of the second line to the perfect center as the radius of a circle to create a circular target the bonus tolerance Dimensions R 001414 A In that way the target area for the hole s center is the area circumscribing the square of standard dimensions The standard information basic dimensions
288. line When the dimension text appears you can drag itto a new location when you release the mouse but ton the dimension and ex tension lines are redrawn If you want to display the dimension number for the base point you have to click the base point again after you have clicked all other dimension points 122 Oblique Base Chain Dimension Tool k This tool creates a ob ique base chain dimension displaying the rising distance between objects and spaces to a base point yb Perpendicular Dimension Tools These tools measure an object or space perpendicular to another line If most of your dimensions start from a line edge you can use this tool to generate both horizontal and vertical dimensions Perpendicular Dimension Tool This tool dimensions an object or space perpendicular to a line Click the base line first then click the object or location 6 549 Perpendicular Base Line Dimension Tool This tool dimensions between a point or object perpendicular to an ex isting base line A 9 019 n xX Perpendicular Chain Tool This tool dimensions between points or objects perpendicular to an existing baseline 2 470 6 549 Perpendicular Ordinate Dimension Tool A This tool dimensions between a point or object perpendicular to an existing base line KA Dimensions Perpendicular Base Chain Dimension Tool This tool creates a ob ique base chain dimension displaying the rising dista
289. ll The chapter also compares the different methods for performing the for several selected same action such as the difference between dragging a selected item blects common editing activities you can perform on a selected object and using the Move tool Editing Tools These tools allow you to change an object physically either altering the geometry changing the size or changing the location or orientation of the selected object Three subpalettes on the tool palette provide these editing capabilities Fillet and Chamfer The Fillet and Chamfer tools round the corners of nonparallel lines or cut them at straight angles respectively Trim The Trim tools cut off or extend a line to the boundary limit you specify You can also segment a line at an intersection or create corners from intersecting lines Transformation The Transformation tools move rotate expand ot shrink stretch and mirror objects ane ana Chamfer Tools These tools on the tool palette construct fillets and chamfers from corners formed by nonparallel lines or curves The fillets and chamfers are automatically trimmed If you do not want them trimmed hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while you are selecting the objects to fillet or chamfer 81 Editing objects Before you can fillet Smart walls you have to ungroup them When filleting two parallel lines the fillet will be tangent to all objects only if the filleting radius is
290. ll associated to a sheet cannot be deleted As long it is related to a sheet the Delete button in the Models Dialog box is greyed out 167 Structuring Drawings 168 Y Sheet 1 Z Model 1 p Rename Adding a new Sheet automatically creates a new Model 5 Make Sheet 2 current by highlighting it and clicking Current If you have any geometry on Sheet 1 it disappears and a blank screen comes up Also the check mark moves from Sheet 1 to Sheet 2 and the check mark also moves automatically from Model 1 to Model 2 m Sheets m Models Sheet 1 ew Model 1 y New Y Sheet 2 je Model 2 ee Rename Current Rename Current __ ETT Rename Rename Making Sheet 2 current automatically makes Model 2 current Model 2 automatically becomes current because Sheet 2 is related to Model 2 So if you make Sheet 2 current on the screen then Model 2 has to be current as well Sheet 2 now displayed on the monitor is blank because nothing has yet been added to Model 2 As soon as you begin to draw all geometry is automatically added to Model 2 since Model 2 is the current model space Associative Views Views allow you to enlarge or reduce all or part of the geometry for both viewing and printing This visual change of the view does not af fect the actual measurement of the geometry the model There exist two types of views in DraftBoard the Sheet View and Detail Views Sheet
291. ll entry fields with identifiers such as Name Date etc or modify existing labels to meet your specifications 3 Enterin each entry field the label name you put in front of the entry field with an character in front 4 Assign to all text you entered including the character the desired font style and size using the Selection tool from the tool palette 5 If no layer with the name TitleBlocks exists create this layer us ing the Layer command in the Layout menu 6 Select all entries with an character in front using the Selection tool 7 Choose the Edit objects command in the Edit menu and assign to all selected entries the TitleBlocks layer 8 Save the drawing format DraftBoard checks not only the layer TitleBlocks for characters but all selected text objects All text found between the character and the first space will be used as label name Text in front of the character and following the space remains unchanged and not substituted by the text entered into the entry fields in the TitleBlocks dialog box There are more than one variable allowed The character you create under Windows using the key combination Alt 64 or Alt 064 and on the Mac intosh with the key com bination Option Shift 1 109 Text Fills and Hatches You can choose the Fill command from the key board with Ctrl B Macin tosh 8B and the Hatch command from the key board with Ctrl H Macin tosh 98H In the Appen
292. located in the View Mode submenu in the Views menu Wrefane v Perspective on off v Shaded Perspective Edit Visible Lines Visible Lines analytical Window All view modes can be used for both the Sheet View and for any Detail View window The View Mode submenu in the Views menu contains the following commands Wireframe Shaded Visible Lines and Visible Lines analytical Wireframe is the default view mode For the Shaded and the Hidden Lines mode it is possible to activate a Perspective view For the Hidden Lines analytical mode you can specify if the hidden lines should be represented by solid or dotted lines original wireframe geometry RN hidden lines removed perspective view hidden lines removed main edges as dashed lines Changing the View Mode The view mode can be changed any time using the view mode commands in the View Mode submenu in the Views menu but they will affect only the representation of surfaced objects Changing a view mode applies automatically for all surfaced objects in the active view Sheet or Detail View Editing Structured Surfaces Surfaced objects cannot be edited in any of the view modes You first must return to the original wireframe geometry using the Undo command in the Edit menu or the Ungroup command in the Arrange menu before you can edit any surfaced object Wireframe This view mode shows the structured surface as a wireframe surface mesh r
293. long the align z construction line about 2 cm and click align z bi on x 4 Move the pointer along the align x construction line about 2 cm and click 3D Modelling e align x on 5 Continue clicking connected lines until your drawing appears as below 6 Move the pointer until the intersection notation appears and click e aligntx I intersect Faligniz 7 Continue clicking according to the following pictures on Meg perpendicular mn i intersect t intersect F Draw the three unconnected line with the Single Line Be In this small example you could see that 3D design with DraftBoard is as easy as isometric drawing only faster and more precise Extruding and Revolving of Objects The two commands Extrude and Revolve in the 3D menu allow you to create a 3D model from 2D geometry The Extrude command adds depth to a 2D object while the Revolve command copies and rotates a 2D object to provide three dimensions Extruded Geometry i Q A 2D part is extruded to a 3D model A 2D Geometry lt gt v 2D Geometry Rotated Object NURBs Surface mesh NURBs Surface Shaded A circle is rotated with the Revolve command to create a torus Extrude This command adds depth to a 2D object When you select the Extrude command from the 3D menu the following dialog box is displayed 273 3D Modelling Extrude Direct
294. lorer ot from the Windows Desktop into the DraftBoard drawing area Dragging text into the DraftBoard Drawing area 1 Create text using a text editor such as MS Word that supports OLE Text Fills and Hatches 2 Select the text and drag it with the left mouse button pressed into the DraftBoard drawing area 3 Release the left mouse button The text is placed on the DraftBoard drawing area at the location where the mouse button was released The text is displayed using the current DraftBoard text font and all paragraph formats will be maintained Dragging DraftBoard Files into the DraftBoard Drawing area 1 Select a DraftBoard File in the Windows Explorer or on the Windows Desktop 2 Drag the DraftBoard File with the left mouse button pressed into the DraftBoard drawing area 3 Release the left mouse button The DraftBoard drawing is automatically opened in Draft Board Text Menu The Text menu contains commands for changing the text font size and style as well as the justification spacing and indentation Text Font gt Size gt Style v Align Left Align Right Align Middle Justified v Single Space 1 1 2 Space Double Space Indentation Autotext Forms Font This command in the Text menu changes the font for selected text or future text entries Text Font y a Size Copperplate Gothic Light Courier Style Courier New Courier New Baltic Courier New CE Couri
295. lors The Color dialog box is displayed listing all available colors ES Pen Colors Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta Apricot Aquamarine Bittersweet Blue Green Choose a color name 5 Click the Apply button The current pen and all selected objects takes on the new color 6 Click the Close button when you have modified all line colors Choosing the color of the current pen from the color palette 1 Select the Color command from the Pen menu The submenu appears 2 Drag to Palette in the Color submenu The Color Palette is displayed showing 64 predefined and all user defined colors Pen Style gt Color gt Define Weight gt Palette Pattern gt v Black Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta More 3 Drag to the color you want The current pen and all selected objects takes on the new color and the color is selected in the submenu Changing the pen color of an object without changing the color of the current pen 1 Select the object 2 Choose Edit Objects from the Edit menu The Edit Objects dialog is displayed 3 Change the pen color in the Edit Objects dialog box 4 Click the Apply button The selected objects reflects the new pen color The color of the current pen is not modified Define Colors You can define 170 colors in addition to the 64 predefined colors New colors are defined with the Define command from the Color submenu in the Pe
296. luorescent tube might provide It is the most directed source for illumination in DraftBoard These light sources are normal DraftBoard objects that can be moved copied or deleted like any other object in DraftBoard All light source attributes can be edited using the Edit Objects command They also can be placed or relocated using the Drawing Assistant Show Light Palette The Light Palette contains the tools to create Ambient Point and Parallel light sources Ambient light Point light Parallel light The command Show Light Palette in the 3D menu displays the movable light palette in the upper left corner of the DraftBoard window Before you place any light source you should construct a surfaced object to control the effect of the lighting Ambient Light With the Ambient Light tool you place a light source providing a uniform illumination on all sides of your object As a diffuse light soutce it affects only the brightness You position the light source with a mouse click on the drawing area Light sources can be placed in any plane like any other object In the Status Line you can enter a factor for the Size of the light source icon The default factor is 1 This factor does not effect the intensity of the light source or any other aspect of the source Co or and Intensity of the light source can be specified with the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu The default color is white and the default factor for the intensity
297. ly 1 1 1 1 1 Drag Result Vertically A vertical construction line through the first point of the stroke Horizontally A horizontal construction line through the first point of the stroke Using Stroke construction lines Construction lines are as long as the dimensions of the viewing area of the screen or the plot region as designated in Drawing Size whichever is larger For example if you are using the Connected Line tool you can create a construction line that extends through the center of a circle 1 Hold down the Shift and Ctrl key Macintosh Command key 2 Move the pointer near the center of the circle The Drawing Assistant snaps onto the center point Drawing Assistant Permanent construction lines automatically appear on the Construction layer not the work layer of your drawing You can hide the Construction layer to view or print the drawing without construction lines You can use strokes to create construction lines while you are in the process of using a tool 39 Drawing Assistant Stroke construction lines can be created only horizontal or vertical For construction lines in a different angle you must use the Construction command in the Layout menu DraftBoard automatically places construction lines on the Construction layer When you choose Delete Constructions from the Layout menu everything on the Construction layer is deleted regardless of the object s pen style Not
298. ly for one of the supported platforms a note is displayed in the page margin Reference Guide This manual describes how to use DraftBoard including all its pertinent tools and commands If you want information on a particular tool or command simply look it up in the Index Finally there is a Task Index which groups various tasks according to their functions Parametrics This Reference Gnide also includes an in depth look at the integrated Parametrics that may be a new feature to you You can use Draft Board to perform your daily tasks without understanding Parametrics but if you do a lot of repetitive drawing or modifications of existing drawings you will find this feature an invaluable time saver It is particularly useful if you are a member of a design team that works on the same parts 3D Modelling The second part of this Reference Gnide describes the 3D modelling process in DraftBoard Even DraftBoard offers a seamless transition from 2D to 3D you should already know how to use the 2D tools and commands that are described in detail in the first part of this manual Documentation WIN Windows MAC Macintosh Tips and advanced user notes are displayed in the margin throughout the manual You don t need to know this information to run DraftBoard If you are a novice user you may want to skip it entirely IMPORTANT Not all 3D Features such as AutoSurface are in all country versions and or for all opera
299. ly one type of models used in 3D In principle exist three different model types Wireframe Models define only the edges of a patt but not the Model Visualizations or Hidden line Removal is not possible with Wireframe Models surfaces covering the frame or the volume contained in a model Surface Models define all surfaces that cover the frame of a model Surface Models can be shaded for visualization and their hidden lines can be removed for a more clear representation of the model Solid Models define objects including their surfaces and volume It is possible to add and subtract solid models or create model sections In DraftBoard you create Wireframe Models with the option to auto matically surface and shade those wireframe models for visualization These automatically calculated Surface Models can be used for Hidden Line Removal or exported as Volume Models into other programs 251 3D Basics Note Rotating a view does not change the orientation of the work plane See as well under Work Planes in Chapter 16 3D Modelling Once you create a detail view the Sheet View becomes fixed because the Sheet Camera remains now stationary in the origi nal x y world orientation You then will not be able to change the view of the sheet as long as Detail Views are placed on the sheet 252 Three dimensional Work Space Basically you create three dimensional objects in DraftBoard the same way you create two dimensi
300. m mand displays the printing area of the selected paper size at its true size on the drawing area You can change the paper format using the Print Setup com mand Macintosh Page format in the File menu You can ignore the number of detail views since they are only important when using the Sheet Into View command Important If the rectangle is displayed vertically you have to change the paper orientation with the Print Setup command Macintosh Page format in the File menu and call the Drawing Size com mand again Tip It is recommended to keep at least one detail view in a drawing format since that allows you to use this format with the Sheet Into View command The Import command ignores all detail views Important Text entries with an character in front must not be grouped since then the TitleBlocks com mand cannot identify these entries as title entries See as well under AutoText in this Manual 175 Structuring Drawings Drawing formats that should be used with the Sheet Into View command must have at least 1 Detail View into which all object geometry can be placed Without any detail view the Sheet Into View command doesn t work correctly You can as well import a drawing formats containing one or several detail views since the Import command ignores all detail views 176 Adding formats to the Sheet Into View dialog box list You can create your own drawing formats and add them to
301. m possible Edge Length of a approximation triangle A small value increases the precision of the model representation but also increases the calculation time When 0 is entered this parameter is ignored The default value is 0 This value describes the maximum Chord Length between the NURB Surface boundary and the adjacent triangle edge of a approximation triangle A small value increases the precision of the model representation but also increases the calculation time When 0 is entered this parameter is ignored The default value is 0 Appendix Appendix Operators and Units This appendix describes mathematical and conditional operatots Mathematical Operators Many entry boxes accept mathematic trigonometric and exponential operators in the form funcName arg1 arg2 Operator Addition Subtraktion Multiplikation Division Square Root Parenthetical Scientific Notation Exponentiation Sine of Angle Cosine of Angle Arctangent Log Base 10 Natural Log Base e Remove Fractional Part Absolute Value Smallest Larger Integer Largest Smaller Integer Negative Value Round Random Number Appendix argN Example al 3 5 3 0 5 2 5 IUS 1 5 3 0 5 6 For divisions also a colon sqrt 2 1 4142 dr used instead of a 3 4 1 0 5 0 5 4e 3 0 004 exp 2 7 128 sin 30 0 5 cos 60 0 5 atan 1 1 45 log 100 2 In 2 0 6931 truncate 1 4142 1 abs 2 2 ceili
302. mand in the Commands list box Arrows Clicking this buttons moves a command from the Commands list box to the Menu list box and vice versa Menu This list box contains all commands that will be added as new menu items Clear Using this commands moves all commands from the Menu list box to the Commands list box and removes all added commands from the Extra menu Save Clicking the Save button adds all commands contained in the Menu list box into the last section of Utilities menu All added commands are saved permanently and are available each time you launch DraftBoard To remove these commands from the Extra menu you must first remove the commands from the Menu list box using the Clear button and click then the Save button again Adding commands 1 Copy the desired Source code files into the Function directory of DraftBoard Source code files containing commands and functions have the file extension fe 2 Select the Reload command in the Extra menu if you have copied the source code files in to the Function folder when Draft Board was already running 3 Select Add Commands in the Extra menu The Add Commands dialog box is displayed 4 Move all commands you want to add into the Extra menu from the Commands list box to the Menu list box using the Arrow buttons 63 Setting the Environment When you delete a source code file in the Function folder of the DraftBoard folder the related command is automatically r
303. mber of instances of the problems E Resolve Problem Geometry overconstraint Line distant 4 from line Problem shown 1 of 1 Resolve Problem Unrelated Groups of Geometry Problem shown 1 of 9 Gancel_ _ Next When a message appears the problematic geometry appears as thick Pay attention to single lines and individual dots The lines indicate the geometry that the points Remember the parametric mechanism connects the dots Frequently one constraint the relationships between the problems can help you discern what or dimension can solve must be done several problems at once parametric mechanism can draw Dots indicate unknown points When you click the Next button the next problem is shown Examination of Geometry Overconstrained The basic rules say that you must define all geometry and relate every object to some other geometry within the parametric definition When geometry is overconstrained it is related in more than one way so the geometry s specifications could be resolved to more than one answer PROBLEM The diameters of the circles indicate the relationship between the circles adequately because the centerline remains horizontal and the circles are fangent to each other The length variable causes the problem because the length between the centers of the cir mt cles may not correspond to the sizes of the connected circles Note The centerline be gins and ends at the centers of
304. med or extended If you hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while you select the objects to chamfer the objects are not trimmed Ms A 45 The status line allows you to set the distance Length from the intersection as well as the angle Trim Tools KIX EF The Trim tools on the tool palette lengthen or shorten lines and curves In general you select the limiting object s before you select the tool However if you don t select everything you need you can hold down the Shift key and click additional objects after the Trim tool is selected Simple Trim Tool This tool shortens a line to the specified boundary If you hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while using this tool it becomes the Relimit tool Trimming objects 1 Select the object that limits the trim 2 Select the Trim tool If necessary use Shift Click to select more boundary objects 3 Click the section of the object to be discarded There are no status line entries Relimit Tool This tool lengthens or shortens a line to the specified boundary If you hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while using this tool it becomes the Trim tool Relimiting objects 1 Select the object that limits the change 2 Select the Relimit tool If necessary use Shift Click to select more boundary objects 3 Click the section of the object that you want to remain There are no status line entries Segment Too
305. ment accordingly Dash Length There are two ways to change the length of a Dash e Clicking the Dash handle activates it the handle is now filled The Dash s current length appears in the Dash Length entry box Entering a new value will change the length of the selected Dash e You can also drag the handle with the mouse As you drag the Dash s length is updated in the Dash Length entry box Release the mouse button when the Dash is the length you want Add Using the Add button you can add a new Dash The new Dash with a length of zero is active its handle is activated You can change the length of the new Dash by dragging its handle or by typing in a value in the Dash Length entry box Remove Using the Remove button you can remove a Dash To remove a Dash select its handle and click Remove The Dash is removed from the pattern element Revert You cannot undo a pattern edit with the Undo com mand To return a pattern back to DraftBoard s default click Revert in the Edit Pattern dialog box Revert changes a the line patterns back to their defaults not just the pattern selected from the Edit Pattern pull down list A warning message is present ed when you click Revert Alert This operation will backup all your line patterns to the original settings Do you really want to revert No Yes Clicking Yes will change a of the patterns back to DraftBoard s original settings and clicking No wil
306. metric dimen sioning requires some skill and comprehension of how DraftBoard treats geometry Por a deeper understanding of how Parametrics works we recommend therefore to study the Parametric chapter in the Tutorial Using Parametrics The parametric mechanism is poznt driven It locates the points and then The DraftBoard folder connects them with the appropriate geometry much like the childhood contains a folder of sym bols that use parametrics You might retrieve a few of the symbols using the To begin determine where the endpoints are and then draw lines to Symbol command in the File menu to become familiar with how paramet rics works activity of connect the dots It is not unlike drawing with a compass tri angle and T square connect the points Or you might figure out where the center of an arc should be where the arc begins and ends and use a compass to connect the points 201 Parametrics Extraneous Text is explained in the Dimensions chapter For rules c and f each exist a special case See as well under Introduction in the Parametric chapter of the Tutorial See as well Assumptions Involving Tangency in this chapter Lines are colinear if they have a common invisible carrier line DraftBoard can recognize colinear lines only if they touch at least in one endpoint Perpendicular lines remain only perpendicular if they have an horizontal or vertical orientation 202 Basic Rules 1 Defi
307. metry which lie inside the selection marquee are selected If you want to select most of the objects within an area you can drag a selection marquee to select all the objects and then deselect the objects you do not want selected by holding down the Shift key and clicking them Select all Objects Double clicking the Selection tool selects all objects on the drawing area Selecting an object that is overlapped by another object MAC Occasionally you may have geometry that overlaps other geometry To select geometry underlying the object follow these steps 1 Click the Selection tool in the tool palette 2 Select the geometry on top 3 Hold down the Shift key 4 Hold down the Ctrl key and click the selected geometry again The obscured geometry is selected 5 Release the Shift and the Ctrl key Tracer This tool on the Selection tool subpalette selects automatically bound aty lines The tool uses coincident endpoints and line intersections to trace the perimeter of the geometry Selecting boundary lines 1 Select the Tracer tool from the Selection Tool subpalette 2 Click on a boundary line The tracer moves from one line to another making its selection If you have two overlapping objects as shown on next page the tracer selects the perimeter of the objects depending on where you click Y Ls OS Selecting objects MAC The Tracer tool is most useful for selecting bound aries for cross
308. mmand in the Edit menu 7 Activate the detail view and choose the Paste command in the Edit menu The wireframe geometry is copied as a non associative model into the detail view 8 Select the wireframe geometry in the detail view 9 Choose an appropriate color from the Color Palette in the Pen menu 10 Select the Auto Surface command in the 3D menu The part is autosurfaced 11 Add dimensions and text to the wireframe geometry on the sheet Surfacing complex objects For surfacing complex objects it is recommended to divide the geometry into several objects and place these objects onto separate layers before surfacing each object individually While surfacing one object all other objects including surfaced objects should be hidden using the Layer command This way the calculation time is reduced as well as the time required to refresh the screen In addition this method allows to shade each object in a different color See as well Visualizing Objects in this chapter Deleting Surfaces Deleting calculated surfaces restores the original wireframe geometry and has the same effect as using the Undo command in the Edit menu 1 Select the surfaced geometry 2 Choose the Ungroup command in the Arrange menu A dialog box is displayed asking you if you want to keep or delete the surfaces 3 Click on the Delete Surfaces button All surfaces will be deleted and the original wireframe geometry will be restored except
309. model edges that are covered by surfaces aX View mode Hidden Lines This view mode is also supported by OpenGE and represents models as pixel graphics Further settings for View precision dynamical Rotation etc are done in the Visualization dialog window in the Preferences menu of the Layout menu 3D Surfaces How you can display the hzdden lines using solid or dotted lines is described in the next section Visible Lines analytical This view mode shows all visible edges of a model and hides all model edges that are covered by surfaces In addition you can specify if hidden lines should be represented by solid or dotted lines You can rotate surfaced PS objects in any view mode p gt using the Trackball Draft Board will automatically recalculate and redisplay gt pe the image in the new view orientation Rotating an object in the Visible Lines analytical view mode is a EU slower than in all other modes NURB Splines Intersection curves pee In contrast to the view modes Shaded and Visible edges that are supported by OpenGL and represent all curves as pixel lines the analytical view mode represents and calculates all model edges as NURB Splines This view mode is slower than the OpenGL supported view modes Shaded and Visible Lines but calculates precisely all edges including all sorts of intersection and hidden lines This view mode is always recommended if 3D Models should be projected and dim
310. n 3 v Layerl Lines made with the lt 3 Layer2 Construction pen do not go on the Construction layer unless you make Set Layer that layer the work layer Rename Layer Layer2 Rename 2 Click Construction in the list box 3 Click the Set Work button 4 Create the geometry you ll use for construction You can use the Construction pen style but any pen style is acceptable 5 When the construction geometry is complete make another layer Since the Delete the work layer Constructions command deletes all geometry on the 6 Close the dialog box Construction layer you shouldn t create anything you want to keep on the Once you no longer need the construction geometry choose Delete Construction layer 7 Continue your work Constructions from the Layout menu to remove all geometry on the Construction layer Removing Construction Lines If you have many construction lines and you want to delete only one or You can select two of them select the lines you want to remove and then choose the Construction lines in the usual manner from any layer the Construction You can remove all the construction lines that you ve created by layer doesn t have to be Delete command from the Edit menu or press the Back Space key choosing Delete Constructions from the Layout menu the work layer Delete Constructions This command in the Layout menu deletes all construction lines and Since the Delete any geometry on the Con
311. n a folder with this file name is created that contains all hatchpatterns stored in the pat file Specifying Crosshatch Patterns You specify your own hatch patterns by creating and binding in hatch description files into DraftBoard Hatch patterns are defined by hatch pattern lines that are running through a defined origin and are endless repeated at a defined offset distance Hatch pattern lines are infinitely long Each Hatch pattern line may contain single pattern elements to create dashed or dotted pattern lines A Crosshatch pattern has as well an infinite size and a hatched geometry shows only part of this pattern like a detail window Creating Hatch description files To bind in your own hatch pattern into DraftBoard you must save the Hatch description files as ASCII files into the DraftBoard folder Scripts VSG Hatches A Hatch description file can contain the description of one or several crosshatch patterns The file name of a Hatch description file is displayed in the Crosshatch dialog box of DraftBoard if it is copied in the folder mentioned above The file extension of this ASCII file must be always pat Without this file extension DraftBoard is not able to identify this file and cannot display the crosshatch patterns described in this file To create a Hatch description files you can use any Text Editor such as NotePad for Windows or SimpleText for the Macintosh Pattern Definitions A Hatch description fi
312. n the Ps most left Construction Point cout en is automatically used as Insertion point 223 Symbols If you want to study the composition of a parametric symbol you should open one of the parametric symbols shipping with DraftBoard in Symbols folder Important DraftBoard can extract the current values of parametric dimensions for BOM tables only when they start with a Capital letter Therefore you should create only parametric vari ables that start with a Capi tal letter Each dotted line style like the line style of the Con struction line will be hid den when a symbol is placed or printed There fore you should use this line style for all invisible parts of an object When you want to study a Smart Symbol open one of the Door symbols in the Architect folder of Draft Board 224 In the Preview window of all symbol dialog boxes the Insertion point of a symbol is shown as a small black triangle The Insertion Point is indicated in the Symbol preview by a black Triangle A Creating parametric symbols Objects with editable dimensions using variables are called Parametric Symbols Draw a rectangle at a any size 2 Dimension the object according to the rules of parametric In our example we overwrite the Symbol in the Status line with the variables Width and Height width t Height de 3 Test the rectangle using the Resolve command in the Paramet rics submenu of the Edit men
313. n Process e 3D Construction Tools e Rules for 3D Construction Work Plane In traditional 3D computer aided design you work as though you have propped a piece of glass on one of the faces of the model and draw on that Every time you want to work on a different plane you have to pick up your glass and carry it to the new position With DraftBoard you can move around inside the model and draw wherever you want Generally all you have to worry about is the design not moving the piece of glass Due to the Drawing Assistant the work plane in Draft Board is rarely used But when it s required you only have to specify the orientation of the work plane but not its posztion like in conventional CAD programs The Drawing Assistant keeps tabs on the angles and intersections for you in all three dimensions It identifies the plane of an object automatically as soon as it snaps on one of the objects construction points Therefore you can if geometry exists draw relative to the identified plane Also for objects you create with tools requiring three construction points such as the 3 Point Circle tool or Tangent Point Circle tool the orientation of the work plane must not be changed 3 Point Circle Center Point Circle specified by 3 Points CD parallel to the work plane When a tool creates geom etry from two points the Tangent Point Circle Ale existing e ideries 2 elements geometry will lie on a plane parallel to the work plane
314. n like any other object in a drawing including text using Postscript and True Type fonts Use Plotter fonts whenever you are creating text for a drawing that you intend to send to a plotter since plotting Postscript or Tru eType fonts take much more time to print or may be substituted In addition to the plotter fonts shipping with Draft Board you can use all plotter fonts that are compatible with the file format shx of AutoCAD When you copy these files into the Fonts folder of the DraftBoard folder the new fonts are dis played in the Fonts sub menu after relaunching DraftBoard All menu items in the Text menu affect only text created with the Text tool Text attributes for dimensions are set in the dimension editor under Preferences in the Dimension menu 103 Text Fills and Hatches If you have selected American units under Units in the Preferences sub menu of the Layout menu the text size is displayed in Point and Inches when you have selected metric units it is displayed in Point and Millimeters All items in this dialog box affect only text created with the Text tool Text attributes for dimensions are set in the Dimension Editor under Preferences in the Dimension menu It is advisable to use the Selection mask to select all text and dimensions in case you have to assign the accurate text size after scaling A detailed description about text size and scaling can be found in Chapter 9
315. n list box contains all function from the Function folder that can be added to the additional function palette These functions were automatically loaded when DraftBoard was launched or reloaded using the Reload command when DraftBoard was already running File This field shows the file name of the source code file for the function selected in the Functions list box Icon shows the icon of the function selected in the Functions list box Arrows These buttons move functions form the Functions list box to the two palettes and vice versa Palette The two radio buttons Main for Main palette and Sub for subpalettes allow to configure a function palette that is handled like the Standard Function Palette of Draft Board Main Clicking the Arrow button while this radio button is marked moves the selected function from the Function list box to the Function palette and displays the related icon in the palette Using this option all functions will be placed vertically without building any subpalettes Palette Once O Sub 1 Setting the Environment The palette shows always the icon of the last function that was moved to the palette You can display all function that are contained in the palette by clicking the icon and keeping the mouse button pressed As long the mouse button ts pressed all icons contained in the palette are displayed Sub Clicking the Arrow button while the Sub radio button is marked moves the selected f
316. n menu Pen Style gt Color gt Define Weight gt Palette gt Pattern s v Black Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta More Specifying a new color name 1 Choose the Define command from the Color submenu The Define Color dialog box is displayed EB Edit Colors White Define Yellow Green Yellow Orange Wild Strawberry Vivid Tangerine _ Use Olive Green User lt 65 gt User lt 66 gt User lt 67 gt Color Name User lt 65 gt 41 Setting the Environment The Apple Macintosh offers two system to define colors The Apple HSL Color wheel and the Apple RGB Color display You can switch between the two systems or use one system as your default color system 48 The Define Color dialog box displays a list containing all color names that can be defined in DraftBoard The list starts with the 64 predefined colors followed by the 170 user definable colors named Color lt 65 gt to Color lt 236 gt 2 Scroll down the list and select the first undefined color number like Color lt 65 gt 3 Enter the color name limited to 15 characters in the Color Name data field 4 Click the Rename button The undefined Color lt 65 gt is renamed Now we specify a color for the new color name Defining a color 1 Click the Define button in the Define Color dialog box The Windows Color dialog box is ii i heo Rot 127 BEE EEE g S tt 0 Gr n 127 Farben
317. n the drawing area The direction you indicate with the dragged line for the Normal line of sight corresponds with a vector coming toward you away from the screen when the view is active A vector for the Normal 90 Line of Sight in that direction creates this view Up In these entry fields you specify by dragging a vector on the drawing area which side of an object in the future view will show upwards The dragged vector for the Up direction of the Line of Sight is always rectangular to the Normal line of sight Vector Up Nor Mal Line of Sigh t A vector for the Line of Sight Up in that direction OK When you click the OK button the Redefine View dialog box is closed If the dialog box was opened using the New creates this view button a new view with the name View 1 will be added to the Views list If the dialog box was opened using the Redefine button the selected is redefined Defining or Redefining a View You can use one of two methods to specify the orientation of the axes of a view By example 1 Manipulate the view orientation manually with the Trackball 2 Select the Define View command in the Views menu The Define View dialog box is displayed 3 Select a view and click the Redefine button if you want to redefine the view with the current values or click the New but ton if you want to create a new view based on the current values The Redefine View dialog box is displayed s
318. n use a floor plan and then construct the electrical and plumbing plans on different layers In that way you can turn off one layer the electrical plan for instance and print the other the plumbing plan with the floor plan DraftBoard allows you to have up to 256 visible or hidden layers in your drawing Layer names are limited to 79 characters Layers Ctrl L Macintosh 3L This command in the Layout menu allows you to create delete and rename layers as well as set layer specifications The work layer is the active layer the layer on which the current construction is created The visible layers are indicated in the list box by a checkmark and a dot indicates the work layer EB Layers lt g Construction lt g Dimension Construction Lines Construction lines automatically go on the construction layer Dimensions If you create a dimension layer all dimensions added after you create the layer go on the dimension layer You can edit any geometry or text that is visible regardless of which layer it is on If you want to make some geometry unselectable but still visible use the Selection Mask command in the Edit menu Layers are often described as transparent films But actual they are just another method to group objects Since the DXF format supports only 31 charac ters you should limit layer names to 31 charac ters to guarantee a smooth DXF Export Note You cannot hide or delete a layer
319. n which you create your geometry But rotating a view can bring the work plane into a position that makes it impossible to create any geometry on it work plane work dl rotated work plane work plane rotated gt Y i gt plane aligned using the Set Plane to Screen trimetric view trimetric view view rotated command The command Set Plane to Screen that keeps the Work Plane always parallel to the Screen while rotating a view and the command View the Plane that aligns the View parallel to the Work Plane help to avoid this problem Displaying the Work Plane When you open a new drawing in DraftBoard the default orientation of the work plane is Top You can display a Triad symbol on the screen to control the orientation and position of the work plane Show Hide Triad This command displays the Trzad symbol in the upper left corner of the screen or active view window to illustrate the orientation of the Xx yY Z axis and the work plane Z A wy Orientation of the Work Plane _ x Possible representation of the Work Plane depending on the selected View Top World Front Right Isometric Right plane in a Trimetric view The Work Plane is represented by an open triangle within the three axes x y and z The displayed orientation of these axes is depending on the selected view orientation If you have not created a detail view the triad symbol displays in the upper left corner of the sheet Once a view wi
320. name entered into the Rename field Renaming a View 1 Select the View Manager command in the Arrange menu The Viewport Manager dialog box is displayed Select the view you want to rename in the View list Enter a new name for the view selected in the view list Click the Rename button The view selected in the view list is a renamed with the name entered into the Rename field Showing Views 1 Select the View Manager command in the Arrange menu The Viewport Manager dialog box is displayed Select the view you want to rename in the View list Click the Show button The screen content saved with this view is displayed on the screen You can display a view as well by double clicking the view name in the view list 149 Basic Drafting The precision you specify for the selected unit defines only the number of digits you can enter in the status line not the precision of the object geometry that is always saved with double precision Therefore you can change the precision at any time during the drafting process 150 Deleting Views 1 Select the View Manager command in the Arrange menu The Viewport Manager dialog box is displayed 2 Select the view you want to rename in the View list 3 Click the Delete button The selected view is deleted Panning Screen Contents aja pera The tool Pan Drawing area allows to move the content of a screen You find this tool in the Views subpalette Pan Drawi
321. nce between objects and spaces to a base point Radial Arrow Out Dimension Tool This tool measures the radius of a circle arc or fillet with the arrow on the side of the arc indicated when the arc is picked To dimension the radius of a circle arc or fillet click near it If you click outside it the dimension text appears outside and if you click inside it appears a You can move a dimension arrow to a new location by R2 741 dragging a selection marquee around the control point at the top of the R 2 741 dimension arrow and then drag it to a new location inside When the dimension appears the leader line is placed at the nearest 15 increment from the location you clicked You can drag the text to a new location Radial Arrow In Dimension Tool Val This tool measures the radius of a circle arc or fillet with the arrow inside the geometry To dimension the radius of a circle arc or fillet click near it If you click outside it the dimension text appears outside and if you click inside it appears inside Either way the arrow line starts from the arc center R 2 385 R 2 385 When the dimension appears the leader line is placed at the nearest 15 increment from the location you clicked You can drag the text to a new location Extended Radial Arrow In Dimension Tool This tool measures the radius of a circle arc or fillet with the arrow inside the geometry To dimension the radius of a circle arc
322. nd 273 F feet 57 files autosave 188 backups 187 close 188 convert 196 export 193 import 189 new 186 open 186 open by drag amp drop 103 preview 184 print into file 157 properties 184 recent file list 187 save 187 fillet tools 81 filling geometry 112 flatten all views command 260 flatten view command 260 floating tool palette 60 fonts 103 adding plotter fonts 67 formats dimensions 127 forms 109 front view 253 fullscale 151 function interface 62 function plotters 28 function param 30 function f x f x y 29 mathematical operators 29 G GD amp T 134 grid 58 group command 96 Index H helix 31 hidden line style 54 hit radius 37 horizontal dimensions 119 hpel 158 I ifelse 203 302 igs 189 illumination 293 import 189 dxf configuration 305 text file 101 inches 57 indentation text 106 inertia 236 inscribed polygon tool 25 intersection drawing assist ant 35 invert preferences 58 isometric view 254 isometric drawing 37 K keyboard snap points 36 kinematic 215 L layers and color 162 and smart walls 163 construction 161 counting objects 162 118 129 161 example 163 hidden 162 layer groups 163 leading 0 dimensions 132 leading O units 57 left view 254 lights 294 line dimensions arrows 56 characteristics 46 color 46 defining pen styles 55 dimension lines 130 editing styles 55 editor 52 pattern 51 styles 45 tools 17 weight 49 linear
323. nd parametric dimensions 3 Choose Resolve from in the Parametrics submenu of the Edit menu The Resolve dialog box displays Parametrics 4 Click File to specify the values for the variables automatically 5 Select the text file name The variables and values are read from the file 6 Specify an anchor point if you want one 7 Click OK The geometry is resolved accordingly Anchoring the Geometry You can anchor the geometry by clicking the anchor point when the Resolve dialog box appears For example in the 2D Tutorial you used parametrics to create the side view If you were using this side view as parametric geometry you would want to anchor the upper right corner so that it remains aligned with the front view after resolution Changing the Dimensions to Actual Measurements Once you resolve parametric geometry the dimension notations continue to show variables and constants If you want the geometry to reflect the actual measurements you have two options You can edit the dimensions or save the geometry as a symbol Follow these steps to change a resolved parametric dimension to a real value 1 Choose Selection Mask from the Edit menu 2 Highlight the four dimension types in the box on the left Only dimensions are selectable 3 Choose Select All from the Edit menu If you want different formats for different types of dimensions select each Choose Edit Objects from the Edit menu type separa
324. ndow is created it displays in the upper left corner of the active view window since the sheet view cannot be rotated any more it remains stationary in the World Coordinate System at the Top orientation The Triad symbol also temporarily displays at the origin when you rotate the view orientation manually with the trackball 3D Modelling The Triad displays the principle of the Right Hand Rule a memory aid for the relative directions of the positive axes With your right palm upturned the Thumb X points right the Index Finger Y points stralght ahead and the Middle Finger Z points up If you move your hand to indicate the x and y axes you can easily see the direction of the z axis y A Lf The Right Hand Rule Selecting Standard Planes DraftBoard offers several commands to define the orientation of the work plane and three predefined Standard Planes to choose from The three Standard Planes are predefined as follows Front x z Plane Right y z Plane World Top x y Plane Orientation and Origin of World plane was specified together with the Model Space The World Top plane is the default plane for any new drawing and can not be modified Planes This command in the 3D menu displays the Planes submenu so that you can set the current work plane Standard work planes Top Right and Fron are always displayed as well as any temporary plane you have generated and any planes you have created with th
325. ne you must select the text including the neighbouring line endpoints with a selection marque using the Selection function in the standard DraftBoard tool palette 66 Show Palette This command displays the palette you have generated with the Add functions command in the Extra menu When no palette is available this command displays only the Title bar of the palette To remove the palette you select either the Hide Palette command in the Extra menu or click the Close box of the palette Examples for additional Functions and Commands DraftBoard is already shipping with some functions and examples that you can bind into DraftBoard These functions are not officially released and don t go through the same quality control as DraftBoard Further functions can be created with the DraftBoard programming language FE Front End or downloaded from the DraftBoard Web Page www draftboard de Call your local DraftBoard distributor for more detailed information The documentation of the functions do not describe necessarily the current version of a function ot command Since their functionality is permanently extended there could already exist an improved version of these tools and commands Read therefore always the related readme file of the related function in the Function folder of the DraftBoard folder before you bind in a function or command into DraftBoard Remove Dots This command removes all isolated construction points from t
326. ne the geometry completely e Each object must relate to another object Dimensions must define every aspect of the geometry The geometry may be overdimensioned according to standard drafting practice e Do not include extraneous text as part of a dimension A single is acceptable The parametric mechanism recognizes R to mean a radius measuring the real value of the geometry 2 Keep it simple If the part is complex construct small segments resolving as you go solving any parametric problem before proceeding 3 Return to the original part between tests Use the Undo command to revert to the original state of the parametric part between tests In this way you won t introduce an unwanted constraint Consider the following assumptions made by the parametric mechanism a Horizontal and vertical lines maintain their orientation Connected lines remain connected c A construction point on the geometry of another object not on a construction point of this object remains connected to this geometry or its theoretical mathematical extension d Lines tangent to arcs or circles remain tangent if there is an endpoint at the tangency point e Colinear lines remain colinear if they overlap or share endpoints Each parametric construction must contain at least one horizontal or vertical line or alternatively a horizontal or vertical dimension 5 Be aware of the relationships that the parametric mech
327. ng 1 4142 2 floor 1 4142 1 neg 2 2 round 1 41 1 rand random number Math operators are case sensitive so be sure to type them in lower case when you use them You can use these operators to edit objects make entries in the status line and specify values in dialog boxes 301 Appendix 302 Conditional Expressions Conditional expressions are particularly useful with Parametrics when an expression depends on a condition For example a flange might depend on the diameter of a pipe but should never be smaller than some minimum size You can use two function forms of conditional expressions ifelse and RNG range ifelse condition expressionl expression2 Condition The result of a boolean expression equals l not equals gt greater than gt greater than or equals lt less than lt less than or equals S logical and logical or logical not expressionl The value of the ifelse function if the condition is true expression2 The value of the ifelse function if the condition is false The following examples show boolean expressions and an ifelse statement Length gt 5 The length is greater 5 L lt 3 W gt 2 Either the length is less than 3 or the width is greater than or equal to 2 3 ifelse A gt B A B Evaluate three times the maximum of the variables A and B returning 3 A if A is larger than B and 3 B if B is larger than A The range function is a more general
328. ng Assistant displays information about the location of the snap point This information appears either beside the pointer or next to the object itself tangent The Drawing Assistent displaying the relationship between the circle and the line that is being constructed The Drawing Assistant tells you when the snap point has locked onto the points of an object center Cayo The center of an atc ot circle Move the pointer across the arc or circle to display om for the arc or circle then move the pointer near the center to display the center point notation endpoint endpoint The endpoint of lines arcs circles ellipses and splines midpoint midpoint The midpoint of lines arcs circles ellipses and splines intersection intersection The intersection of two lines or curves both per manent lines and the Drawing Assistant s dynamic con struction lines quadrant quadrant Quadrant points on an arc or circle displayed at 3 o clock 6 o clock 9 o clock and 12 o clock vertex Co The vertices of an ellipse spline or dimension point 35 Drawing Assistant The Drawing Assistant locks onto a tangent or perpendicular only when the Drawing Assistant starts from the on notation You cannot begin from a specific point such as the endpoint quadrant or vertex point Another way would be to reduce the detection radius of the Drawing Assistant with a lower number of pixels for the hit
329. ng area This tool displays a hand icon that allows you to move the screen atea while the mouse button is pressed The status line contains no boxes Panning a drawing area 1 Select the Pan drawing area tool in the Views subpalette of the Too Palette 2 Press the mouse button and move the content of the screen while the mouse button is pressed Screen Appearance DraftBoard offers several commands to control screen appearance Redraw Screen Ctrl R Macintosh R This command in the Arrange menu refreshes the screen When you make changes to your constructions the geometry may not be redrawn cleanly in the drawing area Redrawing the screen To redraw all of the geometry and remove extraneous geometry and points choose the Redraw Screen command from the Arrange menu Stopping a screen refresh You can press the Esc or Break key Macintosh 8Bkey to stop the redrawing of the screen Important Under Windows you should use the Break key instead of the Esc key since Windows displays the Task manager when the Redraw screen command was initiated by the key combination Ctrl R Invert This command in the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu al lows you to switch the color of the drawing area from White to Black and vice versa The default color is White The Drafting Process When creating a drawing you have to consider several items to guarantee that the drawing is printed within a standard drawing format according to t
330. ng it with the Selection tool 2 Choose Crosshatch from the Pen menu 3 Make the changes you want in the Crosshatch dialog box 4 Click Apply The crosshatching changes as you specified Hatch Ctrl H Macintosh H This command is located in the Pen menu and crosshatches the select ed objects using the current crosshatch pattern If you want to change the crosshatch pattern choose Crosshatch and make your selection from the dialog box Crosshatching with the current pattern 1 Select the object you want to crosshatch 2 Choose Hatch from the Pen menu The selected area is crosshatched with the current pattern Solid Fill This command in the Pen menu fills the selection with the current pen color and the fill tolerances you specified Creating a Solid Fill 1 Select the objects which represent a closed boundary The closed boundary may include cutout areas such as a hole Select both the outside boundary and the hole 2 Choose Solid Fill from the Pen menu The Solid Fill dialog box displays Solid Fill 3 Seta Tolerance for the fill The tolerance controls how smooth the linearization is for fills in circles arcs ellipses and closed splines Increasing the value of Tolerance makes the fill smoother The default value is 0 01 A value of 0 001 will produce smoother edges than 01 This is also effected by Drawing Scale 4 Click Apply The selected object is filled with the current pen color Cha
331. ng these commands objects in the foreground will cover ob the Bring to Front and Send to Back commands is valid as well when selecting objects jects in the background This feature allows to manipulate the default drawing order of DraftBoard that puts always that object into the foreground that was drawn last Bring to Front This command brings a selected object into the foreground and will This command can be used as well when placing text in cover all underlying objects When this command is selected for front of a filled surface another object the object brought into the foreground before will go one position backwards This allows to sort objects specifically on the screen If several sorted objects are grouped the sorting order will be kept even if the grouped object is send to front again Send to Back This command sends a selected object into the background and will be covered by all objects lying in the foreground When this command is selected for another object the object brought into the background before will go one position forwards This allows to sort objects specifically on the screen If several sorted With multiple hierarchical grouped objects that objects are grouped the sorting order will be kept even if the grouped functions only partly object is send to back again Bringing objects to Front Back Example 1 Draw a circle using the line color Black and a line weight of 1 5 mm 2 Fill the
332. nging the color of an existing solid fill 1 Select the existing solid fill by clicking it with the Selection tool 2 Choose a new color from the Color pop up menu on the Pen menu The Fill color changes as you specified and will be visible as soon you deselect the solid fill Text Fills and Hatches Fill Ctrl B Macintosh 36H This command is located in the Pen menu and fills the selected objects using the current pen color and tolerance If you want to change the tolerance choose Solid Fill and make your selection from the dialog box Solid filling with the current pen color and tolerance 1 Select the object you want to fill 2 Choose Fill from the Pen menu The selected area is filled with the current pattern and tolerance Adding Crosshatch Patterns DraftBoard offers a wide variety of DIN and ANSI hatch patterns with editable pattern spacing and angle You will find these hatches organized in groups such as metals fluids etc in the Hatch dialog box A graphical compilation of all crosshatch patterns you find in the Appendix of this manual Adding Hatch Patterns All hatch patterns that are compatible with the hatch format pat of AutoCAD can be used in DraftBoard You only must copy hatch files with the pat file extension into the DraftBoard folder DraftBoard Scripts VSG Hatches The file name is then automatically displayed in the DraftBoard Crosshatch dialog box If the file contains more than one hatch patter
333. ngle lines Sides in the status line to change any polygon when f A PS first creating it After that it selected and edited as a single object Dragging to indicate the becomes a series of which ate individual objects or polygonal rectangles that can be points of the polygon creates a rubberband image separate line objects The polygon is drawn with the current pen specifications for color weight and pattern 23 Creating Geometry You cannot change the Width and the Height of a single lines rectangle in Edit Objects You must edit each line individually because rectangles be come 4 line objects after you deselect the rectangle 24 Rectangle Single Lines Tool This tool draws a horizontal or vertical rectangle using the opposite corners you specify Using the Rectangle tool Click the opposite corners of the rectangle Or e Drag the opposite corners of the rectangle You can create a square by aligning the second point on the 45 construction line If the two points are on the vertical or horizontal axis a straight line is drawn You can create a copy of the last rectangle by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and clicking where you want the upper left corner A default 1 inch rectangle is drawn if you have not previously drawn a rectangle X Y H The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the first point as well as the width and height of the rectangle Width i
334. ngular dimensions 124 antialiasing 292 arc length dimension tool 125 arc tools 20 arranging objects 95 arrows arrow at end command 56 arrow at start command 56 arrow size 56 arrowheads 56 Index dimensions 129 lines 56 ASCII 189 associative detail views 168 associative dimensions 117 asterisk 92 attributes 237 dimensions 133 Auto Front 172 automatic dimensioning 66 autosave 58 autosave command 188 autosurface 287 autotext 106 B back view 253 background color 292 backups 187 balloon line style 54 balloon symbols 125 bill of materials 237 bitmap 193 bmp 189 BOM 237 defining layers for symbols 239 item numbers 243 layouts 244 tool palette 240 bottom view 253 bring to front command 95 bring to front views 171 C center line style 54 center drawing assistant 35 center mark dimension 125 center point arc tool 20 center point circle tool 21 centimeter 57 centroid 236 chamfer tools 81 circle tools 21 clicking 14 clipboard 90 close command 188 color 46 color palette 49 fills 110 line 46 pen 46 with layers 162 conditional expressions 302 connected lines tool 18 constants 119 constraint lines 206 construction command 40 construction line style 54 construction lines 38 construction command 40 creating construction geom etry 40 dynamic 38 parallel 40 permanent 39 removing 41 strokes 39 convert command 196 315 Index 316 copy copy command 89 obje
335. nits Determines whether or not the zero to the left of the Leading 0 decimal point appears Trailing 0 s Determines whether or not zeros to the right of the decimal point are displayed If set the precision determines the number of trailing zeros Using the status line to specify the unit of measure You can use the status line to specify a unit of measure other than the one in effect for the document If the units are set to inches and you draw a line you can use different units of measure such as inches feet J feet and inches x y millimeters mm centimeters cm and meters m You can also mix the units in the mathematical expression as long as you label the units properly for example 10 25 4 cm In the following example if the units are set to Meter and a line is drawn using the value below a line 23 cm long will be drawn when you press the Enter key and the status line will show the measurement in meters 23cm In addition you can use mathematical exponential and trigonometric ex pressions in the status line cos 30 Displaying the Grid When the grid is visible objects snap to the grid spacing If you want to place an object between the grid marks you must either turn off the erid change the grid spacing or zoom in so that the spacing 1s larger than the hit radius The grid spacing automatically reflects the units you set in the Units dialog box When you chang
336. nonstandard text size in the units you ve set for your drawing You can specify point size by entering pt after the value in the entry box for example if you enter 11 pt the font size will be 77 poznt Dimen Font Size Font Size a This pop up menu allows you to choose the ext style for the selected standard and for all selected and fu ture dimensions Dimensions All changes made in the Text menu have no effect on dimensions If the option Instantaneous modifications in the main window of the Dimension editor is checked all modifications done in the Dimension Text dialog box take effect immediately Whenever you want a font set to exact specifications use a Plotter font which conforms to ANSI stand ards since PostScript and TrueType fonts are Propor tional Fonts that can devi ate slightly from the speci fied size When you scale a drawing using the Sheet Into View or the Drawing Size com mand and having the op tions keep text size and keep dimension text size not checked you have to select all dimensions and assign their text size in the Dimension Editor again Certain Font Styles are only available for the Mac intosh 131 Dimensions 132 Leading 0 Determines whether or not the zero to the left of the decimal point appears Trailing 0 s Determines whether or not zeros to the right of the decimal point are displayed If set the precision determines the number of trailing zeros
337. not be correct in 2D geometry 3 Click the OK button The geometry is placed on the sheet at full scale Flatten all views Often Detail views and the Sheet view show different models When exporting drawings only one model can be exported therefore detail views can get lost This can be avoided with the Flatten all Views command When you select this command the following dialog window is displayed Flatten all views disassociates the views from the model and places the geometry on the sheet Do you still want to flatten the views This note warns you that all detail views will be disassociated from the model and therefore will loose their associativity 3D Basics When exporting a drawings with more than one model using the ex port formats EMF WMF PNG DXF DWG you will automatically be offered to flatten all views if you want to export all detail views Creating 2D Working Drawings Even though DraftBoard allows to create 3D Models intuitively it has not eliminated the need for drafting While modifying storing and sharing models are the basis of computer design drafting is still essential DraftBoard makes drafting painless You can produce finished drawings for proposals planning and patents quickly and efficiently You can create one model choose a single command and voila a four view layout scaled perfectly DraftBoard 1 You can create two dimensional draftings of a 3D mode
338. nt on the left hole of this example That point i is the endpoint of the circle Y SOLUTION es lt a On closer examination na dia you can see that the cir cle is mot dimensioned Therefote the solution D is to dimension the circle Y 208 Another Unrelated Group PROBLEM In this illustration the ezght of the right side a of the part is dimensioned You assume that A the height dimension applies to the right and left side The parametric mechanism does not make that assumption ja we SOLUTIONS There are three possible solutions to this problem 1 You can dimension the height on the ef if t H H w 2 You can draw a constraint line to close the opening a H Lew 3 You can dimension the hezght from the top of the left line to the bottom of the right A line While this is not good drafting prac je w tice it is very useful for parametric sym bols Assumptions Involving Tangency The parametric mechanism can identify tangent points but not the tangency of geometry PROBLEM A The endpoints of the lower line 2 D that is tangent to and ends at the a circle can be determined However R the upper line is tangent to and ex D tends beyond the circle and cannot be defined without more information SOLUTIONS Here are three possible solutions to the problem 1 Draw a constraint line from the center of the circle to the ee point of tangency for the line
339. nt properties and a preview of the drawing that can be optionally displayed in the Windows Open dialog box and in the Windows Explorer Win98 WinSE WinME Win2000 WinXP All these attributes are set with the Documents command in the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu Document Properties This command allows to define document properties and specify if these values should be displayed when saving a drawing In addition you can specify if a preview of the drawing should be saved with the document When you choose this command the following dialog window is displayed Document Attributes Author Name of Attribute ro 2 Client 3 Drawing No 4 Sheel C Fost at Save s Value of Attribute lil II C Embed EMF PICT Width Height 600 The Document Attributes dialog window allows the following settings Author In this field you enter the name of the author Name of Attribute Value of Attribute Post at Save as Embed EMF PIC Cancel OK as creator of the drawing In these four entry fields you can specify document attributes that are displayed when you select the Save as command The date of original creation must not be specified since it will be saved automatically with each drawing In these fields you enter values for the attributes you have defined in the left column in case they don t change with each drawing These values are optional since the
340. nu Displaying surfaced geometry in the Shaded view mode 1 Select any autosurfaced geometry 2 Select a new color in the Color submenu in the Pen menu if you want the object to appear in a color different from the current pen color 3 Click on the drawing area to deselect the geometry 4 Choose Shaded from the View Mode submenu in the Views menu Flachenverbund schattiert The shaded geometry is displayed with the default light settings using the default grey background color How to change the background color and the light settings is described in the Preferences and Light Setting sections of this chapter Shading geometry in different colors It is possible to shade surfaced objects in different colors by autosurfacing each differently colored object individually 1 Crate all wireframe objects to be autosurfaced 2 Assign to each geometry the desired color from the Color submenu in the Pen menu 3 Autosurface each colored part one after another 4 Choose Shaded from the Views submenu in the Views menu All object parts are shaded in the specified color Hidden Lines These modes display surfaced geometry such that only the front most lines are visible The object must not be selected for a Hidden Lines representation There are two view modes available for hidden lines e Visible Lines and e Visible Lines analytical Visible Lines This view mode shows all visible edges of a model and hides all
341. nu You enter the limits for the tolerance in these boxes Placing dimensions automatically on a separate layer 1 Choose Preferences in the Dimension menu 2 Select in the Layer pop up of the dimension editor a layer that all dimensions should be placed on 3 Close the dimension editor with a double click on the Control menu Macintosh Close box 4 Dimension as usual Subsequent dimensions automatically go on the dimension layer rather than the work layer Dimensions Adding tolerance and limits 1 Choose the desired style in the dimension editor under Preferences in the Dimension menu 2 Dimension as usual 3 Enter values for the upper and lower tolerance limits in the status line and press Enter It is also allowed to delete the default values and keep these fields empty or replace the values by text entries The dimension will display always the content of the status line Using fixed dimensions If you delete the symbol in the text box on the status line for a When object geometry con newly created dimension or in the Edit Objects dialog box and tains constant dimensions instead of actual measure ments the object geometry not update if you change the units or the size of the geometry is when selected together replace it with other text the entry in the text box is fixed it does with the dimensions auto Horizontal Dimension Tools matically adjusted when us ing the Resolve command UR p
342. nu in the Views menu shows the names of all the open DraftBoard documents To bring a document to the front that is covered by another document select its name from the Windows submenu Components of a Document A drawing can be a simple part or a complex assembly Each Drawing has one or more Sheets like the sheets of paper in a set of blueprints and each Sheet is made up of Layers which can be hidden or displayed as needed Zeichenbl tter liegen gestapelt hinter der Bildschirm oberflache Nur das vorderste Blatt das aktuelle Zeichenblatt ist sichtbar Jedes Zeichenblatt kann wiederum bis zu 256 Layer besitzen The first part of this chapter discusses using the File commands for opening importing exporting and saving files Printing and plotting docu ments is described in the Basic Drafting chapter 183 DraftBoard Documents In order to display docu ment preview and attributes in the Windows Explorer you must select the direc to ry containing Draft Board drawings which are saved with preview and attributes Depending on the Windows version the Explorer must be config ured accordingly These setting are only valid for the current DraftBoard session When you want to save these settings perma nently you have to select the Save Preferences command in the Preferenc es submenu in the Layout menu 184 Document Properties and Preview For each drawing you can save specific docume
343. nus Upper Roughness and Lower Roughness you can select predefined values to indicate the roughness Creating a surface symbol 1 Choose the Surface Symbols command in the Dimension menu The Surface Symbols dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the appropriate data to create a surface symbol by selecting Some pop up menus have symbols from the pop up menus and entering data in the Text an option button in front of the menu You have to ye mark this button first 3 Mark an option Round Brackets Stand Alone or Arrow Line before you can select to indicate the way you want the surface symbol connected to the amp Ny value from this pop up menu geometry you re labelling 4 Indicate the location of the surface symbol The Message Line displays the instructions you need For a Stand Alone symbol click the location for the upper left corner of the symbol If you want the symbol connected with an Arrow Line click on the geometry you want to label and then indicate on the drawing area the position for the upper left corner of the symbol with a single mouse click Editing a surface symbol Once you have created a Surface Symbol you may wish to make changes 1 Select the Surface Symbol you wish to edit 2 Choose the Surface Symbols command in the Dimension menu The Surface Symbols dialog box is displayed 3 Make the changes you want in the Surface Symbol dialog box Click the Edit button The Surface Symbol changes accordingly It is
344. objects 1 Select the square to be moved 2 Select the Move tool 3 With the Move tool click one corner of the square when the endpoint notation is displayed 4 Enter in the X entry box on the status line 2 and in the Y entry A positive or negative value box 1 entered in the status line determines the direction 5 Press the Enter key along the X or Y axis A negative value moves the object to the left or down on the screen A positive value Copying Objects with Tools o You can copy selections with the Copy command as discussed earlier in this section or by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while using the following tools The square is moved similar to the graphic above e Selection tool e Single Line tool e Center Point and Opposite Point Circle tools e Ellipse tools e Polygon tools e Text tool e Transformation tools Copying with the Selection Tool You can hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and drag a copy of the selection to a new location Copying with the Selection Tool 1 Click the Selection tool Select the object or objects you want copied Drag a copy of the selection to a new location 2 3 Hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key 4 5 Release the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key Copying with the Geometry Tools You can make copies with the following drawing tools e Single Line tool Center Point and Opposite Point Circle tools e Ellipse tools
345. objects or any other combination y1 x2 Y2 X3 Y3 The status line indicates the X Y coordinates for each of the three points Tangent Point Arc Tool This tool draws an arc beginning at the first point you specify The second point you specify is the direction vector and the third point you specify indicates the endpoint of the arc Essentially the Tangent Point Arc tool first creates a line then creates an arc tangent to the line then erases the line Creating Geometry Using the Tangent Point Arc tool 1 Click the starting point 2 Click the tangent vector The arc is tangent to a line drawn from the starting point to this point 3 Click the endpoint The arc is drawn between the first and last point you click and tangent to the line between the first and second points First Click Second Click Third Click The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the endpoints of the arc and the angle of the tangent line Y A dX dY Circle Tools olol The Circle tools on the tool palette construct circles by any of four methods e Center Point Circle e Opposite Point Circle e 3 Point Circle e Tangent Point Circle Center Point uses the center and diameter of the circle Opposite Point If you want to drag a circle uses the diameter 3 Point uses three points or can be tangent to by its center later on y
346. ocument MAC 1 Choose Open from the File menu The Open dialog box appears 2 Open the appropriate Fo der containing the document you want to open 3 Click the File name you want to open in the list box If you double click on the file name the document is opened without clicking the Open button 5 Click the OK button Recent File List Another way to access files that have been opened recently is through the Recent File List that appears in the File menu after the Exit command This list contains the names and paths of the most recent files that have been opened by DraftBoard To open a file from the Recent File List simply select the file from the File menu If the file has been moved since it was last used and the path is no longer accurate DraftBoard will ask you to locate the file by providing the standard Open dialog box Saving a Drawing You can save a drawing by choosing either Save or Save As from the File menu The file is stored in the folder you specify Save Ctrl S Macintosh 38S This command in the File menu saves the current DraftBoard document to its original folder If you want to save it to a different folder or with a different name choose Save As If you choose the Save command and the document has not been saved previously the Save As dialog box appears automatically allow ing you to name the document and specify the folder in which to save it If you have named and saved the document before a b
347. of the rectangle is moved the distance you have specified in the status line Selected Sizing versus Expand Shrink Tool Dragging a control point of a selected object changes the size of the object but it also distorts the object changing the proportion between height and width The Expand Shrink tool on the Transformation subpalette enables you to resize geometry while maintaining its proportions Use the Expand Shrink tool to enlarge or shrink a shape proportionally In addition you can specify proportions by clicking points on other geometry For example you can resize an object to fit within another object by clicking the boundary into which the resized object must fit Editing Commands Four commands in the Edit menu allow you to change objects without changing the physical geometry You can copy or move objects within the same documentation You can also copy or move objects to other documents even to other applications The Cut Copy and Paste commands do not alter the object s at tributes the layer and pen style color weight and pattern If you want to change the attributes of an object use the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu Cut Ctrl X Macintosh 38X This command in the Edit menu removes the selected objects and places them on the Clipboard Each selection you cut or copy to the Clipboard replaces the previous Clipboard contents Cutting objects 1 Select the object to be cut 2 Choose Cu
348. oints The desired point must be within the hit radius of the pointer Letter Snaps To Align c center e endpoint g grid i intersection m midpoint n no point O on p perpendicular q quadrant t tangent v vertex the percentage point set within the Snap dialog Pressing the Spacebar or clicking the mouse releases all snap restrictions Drawing Assistant This command under Preferences in the Layout menu allows you to turn the Drawing Assistant on or off and to activate the different snap modes of the Drawing Assistant Layout Show Grid Strg G Preferences 2D Analysis Show Points Construction Strg K Delete Constructions Layers Stro L Layer Groups Drawing Size gt Drawing Assistant Snap Grid Units Selection Invert Drawing Assistant Text Margins AutoSave Visualization Document Properties Export 3D Directories Draw order Save Preferences Save Palettes Choosing the Drawing Assistant command displays the following dialog box Drawing Assistant Intersect Endpoint Midpoint Vertex Y Behind Y Center Quadrant Percent Grid aa BE Drawing Assistant All snap modes are activated by default If you want to deactivate a snap mode you click the related check box If you deactivate the Drawing Assistant by clicking the Drawing Assistant check box all snap modes are deactivated as well You can leave the dialog box
349. ol Max Angle Max aspect ratio Min edge length 0 000 Max edge length 0 000 Max chord length All settings in this dialog window apply only for the Export of 3D Models while identical settings in the Visualization dialog box apply for the representation of 3D Models The following settings in the Export 3D dialog box are valid for all Export data interfaces that tessellate 3D Models for the export DXF DWG STL SLP and apply only for triangulated surfaces Max Angle This value describes the maximum possible Exterior Angle between two approximation triangles Allowed are values gt 0 The default value is 20 The smaller the value the larger becomes the number of facets This increases the precision of the model representa tion but also increases the calculation time 297 3D Surfaces 298 Max Max Max Aspect Ratio Edge Length Edge Length Chord Length This value describes the aspect ratio of the min edge length to the max edge length of a ap proximation triangle The value 1 equals an equilateral triangle When 0 is entered this parameter is ignored The default value is 0 This value describes the minimum possible Edge Length of a approximation triangle A small value increases the precision of the model representation but also increases the calculation time When 0 is entered this parameter is ignored The default value is 0 This value describes the maximu
350. on Select the view orientation to be deleted from the Views list and click the Delete button New Redefine When you click the New or the Redefine button the Redefine View dialog box is displayed Redefine View Enter values by typing or dragging the mouse in the drawing window Normal dx 80063 av 2255195 az 520259 Up dx o74493 dy 964756 dz 3D Basics The Standard Views cannot be changed unless the locked checkbox is clicked off How to define a view is described in the next New Redefine section of this chapter How to redefine a view is described in the next New Redefine section of this chapter You can select as well a view in the Views submenu of the View menu Locked views and the active view cannot be re named Locked views and the active view cannot be deleted 255 3D Basics When you drag the vector for the Normal Line of Sight know that the vector from the beginning point points directly at you not away from you So when this new view is activated the normal vector points out of the screen not into it 256 The Redefine View dialog box displays always the location of the current view The current view can be any selected view from the Views list or any view specified using the on screen Trackball The Redefine View dialog box allows the following settings Normal In these entry fields you specify the Normal 90 line of sight by dragging a vector o
351. on like dxf for DXF files or igs for IGES files DraftBoard will convert every file from the Input folder that is of the same type If you select a DraftBoard file in the Input folder and requested convert to DXF DraftBoard will convert every DraftBoard file in that folder to DXF and place those DXF files in the Output folder you selected If the folder also contains IGES files they will not be translated 197 Parametrics Using Parametrics Parametric Drafting Parametric Problems Complex Parametric Drafting Parametrics and Grouped Objects Kinematic Movies Parametrics Parametrics DraftBoard s integrated parametrics feature allows you to create geometry without regard to its actual measurements When you resolve geometry parametrically you specify values for the dimensions and DraftBoard redraws the geometry to your specifications The following are examples of parts well suited to parametric definition e Containers that vary in size according to the needs of the product line e Hydraulic pistons that vary in size because of the duty loads e Valves that vary according to the diameter of the pipes to which they are attached In its simplest form parametrics allows you to create a shape and then specify the exact measurements Of course parametrics can be much more complex when you use variables as you will see later in this chapter While creating geometry is straightforward when a part becomes complex para
352. onal draftings The only difference is that you do not work on a flat area such as a sheet of paper but in an infinitely large three dimensional work space with x y and z axes in the memory of your computer When you open a new drawing in DraftBoard an empty drawing area is displayed representing a infinite large drawing sheet The default view for each new drawing is the Top view You are looking down on top of the x y plane To create 3D objects we have to specify in addition to the width and the length of an object the beighr along the z direction which is coming toward us away from the screen To see what we are drawing in the z direction we must rotate the image As we already know is what we see on the screen not the model itself but only an image of the model projected by the Sheet camera onto the current sheet The default Top view aligns the Sheet Camera parallel to the sheet onto the x y plane De Sheet camera 3D Model space 18 _L 1 3D Model 3D Mode space Y Sheet camera lt 7 xa gt 1 1 3D Model N AE CN Mary a finite 2D pl lt infinite 2D planar niie planar area Sa The Sheet camera is rotated 3D Top View to the trimetric view When we now rotate the view using the on screen Trackball or one of the View commands we don t rotate the displayed object geometry that stays fixed even if you get the opposite impression on the screen but the Sheet Camera around the model The r
353. open while drawing You close the dialog by clicking on the Close box in the title bar Snap This command in the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu sets specifications for the Drawing Assistant Snap Hit Radius pixels Alignment Angles 0 907 Additional Creation Angles 45 45 Point Hit Radius This setting determines the detection distance in pixels When the pointer is within the specified hit radius the Drawing Assistant notations are displayed and the object is selected when you click the mouse The default hit radius is 12 pixels If you can t specify locations that are close together because the Drawing Assistant snaps to an existing control point you can do any of the following Decrease the hit radius Zoom in so more pixels separate the existing point and the point you want to select Lock on a point by pressing the mouse button Important Keyboard Snap and then typing the letter that represents the Points are not active until you have set the first con int m for mi int for mple Pe tl dl dpo ern ple struction point of any draw Alignment If you set the Hit Radius to zero you disable the ing or editing tool Angles single click selection of the Selection tool dragging a marquce and double clicking to select all objects will still work Instead you might consider using the Selection Mask in the Edit menu to specify that some objects cannot be selec
354. or Green Phantom iid hd Pattern Phantom Weight 0 35 mm Color Cyan Dimension Pattern Solid Weight 0 25 mm Color Blue Dimension lines are used for all type of dimension Balloon Pattern Solid Weight 0 25 mm Color Green Construction esse Pattern Dotted Weight 0 25 mm Color Magenta Modifying Pen Styles You can change the characteristics of a pen the Edit Style command in the Pen menu Setting the Environment Edit Style This command in the Pen menu sets the characteristics for the pen styles Redefining the specification of a pen style 1 Choose Edit Style in the Pen menu The Edit Style dialog box appears EB Edit Style soe 2 Select the pen style you want to change by pressing the Style entry box When the list of pen styles appears drag to the style you want to change 3 Specify the characteristics color weight and pattern you want for that style 4 Click the Apply button The selected pen style has now the new specifications until you You can change the default quit DraftBoard When you click the Apply button all selected Setting of any pen style by saving changes in the pref erences file See Saving log box stays open so you can make changes to other pen styles Preferences later in this chapter objects in the drawing area obtain the new specifications The dia When you edit a style you set new specifications for future uses of that pen The specific
355. or fillet click near it the Drawing Assistant must show on If you click outside it the dimension text appears outside and if you click inside it ap pears inside Either way the arrow line starts from the arc center In contrast to the two other radial dimensions the Extended Radial dimension allows to draw the dimension line of a large radius shortened and angled Both the part of the dimension line with the dimension arrow and the angled part of the dimension line point to the geometrical center Bloitgrenze When the dimension appears the leader line is placed at the nearest 1 increment from the location you clicked 123 Dimensions Angular dimensions will display all angles properly if you keep the angles larger than 3 degrees For dimensions smaller than that you should build the dimensions manually using lines and text objects The Angular Dimension tool will not dimension angles over 180 124 The leader line is always drawn to the geometrical center To shorten and angle the leader line you must first drag the dimension text to a new location and select then the end of the dimension line at the geometrical center and drag it away from the center point The dimension line is shortened and angled in a z Form where both legs point to the geometrical center Diametral Single Arrowhead Dimension Tool This tool measures the diameter of a circle To dimension the diameter of a citcle clic
356. or sheet The movement of the pointer at the origin illustrating the The model rotates as you drag The model rotates around the on the trackball corresponds to a fulcrum The location where you orientation of the x y and z axis and the Work Plane See as well under Triad in of the mouse rotates the model around that fulcrum point What Chapter 16 press the mouse button becomes the fulcrum and the movement you see on the screen responds to the view of the Sheet Camera Ot Detail View Camera Rotating Views This feature enables you to lock the Trackball along two screen axes so you can rotate the view of your geometry around the third screen axis Shift key Ctrl key Shift Ctrl keys Mac Option key Mac Command key The screen axes are different from the axes of your geometry unless you set your view to Top with the Trackball menu This makes the screen axes the same as the axes of the block screen axes screen axes screen axes Rotating the Screen view with the Trackball vertically When pressing the Shift key and dragging the cursor on the Trackball up or down the geometry will rotate around the screen X axis vertically Rotating the Screen view with the Trackball horizontally When pressing the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and dragging the cursor on the Trackball left or right the geometry will rotate around the screen y axis horizontally Rotating the Screen view with the Trackball circular When pr
357. ose an arrowhead from the Arrowhead submenu of the Pen menu Setting the Environment 3 Select Arrow at Start or Arrow at End in the Pen menu If you select both commands arrowheads are placed at both ends of the selected lines or arcs 4 Use the Arrow size command of the Pen menu to adjust the size of the placed arrowheads Setting Units DraftBoard is set to measure geometty in millimeters When you open a new drawing you should set the precision units and fractional or decimal specifications to suit your needs Units This command is in the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu Units Precision 0 001 x O inches mm O feet O cm O feetfinches O meters Leading 0 Trailing 0 s Sets the number of decimal places in all data fields within DraftBoard in Edit Objects the Status line and all Dialog boxes The default is 0 01 Precision When you choose a fractional precision measure ments will appear as fractions rather than decimals You can set the format for fractions in the Linear submenu in the Dimension menu When DraftBoard rounds off values it stores the 16 digit decimal number therefore you can change the precision displayed at any time and maintain accuracy Inches feet Displays measurements in English units Measurements less than 6 feet appear in inches and those greater than 6 feet appear in feet and inches mm cm meters Displays measurements in metric u
358. otated image of the model is than projected onto the sheet and therefore called Sheet view Model Views As long as no Detail Views exist the Sheet View can be rotated un restricted As soon as Detail Views picked up by Detail View Cameras are projected into View windows views can be rotated only within these view windows It is not possible any more to rotate the Sheet View that is now tigidly fixed and parallel aligned to the sheet in the Top View aA E y4 3D Model space Detail View Camera Sheet Camera 3D Model Sheet Camera is now rigidly fixed and parallel aligned to the sheet So 7 current sheet Y Model 1 with 1 additional active trimetric view window 3D Basics You can rotate views infinitely variable using the on screen Trackball or choose one of the Standard views from the Views submenu in the Views menu Rotate views infinitely variable For rotating views manually DraftBoard provides a Trackball that can you can display with the Show Trackball command in the Views menu Show Hide Trackball This command in the Views menu toggles he display of the Trackball on the screen Rotating the active view 1 Choose the Show Trackball command from the Views menu The Trackball can be dragged around the screen 2 Drag the pointer on the Trackball to rotate the view While rotating a view with the Trackballa Triad sym bol is temporarily displayed center of the active view
359. ots Check Dimension and Select Duplicates commands in the Utility menu In case these commands are not listed in the Utility menu you must add them to this menu as it is de scribed in the Customiza tion section in chapter 4 of this manual In addition you should read the text files SelCopy txt AntiDot txt and Check Dim txt in the Function folder in the DraftBoard directory 306 Fonts GD amp T Surface Symbols Welding Symbols Layer Locked Objects Sheets NURB Splines NURB Surfaces Smart Walls Text Tolerances Models DraftBoard Crosshatching Detail views Diameter dimension Fonts GD amp T symbol Surface symbol Welding symbol Grouped geometry Layers Locked geometry Multiple sheets Radial dimensions Smart walls Fonts that are defined in the DXF Configura tion files are maintained GD amp T frames will be correctly represented by lines and text but cannot be edited any mote since they will be exported as grouped block Surface symbols will be correctly represented by lines and text but cannot be edited any mote since they will be exported as grouped block Welding symbols will be correctly represented by lines and text but cannot be edited any more since they will be exported as grouped block Layer will be maintained Objects are transferred correctly but un locked Each sheet must be exported separately NURB Splines ate exported using AutoCAD Vers
360. ou must use the Move tool l f since the Selection tool objects using the diameter doesn t display the center existing objects Tangent Point Circle draws a circle tangent to two of the circle when selecting The circle is drawn with the current pen specifications for color weight i it and pattern Center Point Circle Tool This tool draws a circle specified by the center point and diameter Using the Center Point Circle tool Click two locations the first click places the center and the sec ond determines the radius ot e Drag pressing at the center and releasing at a position indicating the radius If you drag the points a rubberband image guides your construction You can create a copy of the last circle by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and clicking where you want the center for the new circle x 1 Y 1 DIE The status line shows the X Y coordinates of the center and the diameter of the circle Diameter is the selected status box Opposite Point Circle Tool O This tool draws a circle specified by the diameter Using the Opposite Point Circle tool Click two locations to indicate the diameter Or e Drag pressing the mouse button at the beginning and releasing it at a position that indicates the diameter If you drag the points a rubberband image guides your construction i o Y 0 dx 1 dY 1 The status line allow
361. ould it not work properly you can highlight any dialog box entry and remove it by pressing the Remove button Modify your macro as needed then test it again by pressing the Run button Continue this process until your macro runs properly Macro Limitations Macros are not general programs There are limitations as to what can be encoded in a macro The following rules apply to macros Only menu items can be included in a macro e A menu item might cause a dialog box to appear but the mac ro cannot fill in the required entries There are no conditionals like if or ifelse or loops like while e Subroutines are allowed in that one macro can call another macro provided the called macro is in the Extras menu and therefore a menu item If a macro calls a nested macro which would end in an znfinite loop an alert box will be posted and the macro will be excluded from execution Function Interface The Function interface allows you to add functions and commands to DraftBoard These functions can be displayed in an own palette and the added commands will be displayed in the Utilities menu DraftBoard is shipping already with the following additional functions e Automatic Dimensioning e Dimension axes e Text Lines and the following commands e Check Dimensions e Remove dots With the function interface you can add easily functions and commands that were either especially programmed for you or down loaded from the DraftBoard
362. out a central Y Y axis which is parallel to the Y axis IYY f x Xc 2dA Inertia IXY The moment of inertia about a centroid IXY f x Xc y Yc dA Performing 2D Analysis 1 Select the geometry that defines a closed boundary You may want to use the Tracer tool to select the perimeter 2 Choose the Construction command from the Layout menu The Construction dialog box is displayed the analysis is performed and the values are displayed in the dialog box If necessary enter changes for the Tolerance and Weight per Area values 4 Click the Calculate button The analysis is recalculated and the new values are displayed in the dialog box Calculations DraftBoard calculates the values for 2D Analysis before the dialog box appears If you make a change in the Tolerance or the Weight Per Area you must click the Calculate button to recalculate the sta tistics The 2D Analysis mechanism evaluates the boundary in the same way the crosshatching mechanism does for example DraftBoard con siders a circle inside a bounded area to be a hole Crosshatching does not fill the hole and 2D Analysis does not include the area of the circle in the area calculation Displaying the centroid 1 Select the geometry defining the part 2 Choose the 2D Analysis command from the Layout manu The 2D Analysis dialog box is displayed 3 Choose the Construction command from the Layout menu The Construction dialog box is displayed 4 In
363. owheads Arrowheads for arrow lines for dimension lines are defined separately un der Arrows in the Pen menu The arrowhead selection for dimensions is valid until the end of the current DraftBoard session You can save the selected arrowhead permanently with the Save Preferences command from the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu Instantaneous Modification When this option in the Dimension Editor is checked all changes made in the Dimension Editor take effect immediately on all selected dimensions The Apply button is disabled as long as this option is active Apply button When you click the Apply button all modifications made in the Dimension Editor are applied to all selected dimensions except the two values in the Appearance dialog that are marked with a symbol in front All modifications are valid for future dimensions until the end of the If you want to make these current DraftBoard session When you want to edit only some se changes permanent you must choose Save Prefer e ences in the Preferences clicked the Apply button to restore its original settings submenu of the Layout lected dimensions you have to select the standard again after you have Closing the Dimension Editor menu You close the dimension editor by clicking the Close box in the upper right corner of the Dimension Editor All modifications made in the Dimension Editor are valid until the end of the current DraftBoard session App
364. p in the Edit menu These tools measure horizontal spaces or the distance between linear objects Horizontal Dimension Tool This tool dimensions an object or space horizontally Click the left point first then click the right point Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display below the objects E When the dimension text appears you can drag it to a new location when you release the mouse button the dimension and extension lines are redrawn Horizontal Base Line Dimension Tool This tool dimensions objects or spaces horizontally from a base point 2 470 gt p 1 818 gt TT Horizontal Chain Dimension Tool This tool dimensions or spaces from end to end horizontally T 802 gt ey 653 ON Horizontal Ordinate Dimension Tool This tool dimensions objects or spaces horizontally from a base point Remember to display the dimension number of the base point you have to click it twice at the first and the last dimension Bu o 1 319 00 o N LO N LO 119 Dimensions If you want to display the dimension number for the base point you have to click the base point again after you have clicked all other dimension points 120 If you want to display the dimension number for the base point you have to click the base point again after you have clicked all other dimension points Horizontal Base Chain Dimension Tool This
365. pear in the Status Line The line is drawn with the current pen specifications for color weight and pattern Single Line Tool This tool draws a line between two points You can click or drag to draw a line Creating Geometry You must remember that when you press the Enter key DraftBoard constructs the object based on the specifications in the status boxes Pressing Enter a second time in the above example would create a second line with the same values Since the lines have the same values the second line overlays the first line and you can t see it The angle and the length of the line are calculated by the values you have specified If you specify values for the angle and the length of the line you don t have to enter values in the dx and dy status fields and vice versa 17 Creating Geometry When creating a point with the Single line tool by clicking twice the same position you have to select a different tool before you continue to draw Other wise you would create a line with a double Starting point This is not required when you use the Circle tool to create a point The radius of a arc created with the Connected line tool can be modified with Edit objects command 18 Using the Single Line tool Click two endpoints of the line Or e Drag to indicate the endpoints of the line press at the beginning and release at the end of the line As you drag you see a rubber band line that p
366. pecify the pattern you want to use Text Fills and Hatches Crosshatch Using this command you can select a hatch pattern You can change the default hatch pattern by saving the changes with the Save Preferences command in the Layout menu under Preferences Choosing the Crosshatch command the following dialog box is displayed Crosshatch Spacing nee Angle O1SO origin x origin y The Crosshatch dialog box allows the following settings Patterns In the Crosshatch list you select a pattern Depending which option is checked DIN or ISO the Crosshatch list may contain subdirectories with additional hatch patterns that you can open with a mouse double click Spacing In this entry field you can set the spacing of the hatch pattern If you don t add a unit that unit is valid that you specified under Units in the Preferences sub menu of the Layout menu Angle the hatch pattern Origin X Y In these entry fields you specify values for the X and Y Coordinate of the Hatch Origin You can define these values as well by dragging the mouse on the DraftBoard drawing area You just must click in one of the two entry fields and then on the intended point on the drawing area As soon you release the mouse button the corresponding values are automatically filled into the entry boxes Pattern box The Pattern box shows the revised pattern exactly as it will be when the specified object is crosshatched If yo
367. phic in Pixel units These values specify the quality resolution of the graphic for the print out The higher the resolution specified the better the print out quality The following export option are available Options Width Pixel 800 Height Pixel 600 In this dialog window you can specify the Width and Height of the graphic in Pixel These values specify the quality resolution of the graphic for the print out The higher the resolution specified the better the printout quality DraftBoard Documents Bitmap The following export option are available Optionen Width Pixel Height Pixel In this dialog window you can specify the Width and Height of the graphic in Pixel These values specify the quality resolution of the graphic for the print out The higher the resolution specified the better the print out quality SIL The following export option are available STL Options Format ASCII v C All triangles into one solid The option All triangles into one solid doesn t exports the triangulized surfaces piece by piece but assigns it to one solid SLP The following export option are available SLP Optionen Alles als einzelnes Solid Jede Fl che als einzelnes Solid Jedes Polygon als einzelnes Solid For the export you can choose from three options All into one Solid Every face as one solid Every polygon as one Solid DWG DXF The following export op
368. platz Netzwerkumgeb Bin Ri gt Rod vim Yalve vim Mouse vlm Na Knife vim Tool vim Select the d File name Drawing 1 File type DWG DXF dat dg only selected Precision 16 Enter the desired file name esited file type Set the required options Depending on the selected export file type you can set several options that are described in the next section of this chapter Click the Save button The file is saved with the specified file name file type and export options Export option for the available file types Depending on the selected export format you can set several options Only selected If you wish to export only selected objects on the Precision Options Metafiles PNG screen rather than the entire document mark the option Only Selected For some formats you can set the number of decimal places to specify the precision of the exported data The following formats allow to display a dialog box by clicking the Options button in which you can set additional export options The following export option are available MetaFiles Options Format EMF width Pixel 1600 Height Pixel 1200 You can choose from the following Metafile Formats WMF 16 bit Windows Version EMF Enhanced Metafile File 32 bit Windows Version EMF a Aldus specific EMF Format In addition you can specify the Width and Height of the gra
369. points are On the circle as shown here D 2 You can include dimensions for D 5 e the centerlines The dimensions D 2 25 should be variables based on the D 2 25 diameter of the circle so when oC you specify the diameter of the circle the centerlines are drawn relative to the diameter Relate All Geometry All parts of the geometry must be related dii SOLUTION PROBLEM Both squares could be drawn by the parametric mechanism but there is no way to determine their relative positions pa i o o 4 0 Constraint line You can add a constraint line and dz mension between the squares to con nect the dots ADDITIONAL TIPS 1 The added dimension is an example of using a constant value Of course you could have entered a variable expression such as x y for the constraint line 2 Constraint lines are ordinary lines usually drawn with the Single Line tool They can be any line style but they should be different from the lines of the regular geometry The Construction line style is a good choice 3 If you place the constraint line and dimension on a layer named Constraints you can hide that layer when you plot the drawing No Extraneous Text You must dimension all geometry because the parametric mechanism does not understand tex and cannot detect symmetry PROBLEM If you dimension the radius of a filleted corner of a rectangle as R 25 4 PLCS to indicate four
370. pping with DraftBoard you can use all hatch patterns that are compatible with the hatch format pat of AutoCAD When you copy these hatch files into the DraftBoard folder DraftBoard Scripts VSG Hatches the file name is automati cally displayed in the Crosshatch dialog box If the file contains more than one hatch pattern the name is followed by an ellipsis When you double click the file name all patterns contained in the file are displayed How to define your own hatch patterns is described under Hatches in the Appendix of this manual Hatch and Fill boundaries Before you can hatch or fill an area you must select the hatch or fill boundaries You can select the boundaries with the Selection tool or the Tracer Specifying the Fill or Crosshatch Area The selected objects must completely enclose the area you want to crosshatch or fill For example to crosshatch the object below you would select all of the lines making up the part including the holes The exterior lines define the boundary for the crosshatching or solid fill The two holes tell DraftBoard that those enclosed areas within the original area should not be crosshatched or filled A a in vf i at a A o e ne ee ner To crosshatch Select only the Do not select a rectangle boundaries extraneous lines ii Hatching and Filling Once you have selected the lines and holes you can choose the Hatch Fill Crosshatch or the Fill command from the Pen menu and s
371. pplies the unit specified in the Units dialog box from Preferences If the entry does not fall with in the valid range from 0 to 0 039 Inch or 10 mm DraftBoard prompts you with an alert box similar to the following one Alert Please make a valid entry for the Pen Weight Only values between 0 mm and 10 mm 0 39 are allowed 4 Click OK All existing lines drawn in the pen weight you edited will be changed to reflect the new weight as will all future lines will be drawn in that weight The new pen weights are valid until the end of the current DraftBoard Session or you define another pen weight Clicking Cancel ignores all changes made to any pen weights and closes the Edit Pen Weights dialog box Undoing a Pen Weight Edit You cannot undo editing a pen weight with the Undo command To return a pen back to DraftBoard s default you will need to enter the original value in the Edit Pen Weight dialog box following the steps described above Saving edited Pen Weights permanently Edited pen weights affect only the pen weights in the current file To save the edited pen weights so that they are available in all future files choose the Save Preferences command from the Preferences sub menu of the Layout menu Setting the Environment Line Patterns DraftBoard Unlimited allows to specify 19 line patterns in addition to 11 predefined line patterns Pattern This command in the Pen menu sets the Pat
372. prove the approximation the number of times indicated in the Max Iteration field The default value is 3 Setting a high value will decrease performance Mitered Joint If you mark this option the offset object will have square external corners instead of filleted corners This option is by default not selected The radius of the filleted corners is automatically set to the offset distance For instance a box that is offset by 25 will have a fillet at each corner with a radius of 25 Grouped If this option is marked the new offset geometry will be grouped when created This option is by default not selected to produce ungrouped geometty Creating an Offset 1 Select the object you want to offset Select the Offset command in the Edit menu 2 3 Click into the Offset Distance field 4 Input an offset distance by dragging between any two points on the drawing area Sr Click into one of the Ref entry fields 6 Input an offset direction by dragging between any two points on the drawing area 7 Click the Options button Specify in the Options dialog box a Tolerance if needed and whether or not the object will be offset with mitered corners The new geometry will be created as a group and will leave the original geometry selected Editing objects The asterisk indicates that you may use the cursor to input an offset distance by dragging between any two points on the drawing area The cursor must be in the Offset
373. py Step Angle The number of degrees between the center of the selected object and the center of the first copy Rotated Copies are rotated relative to the angle between the Objects copies Each single arbitrary point of all copies have the same distance to the center of the circular array That means that any point of the object can be the reference point Upright Copies are upright with respect to the selected object Objects This option requires a reference point Ref X Ref Y The reference point for the Upright Objects option Ref X and Ref Y determine an imaginary point dupli cated around the center as specified The selected objects are reproduced in the same position relative to each imaginary point that is duplicated With the option Rotated Objects the reference point has a constant distance to the center of the circular array Using Polar Duplicate 1 Select the object to be duplicated Choose Polar Duplicate from the Edit menu 2 3 Enter the number of objects in the circular array 4 Click the Center X box 5 Move the pointer to the drawing area and click to indicate the center for the array of copies The values for Center X and Center Y appear in the entry boxes 6 Specify Upright or Rotated objects by clicking a button 7 If you specified Upright click a location for the reference point in the drawing area 8 If you do not want the copies in a complete circle click the Total or Step Angle button
374. r ence data The Reference Line of the welding symbol is created with a closed forked at the end Creating a welding symbol 1 Choose the Welding Symbols command in the Dimension menu The Welding Symbols dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the appropriate data to create the welding symbol by Some pop up menus have selecting symbols from the pop up menus and entering data in an option button in front be Tone oi of the menu You have to REED en mark this button first before 3 Mark the option No additional if no complementary indications are you can select any value required or one of the options Only Text or Boxed Text if com inci Me Pepa plementary indications are required 4 Indicate the location of the welding symbol The Message Line displays the instructions you need Editing a welding symbol Once you have created a Welding Symbol you may wish to make chances 1 Select the Welding Symbol you wish to edit 2 Choose the Welding Symbols command in the Dimension menu The Welding Symbols dialog box is displayed Make the changes you want in the Welding Symbol dialog box 4 Click the Edit button The Welding Symbol changes accordingly It is not possible to modify the Font Size or Font Style using the Edit button in the Welding Symbol dialog box It is not possible to change the default Plotter font The Font Size can be modified in the dimension editor but will affect only newly created Welding Symbols Closing the Welding Sym
375. r chamfer smart walls you have to ungroup them with the Ungroup command in the Arrange menu It is recommended that you place all symbols before you ungroup and fillet chamfer the walls since ungrouped walls loose their smart features such as automatic trimming Select only the wall segments not any placed symbols if you want to ungroup a wall 19 Creating Geometry Parametrics works with some but not all wall configurations If you use parametrics turn on the point display Show Points on the Layout menu and dimension to the displayed points rather than to the lines Keep in mind that double walls obscure the fact that smart walls are actually single lines lf DraftBoard can t create the arc tangent to an object it will define an alternate construction 20 wall to another position the wall will automatically be closed at the old position and be cut open at the new position If you want to use the Smart Wall feature for single lines you have to create the lines with the Smart Wall tool and enter 0 for the thickness of the wall Arc Tools You can use the Arc tools on the tool palette to create an arc by any of three methods e Center Point Arc e 3 Point Arc e Tangent Point Arc As you create each arc the status line displays entries such as coordinate locations radius angle from horizontal and delta angle The arc is drawn with the current pen specifications for color weight and pattern
376. r selected objects appear in a Color which you can change with this setting If you have a monochrome monitor selected objects blink If you have a color monitor you can also specify blinking with or without color Indicating the Selection 1 Choose the Selection command from the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu The Selection dialog box is displayed Selection Show selection by C Blinking 2 Select the option Blinking and or Color To choose a color move the pointer to the color box and click into the box to display the choices Drag to the color you want and release or click the color 3 Click the OK button Once the selection color is changed all current and future selected items appear in the new color until you quit Draft Board Selection Process Selecting an object does not affect the properties of the object A selected object is highlighted but this highlighting goes away once the object is deselected While points and objects are selected in a similar way point selection is controlled by the Selectable Points setting in the Edit menu For this reason selecting objects and selecting points are discussed separately Selection Tools The Selection tool palette contains all tools for selecting objects Objects can be selected by clicking by dragging a Selection Marque around a group of objects by dragging a Line over objects or by drawing a Selection Polygon around objects In the
377. r as well as the angle length and height of the rectangle Length is the selected status box If you modify the Angle in the status line the rectangle is rotated around its center point when you press the Enter key Inscribed Polygon Tool This tool draws a regular polygon where the radius of the circum scribing circle determines the location of the polygon s vertices The default polygon is a hexagon but you can specify the number of sides in the status line Note The status line shows a diameter for the circle the standard way of describing a polygon inscribed in a circle 25 Creating Geometry 26 Using the Inscribed Polygon tool Click the center of the polygon and a point on the circumference of the circumscribing circle Or e Drag from the center of the polygon to a point on the circumference of the circumscribing circle You can create a copy of the last inscribed polygon by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and clicking where you want the center X Y DJ Sides 6 The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center the diameter of the circle defining the polygon and the number of sides Diameter is the default status line selection and the default number of sides is six Circumscribed Polygon Tool This tool draws a regular polygon for which the radius of the circle determines the midpoint of the sides The default shape is
378. r for the icon size of the light source The default factor is 25 4 Color and Intensity of the light source can be specified with the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu The default co or is white and the default factor for the intensity is 0 5 Placing a Point Light 1 Display the Trackball and choose an Isometric or Trimetric view 2 Turn off the Default Lighting using the Visualization command from the Preferences menu in the Layout menu 3 Select Wireframe in the View Mode submenu since the light soutce icon is only displayed in the wireframe view mode 4 Select the Point Light tool from the Light Palette The Status Line displays entry boxes for the x y and Z coordinates for the exact position and an entry field for the factor for the icon size of the light source The default factor is 25 4 5 Specify with a mouse click on the drawing area the Location for the Point Light An icon for the Point Light source appears on the screen in that location 6 If the size of the light source is too small or too large change the scale factor in the status line accordingly and press the Enter key 7 Choose Shaded in the View Mode submenu to display your geometry with your specified light settings 8 If necessary change the color and intensity of the light source using the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu see as well Editing Light sources at the end of this chapter Parallel Light With the Parallel Light tool you
379. r has a dot the hoz spot showing the next point you should specify The dot changes position on the pointer during each step of the construction Hot Spot The smart pointer shows you where to click next For example the Opposite Point Circle pointer illustrated above shows that the first click of the mouse places a point on one edge of the circle you re creating After you click a location the hot spot moves to the other side of the pointer showing that the next click places a point on the opposite edge of the circle e lt Your first click aa The hot spot moves to the other side of the smart pointer to indicate the next step 15 Creating Geometry You can set the number of decimal places or fractional round off with the precision entry in the Units dialog box from Preferences in the Layout menu You can enter up to 10 characters in each Entry field of the Status line Notice how each method affects the selection of the contents of the status box Clicking once inside the box places the cursor where you clicked If you double click inside the box the entire entry is selected so you can change it 16 After you click the second location the circle appears The hot spot moves back to its original position on the pointer so that you can create another circle o The Status Line Whenever you select a tool from the Tool palette the Status Line appears along the bottom of the drawing atea It conta
380. radius or to zoom in on the drawing to separate the con struction points visually see also Hit Radius in this chapter 36 Using tangents and perpendiculars If you press a point on an arc or circle and drag the pointer away at about a 45 angle the Drawing Assistant locks onto the tangent If you drag away at a 90 angle the Drawing Assistant locks onto a perpendicular Tangent tangent Perpendicular Lotrechte If you continue holding down the mouse button the line remains tangent ot perpendicular while you drag the ending point around the object This is a very useful feature if for example you want to create a line from and tangent to an existing circle to the tangent point of another circle Tangente Once a line is tangent to the circle it can be dragged to the tangent point on the other circle with the tangency maintained at both ends Cy E Keyboard Snap Points You can direct the Drawing Assistant to snap onto an object For example you may want to start a new line from the exact center of a circle If you hold down the mouse button and press the c key on your keyboard the Drawing Assistant finds the center of the circle when you move the pointer near the center Important Keyboard Snap Points are not active until you have set the first construction point of any drawing or editing tool Using the Drawing Assistant for snapping onto geometry The following table lists the keys for finding specific p
381. rafting Before you choose the Drawing Size command in the Layout menu you should use zoom out until your drawing fills half the screen size The Cancel Button on the Drawing Size dialog box doesn t abort changes if a Fit or Apply are applied first If you want to change the Page orientation of the displayed page boundary you have to use the Print Setup Command Mac intosh Page Setup 156 When you choose the Drawing Size command the following dialog box is displayed Drawing Size O Always Display Page Bounds CO Keep Text Size O Keep Dimension Text Size Tiled Printing Pages Across i Down i Page Order O The Drawing Size dialog box allows the following settings Always display Page Bounds Keep Text Size Keep Dimension Text Size Drawing Scale When you check this option the rectangle for the printing plotting region is always displayed at its true size in the drawing area even if the Drawing Size dialog box is closed When this option is checked tex is not scaled but keeps the tex size set before scaling When this option is checked dimensions are not scaled but keep the tex size set before scaling under Preferences in the Dimension menu In the Scale box you enter a scale factor for your drawing specifying the ratio between the printed and the true size of your drawing To specify a scale you can press the arrow beside the Scale box and drag to one of the
382. range menu 4 Create a framework on which the grouped geometry sits 5 Dimension between two contro points You can use only one If you include a dimension variable per group as part of the group the di mension will change when 6 Select the framework the dimension and the group you resolve the group It will not be used as part of 7 Choose Resolve from the Parametrics submenu of the Edit the parametric solver menu 8 Enter the value for the distance between the control points 9 Click OK Rigid Links You can group geometry into a rigid body and then attach the rigid body to parametric geometry in at least two points When you resolve the parametric geometry the rigid body will undergo the same geometric transformation The following example shows a real life example of using parametrics with grouped objects Begin with a basic shape that resolves properly as shown in the part below Then add the thread groups When you resolve the part the threads also resolve o 41 Y Add and group these lines D e 1D 2 a Be sure these groups match the endpoints ThreadDia 2 on the geometry OD 2 Era 213 Parametrics 214 In the next example you can see the usual method of parametric drafting followed by an example showing how using parametrics with groups can simplify making changes to the part D 4 D 4 showing how using parametrics with groups can simplify making changes to the p
383. rawing Area All objects are created modified and annotated on the drawing area You can imagine this drawing area as an infinite large sheet of paper on which you can create any type of geometry object at its original size Using the Scroll bars on the left and lower side of the drawing window you can move the sheet up and down or right and left You can display different parts of the drawing sheet by dragging the slider of a scroll bar to the approximate location Message Line The Message Line across the top of the drawing area provides concise instructions for the use of the current tool For example after selecting the Center Point Circle tool the Message Line appears as illustrated below Center Point Circle Pick center Ctrl Copy previous The instructions in the Message Line for some tools also indicate optional activities For example if you hold down the Control Windows or Option Macintosh key while using the Center Point Circle tool the next mouse click creates a copy of the last circle with the center placed where you clicked Smart Pointer When you select a tool and move the pointer into the drawing area the pointer shape is representative of the tool Some of the pointers like the single line pointer are simple cross hairs Others such as the Opposite Point Circle pointer resemble the tool itself The pointer called a smart pointer displays indicators for multi step procedures Each smart pointe
384. rcles and other round elements in a hatch pattern file To simulate circular elements use a series of very short dashes To make it easier to read your hatch pattern code use tabs and spaces to format the code into nice columns like this Angle x y origin x y offset dash codes 37 5 0 0 1 123 1 567 1 0 5 2 0 5 The hatch description file Extended pat shipping can be modified for the creation of your own patterns You find this file in the DraftBoard folder Scripts VSG Hatches Dimensions Associative Dimensions Dimension Tools Dimension Settings Dimension Attributes Parametric Dimensions GD amp T Surface Symbols Welding Symbols Dimensions The Dimension menu contains commands fot displaying the palette of dimensioning tools and for all dimension settings Associative Dimensions DraftBoard s geometric dimensions are associative when you make a change to the geometry the dimension changes also This associativity is a tremendous time saver because dimensions auto matically update whenever you make a change in the geometry You can even change the units from English to Metric one setting in the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu and every dimension on your drawing will reflect the change When you extend a line by selecting the endpoint of the line and dragging it to a new position the dimension changes also because the dimension has a contro point at the same position of the line end point So when yo
385. reviews your construction Notice that after completing a line the Message Line says Ctrl Copy Macintosh Option copy This indicates that if you hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and click once in the drawing area a line will appear that is identical to the one just drawn The location of the click designates the location of the first point x Y dX dY A The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the beginning the relative location of the end delta X and delta Y the line length and the angle from horizontal Once a line is drawn the line Length is the selected status box Drawing a line perpendicular to another object 1 Construct the line or spline 2 Move the pointer to the object until a Drawing Assistant on notation appears 3 Drag straight away from the object in a perpendicular direction 4 Drag the extent of the line Drawing a line tangent to or perpendicular to a curve 1 Construct an arc circle or ellipse 2 Choose the Single Line tool 3 Move the pointer to the arc until a Drawing Assistant On notation appears The Drawing Assistant notation must be om rather than endpoint quadrant or midpoint 4 Drag in the appropriate direction straight out for perpendicular or at an angle for tangent until the Drawing Assistant perpen dicular or tangent notation appears 5 When the Drawing Assistant locks on to perpendicu
386. riable This value defines at which increment per step the simulation should be calculated The differ ence between the starting and the ending value should be divisible by the step value only active if When you mark this option you can specify a limiting value for the selected variable that defines at which value the variable will be included into the calculation When you mark this option you can specify a limiting value for the selected variable that defines at which value the simulation will be stopped Table This command allows you to write the calculated values for each step into a table When you click the Table button the following dialog box 1s displayed Create Table Data record name In the Table dialog box you can enter a name for each calculated step data record Each record contains the specified names and selected variables If you simulate for example a rectangle with the values shown in the graphic above and 5 Increments per Step you will get a table with the following recotds Calculated values for the variables Data record width and hight name ww Rectangle 5 times 10 Rectangle 6 times 20 Rectangle 7 times 30 Rectangle 8 times 40 Rectangle 9 times 50 VAR file The Table button creates a VAR File that you can use to create table based symbol libraries see as well under Symbols in this manual Options When you click the Option button the following dialog box i
387. rief message appears when you choose Save and the program pauses while it updates the information Save As This command in the File menu saves the current document A dialog box appears so you can name the current document give it a different name or save it to a different folder Saving a document with a different name WIN 1 Choose the Save As command from the File menu The Save as dialog box appears 2 If necessary display a different folder 3 Type the name you want to use in the File name box 4 Select the type of file you want to save the drawing as in the Save as type dialog box 5 Either press Return or click Save Saving a document with a different name MAC 1 Choose the Save As command from the File menu The Save as dialog box appears 2 If necessary display a different folder 3 Type the name you want to use in the File name box 4 Hither press Return or click Save Making a backup You should make a backup of your work in case you make many changes and want to go back to the original version You can use the Save As command in the File menu and save the file with another name or use the AutoSave feature described in the next section Auto Save This command in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu directs DraftBoard to save a backup copy of your work periodically If your computer hangs up for any reason the work you did up to the last Auto Save will be recoverable The number of files
388. ries made in the Status Line 128 45 48 44 45 XXX R Upper yyy xxx limits 48 m 45 3 xxxztol Tey xxx basic A _xxx_ not to scale Upper 3 Lower 3 Click the Dim Text button The Dimension Text dialog box is displayed 4 Enter a value for the folerance text size into the Tol Text size field This value specifies the tex size for tolerances in percentage of the dimension text size 5 Click OK The Dimension Text dialog box is closed 6 Close the Dimension Editor by clicking the Close box in the upper left corner of the Dimension Editor 7 Draw a line 8 Select a linear dimension from the Dimension Tool palette such as the Horizontal Dimension tool and dimension the line 9 Enter in the status line values for the upper and lower tolerance limits 10 Press the Enter key The dimension is redrawn and displays the tolerance limits you specified The specified tolerance limits become the default limits until you enter different values while dimensioning Entering Text into the Tolerance fields Instead of typing in numbers to calculate the tolerances you can also enter text such as H7 in the upper and lower entry fields of the status line or even leave one of these fields empty The dimension will reflect exactly what you have entered in the status line When you enter text in the status line you should use the upper lower tolerance
389. rinting plotting region 153 tiled 158 toa file 157 TrueType Fonts on Pen Plotters 104 ProE Render 193 Q quadrant drawing assistant 35 quit command 188 R radial dimensions 187 rectangle tools 24 123 recent file list redo command 90 redraw screen command 150 Registration 312 registration 10 Registrierung 312 relimit tool 83 remove dots command 66 resolve command 203 revolve command 275 right view 253 right hand rule 267 rotate tool 84 rotating objects command 276 rules 3D construction rules 276 right hand rule of revolution 276 right hand rule 267 scaling 155 S save command 187 saving drawing areas com mand 149 scaling drawing scale and paper 152 drawing size 154 151 line patterns and crosshatch 154 object geometry 155 104 text and dimensions 153 size 155 drawings full scale patterns 154 rules text 154 view scale 173 screen redraws views 150 segment tool 83 selection indicating 72 intersecting areas 74 invisible points 76 of overlapped objects 73 Index points 76 preferences 58 select all command 73 75 select by line 74 select by polygon 74 selectable points command 76 selection command 72 selection mask command 75 selection tool 72 send to back command 95 171 set plane to screen command shaded comand 289 176 sheet into view command 166 168 send to back views 271 Sheet camera 173 sheet view 165
390. rk plane of Draft Board is equivalent to the World Coordinate System and any nonstandard temporary work plane is equivalent to the User Coordinate System If you create a work plane with the 3 Point Plane command it is named Temp and will exist only for the duration of the current DraftBoard session You can rename the Temp work plane with the Define Plane command to make it permanent There can be only one plane called Temp Plane in a document If another plane is created using the 3 Point Plane command without changing the name of the first the new Temp Plane replaces the old one To display the Grid with Origin select Show Grid in the Layout menu 267 3D Modelling Relative Coordinates also called User Coordinates are very useful if you want to draw relative to existing objects The Set Origin command allows you to move the Coordinate Reference Pointto another location The current position of the origin will be only visible when the Grid is displayed using the Show Grid com mand in the Layout menu You just must follow the directions on the Message Line when using the 3 Point Plane command Be aware that modifying the orientation of the work plane doesn t automatically mean that you will work on a visible face The view ori entation must be adjusted accordingly 268 Another way to explain the relationship presented in the graphics above is to remember the role of the Drawing Assistant
391. rns DraftBoard offers a wide variety of DIN and ANSI hatch patterns with editable pattern spacing and angle You will find these hatches organized in groups such as metals fluids etc in the Hatch dialog box Adding and specifying Hatch Patterns In addition to the hatch patterns shipping with DraftBoard you can use all hatch patterns that are compatible with the hatch format pat of AutoCAD When you copy these hatch files into the DraftBoard folder DraftBoard Scripts VSG Hatches the file name is auto matically displayed in the Crosshatch dialog box If the file contains more than one hatch pattern the name is followed by an ellipsis When you double click the file name all patterns contained in the file are displayed How to define your own hatch patterns is described under Hatches in the Appendix of this manual Adding Plotter Fonts In addition to the plotter fonts shipping with DraftBoard you can use all plotter fonts that are compatible with the file format shx of AutoCAD When you copy these files into the Fonts folder of the DraftBoard folder the new fonts are displayed in the Fonts submenu after relaunching DraftBoard When you want to print TrueType Fonts on pen plotters you must use a WinLINE Plus Plotter Driver Look for more information about WinLINE Plus in the Internet under www winline com 67 Selecting Objects Objects Indicating Selection Selection Process Selecting objects Selecting Objects
392. rs as well you proceed as follows 1 2 Create a new folder with the name of the future library Copy all symbols you want to assign to this library into the new folder Choose the Library command from the Symbols submenu The Libraries dialog box is displayed Click the New button The Set Libraries File dialog box is displayed Overwrite the default name Library vlb with the name of the new folder containing the copied symbols Save the vlb file in the newly created folder Click OK The dialog box is closed and the new library is added to the existing symbol libraries with the default name Library 1 8 Select Library 1 Library 1 is displayed in the Rename field 9 Overwrite Library 1 with the name of the newly created folder using the Rename button 10 Click the Rename button The new library name is displayed in the Library list field 11 Select the new library 12 Click the Add button in the Symbols section The Add Symbols dialog box is displayed 13 Select the new library folder 14 Select the first copied Symbol file 15 Click the Open button The dialog box is closed and the new symbol is added to the Symbol list of the selected library 16 Modify the file name of the new symbol if required using the Rename button 17 Repeat steps 12 to 16 until you have assigned all symbols to the new library 18 Click the Save button and close the Library dialog box 19 Quit DraftBoard 20
393. s 1 2 3 4 5 6 All values you enter use 7 the current units set in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu 8 When you have selected the option Extrude Surfaces the object is extruded and surfaced the same time See as well the section NURB Surfaces in the next chapter 274 Select the Top view from the Views submenu in the Views menu Draw the side of the bracket using the Connected Line tool Select the geometry if it is not already selected Select Trimetric from the Views submenu in the Views menu The side view of the bracket is aligned rimetrically Choose the Extrude command from the 3D menu The Extrude dialog box is displayed Click in one of the direction entry fields and drag then with the mouse a vector along the z axis in the drawing area to indicate the direction and distance of the extrusion drag in this direction The values dragged for the direction and the distance of the extrusion are automatically entered into the Direction boxes Overwrite the length of the vector dragged in the dx box with the desired height of the bracket Positive and negative values are allowed Click the OK button The object is extruded a 2D Geometry Extruded Geometry me Tip Before you extrude any 2D geometry you should consider which face of the object shows the most detail and whether the extrusion will be uniform or not if some portions of the part do have different dimension
394. s Depending on these considerations you should draw the 2D geometry Revolve The Revolve command copies and revolves a 2D object into a 3D object around a specified revolution axis When you select the Revolve command from the 3D menu the following dialog box is displayed Sweep Angle of Steps a Origin X y 20 7 Axis dx 0 av s1 77076 dz o Cancel The Revolve dialog box contains the following elements Sweep Angle In this field you enter the number of degrees Sweep Angle for the revolution of Steps In this field you enter the number of copies or divisions Origin In these entry fields you enter the coordinates for the Startpoint of the Revolution axis Axis In these entry fields you enter the coordinates for the Endpoint of the Revolution axis Revolve When you select this option the 2D geometry is Surface surfaced the same time is revolved Revolving objects To revolve a 2D object into a 3D object you begin by drawing half of the object on an axis for revolving 1 Draw the geometry to be revolved as in the following graphic 2 Select the geometry if it is not already selected 3 Choose the Revolve command from the 3D menu The Revolve dialog box is displayed 4 Specify the Sweep Angle 360 for the revolution 5 Specify the number of copies 2 in the of Steps entry field 6 Click the Origin Szartpoind of the revolution axis 7 Click the other end Endpoin
395. s When you want to add new formats is recommended to modify existing ones and save them under a different name Creating Drawing formats for Laser printers 1 10 11 12 13 Open a drawing format in the Layout folder of the DraftBoard folder Save the drawing under a new name Select the Drawing Size command in the Layout menu The Drawing Size dialog box is displayed Mark the option Display always Page Bounds The Printing area of your active Laser Printer is displayed as a grey rectangle Click OK The Drawing Size command is closed Mark the grouped drawing format on the drawing arca and ungroup with the Ungroup command in the Arrange menu Adjust the border lines of the drawing format until they are exactly aligned with the displayed grey rectangle for the printing area of your laser printer Delete all cutting lines since they are not required for print outs on a laser printer In case you want only to import the modified drawing format and not to use 1t with the Sheet Into View command you may delete the existing detail views To delete a detail view by selecting the Delete command in the menu of the detail view Hide the TitleBlocks Layer All Text Entries are hidden Select the complete drawing format using the Select all command in the Edit menu and group the format using the Group com mand in the Arrange menu Activate the layer TitleBlocks Save your work The Drawing size co
396. s displayed Options Layerl color Layerl color Green v Track curves on Green v Track geometry on Check collision with geometry on layer Layerl x O Stop simulation at first collision point Record collision points on layer Layerl iv The Options dialog box allows the following settings Track curves on In these list fields you can select a Layer and a Color for the tracked curve Track geometry on In these list fields you can select a Layer and a Color for the tracked geometry Check collision with In this list field you select the layer that geometry on layer Stop simulation at first collision point Record collision points on layer contains the geometry for the collision check If you mark this option for the collision check the simulation is stopped at the first possible collision point If you mark this option for the collision check you can select a layer on which all collision points will be recorded Parametrics Calculate Motion 1 Create a part that you would like to animate including its parametric dimensions Use as parametric variables an angle or a variable that allows a kinematic calculation 2 Select the complete part including its parametric dimensions with the Selection tool 3 Test the part using the Resolve command in the Parametric submenu from the Edit menu to be sure it resolves properly 4 Choose the Calculate motion
397. s P o ter fonts to create the symbol so the font corresponds to ANSI standards since the sizes of other fonts are not always consistent with ANSI standards It is not possible to change the default P otter font The default font size is 3 5 mm When you want to use another font size you must modify the font size in the dimension editor before placing the Welding Symbol The Welding Symbols dialog box resembles a Welding Symbol Supplementary Symbols Combined Symbols Elementary Symbols No Additionals e Text O Boxed Text 2 No Dashline A O r Al Edit Reference Line Fork Complementary Indications OL Dimensioning Dimensioning Arrow Line Combined Symbols Elementary Symbols Dashed Reference Line The Welding Symbols dialog box contains besides several Text entry fields some pop up menus from which you can select symbols or predefined values Basic Symbol The displayed basic Welding Symbol contains an Arrow Line a Reference Line an optional Upper and Lower Dashed Reference Line and the forked end of the Reference Line for complementary in dications The dashed Reference Line indicates whether the joint should be welded from the Reference Side Dashed Line above the Reference Line or from the opposite side Dashed Line below Dashed Reference Line
398. s always the definition values of the current work plane either of a selected Standard Plane or of a Temporary Plane The Redefine dialog box contains the following elements Origin These entry boxes display the coordinates for the Origin of the work plane You can type in new values or indicate the new location of the origin with a mouse click on the drawing area Right The Right entry boxes display values for the direction of the x axis You can type in new values or indicate the new direction of the x axis with the mouse on the drawing area Up The Up entry boxes display values for the direction of the y axis You can type in new values or indicate the new direction of the y axis with the mouse on the drawing area OK Clicking the OK button closes the Redefine dialog box and in case the Redefine dialog box was displayed using the New button a new plane is added to the Planes list in the Define dialog box In case the Redefine dialog box was displayed using the Redefine button the orientation of the selected plane is redefined Specifying a new work plane Two different methods exist for defining a plane By a temporary plane 1 Define a temporary plane using the 3 Point Plane command 2 Select the Define Plane command in the 3D menu The Define Plane dialog box is displayed listing the temporary plane in the Planes list box 3 Select the TempPlane in the Planes list box and rename the plane in the Rename entry box
399. s ate extended or shortened to create the corner Creating a corner 1 Click the Corner Trim tool 2 Click each object You can also press and hold the Shift key and click inside the about to be created corner There are no status line entries Extending lines to a theoretical intersection If you want to extend a line to its theoretical intersection with another line first click the line to be extended then hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and click the line that is not to be trimmed Transformation Tools These tools on the tool palette move rotate expand ot shrink stretch and mirror objects Select the object you want to transform before you select the Transformation tool You can copy at the same time you transform objects by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while you specify the transformation When you press the Shift key you can select additional objects after you have selected a Transformation tool As soon as you release the Shift key the transformation tool is active again Move Tool This tool moves the selected objects to a new location You can copy the selection by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while you select the objects If you select more than one object they remain in the same position relative to each other Moving objects 1 Select the object s to be moved 2 Select the Move tool If necessary use Shift Click to select more objects 3
400. s data format when you want to export the calculated surfaces as NURB Surfaces that you want to use in other CAD programs Polygon Surfaces The following formats will tessallate 3D Models by creating triangulated surface patches The export with these formats is based on the settings in the 3D Export dialog in the Preference submenu of the Layout menu DXF DWG When you use the DXF DWG Export format all calculated NURB surfaces will be converted to Polygon surfaces This format is recommended for exporting surfaces into Animation and Render programs STL This format exports only three dimensional structured surfaces and surfaced objects as polygon meshes This format is recommended for prototyping SLP This format from Pro E is recommended for Rendering 3D models Graphics EPS For the export of surfaced objects especially when using the Shaded and Hidden Lines view modes into Text and Layout programs you should use the EPS option This format guarantees a high quality and allows to scale the graphic after the export 3D Export Settings All export settings will be configured automatically or will be defined using option buttons contained in the export dialogs for the specific data interfaces Only for the export of 3D models you can define some general defaults using the Export 3D command in the Preference submenu of the Layout menu Export 3D When you select this command the following dialog box is displayed Mesh Contr
401. s dialog box Enter the names in the Rename field exactly as shown here The bullet is not part ofthe name and should not be entered Therefore Numerical at tributes are not displayed in the Status Line since DraftBoard calculates the values automatically as long as they are defined in the Define Attributes dia log box Bill of Materials can extract the values of parametrical variables only when the variable s name begins with a Capital letter Therefore should be the first letter of all parametrical variables you want to use in a BOM a Capital letter If you specify a layer name in a value table or when inserting a symbol that doesn t exist it will be automatically created when inserting the symbol 239 Geometric Analysis Numerical and parametrical attributes will not be assigned You must them therefore hide before assigning any non numerical attributes If you want to assign at tributes to an object which is made up of several indi vidual objects like a rec tangle which is made up of four single lines you should group the object before assigning attributes Otherwise the attributes will be assigned to each individual object that is selected 240 Changing the characteristics of an Attribute 1 Select the attribute in the Define Attribute dialog box whose name value ot format you want to change 2 Type a new name or value or choose a new attribute format 3 Lock or unlock th
402. s faster than using the Copy and Paste commands in the Edit menu The Copy com mand is very useful for copying to a different document or application Sizing Objects with Tools Normally you size an object with the Selection tool or the Expand Shrink tool In some cases it is useful to use the move tool for sizing objects Sizing an object with the Selection Tool You can stretch objects by selecting a point and dragging it to a new location A line can be dragged to a new length u Intersecting lines can be dragged to new lengths 1 Be certain that Selectable Points is set in the Edit menu 2 Click the Selection tool 3 Drag a selection marquee around the control points that represent the area you want to stretch 4 Drag the points to a new location Sizing an object with the Move Tool You can also size an object with the Move tool Using the Move tool allows you to specify the distance the selected point s should be moved by specific values along the x and y direction in the status line To move the corner of the rectangle in the next graphic with the Move tool you proceed as follows 1 Be certain that Selectable Points is set in the Edit menu 2 Click the Selection tool 3 Drag a selection marquee around the lower right corner of the rectangle 4 Click the Move tool 5 Enter 1 in the X entry box and 1 in the y entry box in the status line 6 Press the Enter key The corner
403. s line enter the distance you want the chamfer from the corner The default distance is 5 mm 3 Click each line making up the corner you want chamfered You can also hold down the Shift key and click once inside the corner you want to chamfer The lines are automatically trimmed or extended If you hold down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key while you select the objects to chamfer the objects are not trimmed M5 The status line allows you to specify the distance Length from the chamfer to the intersection of the corner lines Angular Chamfer This tool creates a chamfer at the specified angle and distance from the corner The specified angle is the angle between the chamfer and the second line of the corner The specified length is the distance be tween the corner and the intersection of the chamfer and the second line of the corner The default distance is 0 5 mm and the default an gle is 45 Adding a chamfer 1 Click the Angular Chamfer tool 2 In the status line enter the length you want the intersection of the chamfer and the second line of the corner from the corner The default length is 0 5 mm 3 In the status line enter the angle you want between the chamfer and the second side The default angle is 45 4 Click each line making up the corner you want chamfered You can also hold down the Shift key and click once inside the corner you want to chamfer The lines are automatically trim
404. s list box Macros can call other macros if 60 Setting the Environment they are in the Utilities menu This is done by clicking on the relevant entry in the Utilities menu like any other menu item This feature allows a macro to call another macto which in turn could call the original macro Such Infinite Loops are checked when an attempt is made to include a macro and if detected an alert box is posted resulting in the macro not being included Names list In this list box all names of the macros defined are box displayed alphabetically When one of the items is selected with the cursor the Strokes and the Com mands list boxes as well as the Key and In Utilities Menu fields are automatically filled in with the relevant data that defines the selected macro Strokes list The Strokes list box shows a group of stroke com box mands if any that can run the selected macro The names in this list box relate to the encoding of the shape of the stroke and you need not be concerned about them It is optional to associate a stroke to define a macto Commands The Commands list box shows the set of menu that list box define this macro They are shown in this form Key MenuName EntryName You can assign your own key combinations for a macro by clicking in the Key edit box and entering the key combination or typing it directly in the Key entry field For example enter Ctrl and F1 by pressing the Control key first keepin
405. s list box to the Main or Sub palettes using the Arrow buttons Using the Arrow buttons showing in the opposite direction you will move functions from a Palette to the Functions list box 5 Click the Save button Removing a single Function 1 Select the Add Functions command in the Extra menu The Add Functions dialog box is displayed 2 Select an icon of a function in one of the palettes you want to remove from the palette 3 Click the appropriate Arrow button The selected function is moved from the Palette list to the Functions list 4 Click the Save button Removing all Functions 1 Select the Add Functions command in the Utilities menu The Add Functions dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Clear button All functions are moved from the palettes to the Functions list 3 Click the Save button All functions are removed from the palettes The function icon is always copied as well to the sub palette since it is as well the first icon of a possible subpalette When you delete a source code file in the Function folder of the DraftBoard directory the related func tion is automatically re moved from the Function palette when DraftBoard is launched again 65 Setting the Environment Before you can use this command you must add it to the Utilities menu using the Add Command command in the same menu See as well under Adding Commanas in this chapter When you want to move the inserted text along the li
406. s may have any number of edges and any number of holes in the face 2 Planar surfaces should have no geometry that would act as a seam running across the face but only geometry that either represents a boundary or hole Non planar surfaces are not allowed to have more than 4 edges Non planar surfaces are not allowed to have any holes 5 When extruding circles to make cylinders the extrusion line must be connected to the endpoints vertex of both circles Circles extruded into cylinders are not allowed to have more than one extrusion line 7 When doing a Revolve operation use 1 or 2 for of Steps Only for 360 Revolutions the of Steps should be 3 or 4 If revolving a circle the Axis of Revolution should run through an endpoint vertex the Revolution Angle should be 90 and the of Steps should be 2 8 Wireframe geometry must be always connected endpoint to endpoint Don t have overlapping or duplicate lines on top of each other The only exception to this is the next rule 9 Boundary lines of surfaces may be divided by the boundary line of a second surface into two separate line segments at most If a boundary line is broken into three pieces the Auto surfacing routine will fail Automatic divisions occur only with ungronped objects 10 Whenever you want to return to the original wireframe geometry after having autosurfaced a part use the Undo command instead of the Ungroup command 11 When wor
407. s necessary since DraftBoard scales existing text and dimensions with the same scale factor as the object geometry and keeps text size and dimension text size only for future text and dimensions which are added after scaling Text and dimensions you place after scaling will be displayed at true size even if the options Keep Text Size and Dimension Text Size are active or scaling was executed with the Sheet Into View command Plotter Fonts When you are using a plotter and the text should be displayed at its accurate size you should specify a plotter font for text and dimensions on your drawing since all other fonts are proportional and may differ in their appearance slightly from the assigned size You can also specify different text styles such as zZalic or bold for plot ter fonts in the Text menu and generate special characters and accents as described in the Appendix of this manual Scaling Rules While scaling the different elements of a drawing behave as follows object geometry is always scaled line and hatch patterns are never scaled text and dimensions are not scaled if the options keep text size and keep dimension text size are active text and dimensions are always scaled if the options keep text size and keep dimension text size are not checked To keep text and dimensions at a constant size while scaling and having the options keep text size and keep dimension text size not checked you have to e add ext an
408. s the selected status box If you want to draw a square from the center rather than opposite corners use one of the other polygon tools specifying four sides You can t create a rectangle from the center Rectangle Corner Center This tool draws a horizontal or vertical rectangle as a single object using the center point and one corner point of the rectangle Using the Rectangle Corner Center Click the center point and one corner point of the rectangle Or Click the center point and drag to the corner point of the rectangle Dragging displays a rubber band You can create a square by aligning the second point on the 45 construction line You can create a copy of the last rectangle by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and clicking where you want the center point A default 1 inch square is drawn if you have not previously drawn a rectangle X Y Angle Length Width The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center point as well as the angle length and height of the rectangle Length is the selected status box If you modify the Angle in the status line the rectangle is rotated around its center point when you press the Enter key Rectangle Opposite Corners This tool draws a horizontal or vertical rectangle as a single object using the opposite corner points of the rectangle U
409. s the default format and is the choice for all alphanumeric values Text entries like Name Material etc Number Number is the choice for all values which are ex pressed by numbers which can be used for further calculations A part number like S3456 or 252 49 would be formatted as Text since this value would never be used for any kind of calculation If you use hyphens or dashes in your Part Number you must use the Text format not Number An attribute would be formatted as Qty if the Bz of Material should calculate the number of identical objects in a drawing Normally this format only makes sense for an attribute which is named Qty and has the default value 1 Attribute Name In this entry field you specify a general name for the attribute like name material serial number etc Default Value This entry assigns a specific value to the attribute So you could assign the value of steel to the attribute of material The value of an attribute can be changed in the Status Line before assigning it to object geometry or in the Edit Objects dialog box after it has been assigned Defining Attributes 1 Click New to create a new attribute In the Attribute Name entry box the name Attribute 1 is dis played Rename the attribute by typing a name in the Attribute Name entry box like COST Specify a value for the attribute in the Default Value entry box The value you enter here can be changed in the Status Line during
410. s to object geometry in drawings e extracting user defined and predefined attributes in the form of lists or ASCII files for export purposes Attributes Each object you create in DraftBoard has automatically assigned two different kinds of attributes Non numerical attributes like the line co or and the line style Numerical attributes like the perimeter and the area of a circle The Bill of Materials utility allows you to assign in addition User defined Attributes objects like a Part Name or the Part Number which you define and assign to object geometry after you have created the geometry With the Bz of Materials utility you can extract numerical and uset defined Attributes Non numerical attributes like line color and line style are not recognized by the Bz of Materials Defining Attributes For defining attributes you choose the Attributes command from the BOM submenu in the Modules menu Modules Function Fix Fix y Function param BOM gt Attributes MSC Nastran gt Layouts Show Palette Options Attributes This command allows you to define delete redefine and activate attributes Active attributes attributes which can be assigned are indicated by a checkmark in front of the attribute name Locked attributes their val ues cannot be changed during assignment are indicated by a lock icon in front of the checkmark The Attribute command displays the following dialog box 231 Geometri
411. s valid until the end of the current Draft Board session You can save the selected Arrowhead permanently with the Save Preferences command from the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu Arrow size The size of an arrowhead is specified in the Arrow size submenu of the Pen menu Choosing this command displays the following dialog box Arrow Size Arrow Size For the arrow size you can enter a factor in the Arrow size entry box The default factor is 3 5 A modified arrow size is valid until the end of the current DraftBoard session Arrow at Start This command in the Pen menu places an arrowhead at the beginning of selected and subsequent lines and circular arcs You can choose the type of arrowhead from the Arrowheads submenu of the Pen menu A checkmark El indicates the current arrowhead setting No Arrow At Start No Arrow At End Arrow At Start No Arrow At End gt Drawing direction gt No Arrow At Start gt Arrow At End Arrow At Start lt lt Arrow At End Arrow at End This command in the Pen menu places an arrowhead at the end of selected and subsequent lines and circular arcs You can choose the type of arrowhead from the Arrowheads submenu of the Pen menu A check mark indicates the current arrowhead setting Creating arrow lines or arcs 1 Select one or several lines you want to place an arrowhead at the beginning or at the end 2 Cho
412. s you to specify the X Y coordinates representing the endpoints of the diameter 21 Creating Geometry Ellipses do not have center points by design If you draw lines between opposite vertex points on the ellipse then the inter section of the two lines will be the center of the ellipse For a 2 point Center Ellipse inscribed in a rectangle the Drawing Assistant s horizontal and vertical temporary con struction lines will cross at the center point once you have touched two vertex points 22 3 Point Circle Ol This tool draws a circle through the points you select Using the 3 Point Circle tool 1 Click the first point on the circle 2 Drag or click the second and third points Dragging displays the rubberband circle If you place any of the three points on an existing object the circle is drawn through that point If you click an object while holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key the circle is drawn tangent to the object rather than through the indicated point You may combine the placement of these points to create a circle through a specific point of one object and tangent to another object or a circle tangent to three objects or any other combination If you drag the first two points a rubberband image guides your construction y1 x2 Y2 X3 Y3 The status line indicates the X Y coordinates for each of the three points Tangent Point Circle Tool
413. sheet It can be modified using the Properties command in the Detail View menu or using the Zoom tools When you use the Drawing Size command in the Layout menu to scale the entire drawing for printing the specified relation ship between the Detail View and the Sheet remains unchanged Recovering from an erroneous Sheet Into View If you mistakenly invoked the Sheet Into View command and do not want your geometry in a view use Undo to recover If this is not done immediately you must use the following method to manually back out 1 Select all object geometry including text dimensions and hatch patterns 2 Choose the Group command in the Arrange menu 3 Delete all view windows on the current sheet by choosing Delete from the View window menu of each view In the Layout list you find as well Design Layouts called as Design 3 or Draft 4 These Design Layouts are only used for designing in 3D More about Design Layouts you find in the 3D Section of this manual You can add your own formats to this list or modify the layouts provided to meet your needs is de scribed in the next section Important If you want to keep the existing detail views you must import the drawing format You can undo a Sheet Into View command using the Undo command in the Edit menu But the Undo command works only if it is invoked immediately after the Sheet Into View command 173 Structuring Drawings You can add your own for ma
414. sheet and automatically displays it at the view scale which was current when the sheet was last changed This procedure is very useful if you have to identify models and sheets for renaming 178 You can place views from different models on one sheet but each view can display only one model at a time Sheet View There is only one Sheet View for each sheet The Sheet View is an infinite view picked up by the Sheet camera and displays everything on the sheet outside of all view windows The Sheet View cannot be deleted and needs at least one sheet to display its view Since the Sheet View like the Detail View can display only one model at a time you have to use Detail Views to show more than one model on a sheet To activate a Detail View you have to click in the view window to activate the Sheet View you have to click on the sheet outside of all detail views If the model dialog box is displayed the related model will be highlighted Cameras and Projectors There are two type of cameras one Sheet camera and as many Detail View cameras as you create detail views The Sheet camera is permanently installed as default and displays its view via the sheet projector on the sheet To move the Sheet camera you have to perform a model change either by the Models command or by the Sheets command where the Sheet camera is moved automatically to the related model Detail View cameras display their views via Detail
415. shes between e Simple Symbols which have fixed dimensions e Parametric Symbols which have parametric dimensions and as an option underlying value tables and e Symbol Libraries that are configured with the Libraries command in the Symbols submenu that can contain simple and parametric symbols and are handled exclusively with the Symbolmanager The following sections describe how to create the different type of symbols using a simple rectangle Creating simple symbols Objects with fixed dimensions are called simple or fixed symbols 1 Draw a rectangle with a width of 2 inch and a height of 1 inch 2 Dimension the rectangle using the Horizontal and Vertical dimension tools 2 7 aa 1 a When you place a fixed symbo in a drawing using one of the Symbol commands it is placed with its dimensions These dimensions are fixed and can not be modified once the symbol is placed Defining the Insertion point of a Symbol When you place a symbol in a drawing the Insertion point of the symbol is placed at that location you first clicked onto in the drawing area To define the Insertion point of a symbol you proceed as follows 1 Create the object 2 Place one control point at the origin 0 0 0 to specify the Insertion A new document has its Point of the symbol origin 0 0 0 in the center of the screen To see the Origin on the screen you must display the Grid If you don t place a Control Point into the origi
416. signed attributes The attributes and their respective values are displayed in the Status Line 3 Select the object with the Attribute Selection tool 4 Select the with the mouse button pressed the attribute value you want to delete 4 Press the Del key 4 Press Enter key Macintosh Return key The selected attribute value is deleted Assigning additional attributes 1 Inthe BOM Tool Palette select the Attribute Selection tool 2 Move the mouse pointer near an object with attributes assigned The attributes and their respective values are displayed in the Status Line 3 Select the object with the Attribute Selection tool 4 Choose the Attributes command from the BOM submenu in the Modules menu The Define Attributes dialog box is displayed 5 Click the New button 6 Define the new attribute by specifying its name value and format 7 Click the Redefine button The new attribute is displayed in the Status line 8 Change the value of the attribute if necessary 9 Press Enter key Macintosh Return key If you don t want the new attribute to be assigned automatically to each selected object select the New attribute in the list box and click the Hide button Assigning Item Numbers The BOM tool palette allows you to assign item numbers to objects which will be automatically included in the BOM table u ee Pos Name P No Qty 1 Nut s 27
417. signed attributes you have to press the Delete key twice Pressing the first time deletes the attributes and pressing the second time deletes the object Note If you want to remove only selected attributes you have to remove all attributes first and assign than the de sired attributes again Values of attributes can also be deleted in the Edit Objects dialog 242 Changing the values of attributes 1 Inthe BOM Tool Palette select the Attribute Selection tool 2 Move the mouse pointer near an object with assigned attributes The attributes and their respective values are displayed in the Status Line 3 Select the object with the Attribute Selection tool 4 Change the respective values in the Status Line To remove an attribute value delete the value in the entry box 5 Press the Enter key Macintosh Return key The changed values are assigned to the selected attribute Removing attributes 1 Inthe BOM Tool Palette select the Attribute Selection tool 2 Move the mouse pointer near to an object with assigned at tributes The attributes and their respective values are displayed in the Sta tus Line 3 Select the object with the Attribute Selection tool 4 Press the Ctrl key and the Enter key simultaneously Macintosh Option key and the Return key All attributes are removed Deleting attributes 1 Inthe BOM Tool Palette select the Attribute Selection tool 2 Move the mouse pointer near to an object with as
418. sing the Model command from the Views menu clicking then on the sheet to activate it and making finally Model 2 the current model Eo empty Model space __ 3D Model Detail View Cameras current sheet SS Sheet Camera is now rigidly fixed and parallel aligned to the sheet Layout with views Front and Right loaded with the Sheet into View command 3D Basics View Windows are de scribed in detail in Chap ter 10 Structuring Draw ings A View Window is nothing else than the projection of a detail view on the current sheet picked up by a View Camera at a particular angle If the option Draw View Boundaries in the Views menu is active the boundaries of all inactive views is shown by a dotted line The active view displays always its title bar You could create as well a new Sheet and copy all detail views onto the new sheet to get a clear view on the view windows To copy a detail view from Sheet 1 to Sheet 2 to you must cut the detail views using the Cut command from the View Window menu acti vate then Sheet 2 in the Sheet dialog box and paste the detail views onto Sheet 2 using the Paste com mand from the Edit menu Models Sheets and Views are described in detail in Chapter 10 Struc turing Drawings 257 3D Basics The Layout folder contains besides View Layouts as well Standard Drawing for mats that you can import or load using the Sheet into View command Th
419. sing the Rectangle Opposite Corners Click the two opposite corner points of the rectangle Or Click one corner point of the rectangle and drag to the opposite corner point Dragging displays a rubber band You can create a square by aligning the second point on the 45 construction line You can create a copy of the last rectangle by holding down the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and clicking where you want the center point Creating Geometry A default 1 inch square is drawn if you have not previously drawn a rectangle X Y Angle Length Width The status line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the first corner point as well as the angle length and height of the rectangle Length is the selected status box If you modify the Angle in the status line the rectangle is rotated around its center point when you press the Enter key Rectangle Center Midpoint Corner This tool draws a rectangle as a single object using the center point one midpoint and one corner point of the rectangle Using the Rectangle Center Midpoint Corner Click the center point one midpoint for one side of the rectangle The third point defines and one corner point of the rectangle specifying the distance to the distance from the l is defi th the before defined axis ee he Or midpoint e Drag the mouse from the center point of the rectangle to one midpoint and click t
420. size box The Detail View menu provides options for manipulating the view Properties Cut Copy Delete Pan Resize Structuring Drawings Properties The Properties option allows you to change the view scale and define the locations of its corners Properties Left Right Top Bottom cana ox Cut The Cut option allows you to remove the view from the sheet and place it on the Clipboard This is useful for placing views on a different sheet Use the Paste command from the Edit menu to paste the cut view window Copy The Copy option allows you to place a copy of the view window on the C ipboard This is useful for past ing multiple identical views onto one or more sheets Use the Paste command from the Edit pull down menu to paste a copy of the view window Delete This option deletes the active window and makes the sheet active It does not delete geometry Pan This command allows you to move the geometry inside the view window A hand icon appears which you can use to drag the contents of the window When you release the mouse button the Pan function ends Resize The Resize option allows you to drag a new view window This function differs from dragging the win dow borders With the Resize command you do not have to change each border individually since you de fine a new window that is substituted for the original one Changing the view scale When you ate
421. space in the text area 105 Text Fills and Hatches 106 1 1 2 Space This command in the Text menu changes the spacing of selected and future text so each line occupies one and a half spaces in the text atea Double Space This command in the Text menu sets the spacing of selected and future text so each line occupies two spaces in the text area Indentation If you wish to indent the text on the right or left side of the text box or if you wish to have the first line indented choose Indentation from the Text menu Indentation This command in the Text menu sets the indentation of paragraphs for the selected text area as defined by the units set in the Preferences submenu 1 Choose Indentation from the Text menu The dialog box appears Indentation First Line Left Indent Right Indent 2 Specify the indentation you want You can use point values if you include pt in your entry 3 Click OK You can specify the number of units for any or all the choices First Line Sets the number of units for the indentation of the first line of each paragraph A This is an example of a paragraph with the Left Indent Sets the number of units for the indentation of the left margin of each paragraph A 2 Dieser Absatz wurde links i eingezogen i Right Indent Sets the number of units for the indentation of the right margin of each paragraph A This is an example i of a paragrap
422. stant is unique to DraftBoard and makes Draft Board easy to use in 3D because it thinks like a designer It displays temporary construction lines provides information about existing geometry and displays notations of the relationship between new and existing geometry and it does this in three dimensions The following are examples of the alignment notations for x y and Z axes align z A dynamic construction line along the z axis perpendicular to the work plane i align z ds on align x A dynamic construction line along the X axis parallel to the work plane align y A dynamic construction line along the y axis parallel to the work plane align 45 A dynamic construction line along the 45 angle parallel to the work plane lign 45 andre PI zn 15200 Isometric Drawing with the Drawing Assistant With the help of the Drawing Assistant 3D design becomes as easy as isometric drawing on a draftboard The only thing we have to change is the view orientation so that we can see all three directions at once In the following example we will choose a trimetric view 1 Choose Trimetric from the View Mode submenu in the Views menu The view and with it all temporary construction lines of the Drawing Assistant will be aligned trimetrically 2 Select the Connected Line tool from the Line subpalette on the Tool palette 3 Begin by clicking in the middle of the drawing area and move the pointer straight down a
423. struction layer Constructions command deletes all geometry on the The Drawing Assistant s dynamic construction lines appear only Construction layer you temporarily and are not affected by this command Any geometry on shouldn t create anything you want to keep on the the Construction layer regardless of the pen style used is deleted by en onstruction layer this command You can retrieve deleted construction geometry within the limits of the Undo command 41 Setting the Environment Pens Pen Characteristics Pen Styles Setting the Units Displaying the Grid Preferences Customization Setting the Environment Setting the Environment This chapter describes how to set pen styles units and discusses the grid The last section of this chapter tells you how to save your preferences for default settings and how you can customize DraftBoard Pens The pen style determines the appearance of lines on the screen and when they are plotted If you are using a monochrome monitor or a printer all lines will be black but the weight and pattern will be visible Any line thickness of less than 0 07 mm appears one pixel wide on the screen When you print or plot such lines you can see the different weights You can choose from nine different pen styles in the Pen menu This menu contains as well all commands to modify all pen settings Pen Style Color gt Edit Style gt Pen Characteristics Weight gt gt gt
424. styles appears drag to the new pen you want to change 8 Specify the characteristics color weight and pattern you want for the new pen 55 Setting the Environment Arrowheads for dimension lines are defined separately under Preferences in the Dimension menu The size of dimension arrowheads is set sepa rately under Preferences in the Dimension menu To save the size of an Arrowhead permanently you must choose the Save Preferences command from the Preferences sub menu of the Layout menu 56 9 Click the Apply button The new pen has now the specified attributes for the current document until you quit DraftBoard When you click the Apply button all selected objects in the drawing area obtain the new specifications The dialog box stays open so you can make changes to other pen styles All pen attributes specified in the Edit Style dialog box are saved with the drawing and are still valid when the document is opened again Arrow Lines With the commands Arrow at Start and Arrow at End from the Pen menu you can specify the placement of Arrowheads on lines or circular arcs that are not a part of dimensions You can choose the Type of arrowhead from the Arrowheads submenu of the Pen menu The size of the arrowhead can be specified in the Arrow size submenu of the Pen menu Arrowheads The Arrowheads submenu of the Pen menu allows you to choose one of eight arrowheads for arrow lines The arrowhead selection i
425. symbol representation Appendix Text A multiple line note becomes many single lines NURBs NURB Splines are supported 307 Appendix On the Macintosh only the font Plotter is available The Windows version of DraftBoard contains in the Fonts subdirectory in the DraftBoard folder sample files that show for each character the related ANSI Code In addition to the plotter fonts shipping with Draft Board you can use all plotter fonts with the shx Format You just must copy these shx files into the Fonts subdirectory of the DraftBoard folder See as well in the Text chapter of this manual 308 Plotter Fonts You can use with DraftBoard all TrueType and PostScript Fonts available on your computer In addition DraftBoard offers own Plotter Fonts that are listed below Plotter MNT Te eee Fa P HN on 5 x J1 n o ai AOUaou oy ee aa TO Y Oy j K B CO IA LAT TL IN Y NAY E Li t ot SVP Z j s FR SY CO NZZ 7 abeceran mno DFSLUVWxvyZ Plotter Roman EFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU h abcdefghi Ja mno OP rstuvwxyz IC A AS IN g 4 ppd A N of Z g x U oe N A GA eS a lt gt VU U a U uU S D O q o ra 77 ooo NT OIAKRKRLrTISOMN i JL hy ri Ol 1234567890 Appendix Crosshatch Patterns DraftBoard offers a multitude of associative DIN and ANSI hat
426. symbol in the Symbols list field If the symbol has an underlying value table all variations of this symbol are listed in the Parameter list field Select a Norm Part in the Parameter list field All parametric Variables and Attributes of the selected Norm Part are displayed in the Variables list field If necessary you can modify the predefined values Mark the Set option If you want to place the symbol offset from the clicked insertion point specify an Angle and a Distance in the related entry fields Drag a vector on the drawing area for the insertion point and the orientation of the symbol Click the Set button The symbol is placed according to the dragged vector Place additional symbols Close the Symbolmanager using the Close box in the upper right corner of the title bar Editing Library Symbols 1 Display the Symbolmanager using the Symbolmanager command from the Symbols submenu in the File menu Mark the Edit option The mouse pointer changes its shape to a wrench tool when you bring it over the drawing area Select the symbol on the drawing atea you want to edit All related data of the selected Norm Part including its symbol library are displayed in the Symbolmanager Modify the symbol data or select another Norm Part in the Parameter list field Click the Apply button The symbol will be reshaped or substituted When you have specified any offset values the symbol is placed according these val
427. t If you have set a scale in drawing size you should click the Unscaled option so that the geometry or drawing format you are bringing in is scaled the same as the geometry in the drawing Click OK The file appears in the drawing area If you want to save the file in its original format after editing you must choose the Export command from the File menu Importing a document MAC 1 Choose Import from the File menu The Open dialog box is displayed Select the file you want to import The Import dialog box appears Specify any import options you want If you have set a scale in drawing size you should click the Unscaled option so that the geometry or drawing format you are bringing in is scaled the same as the geometry in the drawing Click OK The file appears in the drawing area If you want to save the file in its original format after editing you must choose the Export command from the File menu Importing DWG DXF files Important When you import a DWG or DXF file the geometry is constructed according to the units set in Preferences when you choose the Import command Be sure to set the appropriate units before you import DWG or DXF geometry 1 Choose Import from the File menu A dialog box appears similar to the Open dialog box Select the file type DXF from the Files of Type pop up menu Select the DXF fi e you want to import and click OK The Import dialog box is displayed Select the option DXF
428. t Edit Weight Edit Weight Wu 0 13mm 005 0 18 007 v 0 25 010 0 35 014 0 50 020 0 70 028 1 00 039 1 50 059 Specifying a new weight for the current pen 1 Drag to Weight in the Pen menu The submenu appears 2 Drag to the weight you want The pen takes on the new weight and the weight is selected in the submenu Edit Weight This command from the Weight submenu in the Pen menu sets the weights for DraftBoard s lines DraftBoard comes with eight pens with differing line weights ranging from 0 13 to 1 50 mm Objects drawn in DraftBoard are drawn in one of the eight available pen weights With the Edit Weight command in the Pen menu you can change the weight of one of the pens to any value between 0 00 mm to 1 50 mm There cannot be more than eight different pen weights in a drawing so changing a pen weight in the Edit Pen Weights dialog box will change the weight of every object that was drawn with that pen s former weight Editing Line Weights 1 Choose Edit Weight from the Weight submenu of the Pen menu The Edit Pen Weight dialog box appears EG Edit Pen Weights C Pen 1 Pen 2 Pen 3 Pen 4 Pen 5 Pen 6 0 70mm Pen 7 Pen 8 2 Select the pen weight you want to change by clicking on the pen number That pen s entry box should be selected 3 Change the pen weight by typing a new value into the entry box If no units are given with the entry DraftBoard a
429. t of the revolution axis The selected geometry is now revolved around the axis as specified according to the right hand rule of revolution 3D Modelling You indicate the Axis of Revolution also by double clicking the Origin box and dragging a vector for the direction of the Revolution axis in the drawing area The length of the vector is unimportant The values of the dragged vector are automatically entered into the Origin and Axis entry fields Important Normally the of Steps should be 2 Only when the Sweep Angle is 360 you should enter 3 or 4 for the of Steps You indicate the Axis of Revolution also by double clicking the Origin box and dragging a vector for the direction of the Revolution axis in the drawing area 275 3D Modelling You indicate the Axis of Rotation also by double clicking the Origin box and dragging a vector for the direction of the Rotation axis in the drawing area The values of the dragged vector are automatically entered into the Origin and Axis entry fields You also can indicate the Axis of Rotation by double clicking the Origin box and dragging a vector for the direction of the Rotation axis in the drawing area 276 Right Hand Rule of Revolution The direction of revolution is determined by the Right Hand Rule of Revolution which states if that the thumb is pointed toward the positive Axis of Revolution the revolution will be in the same direction in which the f
430. t allowable size For shafts the roundness tolerance is the same regardless of the shaft diameter In the example above this material condition symbol in the feature control frame 002 applies to the location of the hole whether the hole is at its smallest 310 or largest 315 This material condition would control an axis in space so you probably wouldn t use Regardless of Feature Size for this hole Datum The last three sections of the frame show the alignment order to position the part This is easier to see in a part which does not have perpendicular sides A typical engineering drawing might appear as shown below 315 310 gt 002 W gt Ww O lt lt B A For proper drilling alignment and measurement this part would lie on a flat surface Surface A with Side B pushed against the first straight edge and then Side C pushed against the other straight edge GD6 amp T tells a manufacturer which surface to align first If you align the part with Side C before Side B the holes do not line up in the same way as they would if you align with Side B before Side C The rule for points of contact per surface is as follows Surface Points of contact minimum 1st 3 2nd 2 3rd 1 Datum Material Condition When showing a datum in a feature control frame you also have the option of indicating a material condition Such a modifier should only
431. t el Layout with drawing format and one view loaded with Sheet Into View command Drawing Formats You cannot only modify all drawing formats in the Layout folder of the DraftBoard directory but create as well your own drawing formats and design layouts Drawing formats contain the border line of the drawing the cutting lime and a Title block for entries such as name ot scale of the drawing Drawing formats have to be created for each paper format such as 4 B C or D and for both paper orientations Portrait and Landscape All drawing formats you find in the Layout folder of DraftBoard are designed for Plotter devices where the Cutting lines correspond exactly with the dimensions of the selected paper format for example 30 x 40 inch for the D Format and the Border line is offset inside by 1 2 inch ac cording to the ANSI standard When you want to use these plotter formats for your laser printer you have to adjust them to the printing area of your printer that could differ from printer to printer The Standard Drawing Formats shipping with DraftBoard contain in addition to the drawing format detail views that may display with the Sheet Into View command the content of a drawing at different view angles and scale factor Placing Drawing formats There are two different ways to place Standard Drawing Formats with the Import command in the File menu or with the Sheet Into View command in the Views menu Since placing a
432. t from the Edit menu Once you cut a selection you can paste it You can use Cut and Paste to move geometry or text around the document from one sheet to another or from one document to another You can even paste the cut selection into a document in a different application Moving geometry with the Cut command 1 Select the objects you want to move 2 Choose Cut from the Edit menu 3 Display the location where you want the selection to appear in the drawing area scrolling if necessary 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu The object appears in the center of the drawing area on the original layer on which it was created or onto the work layer if it s from a dif ferent application The object is selected so you can move it if you want Copy Ctrl C Macintosh seC This command in the Edit menu places a copy of the selection onto the Clipboard without deleting the original selection You can paste the copy elsewhere in the current document or into a different document You can even paste the copied selection into a document created with a different application Copying objects 1 Select the objects to be copied 2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu The selection goes on the C ipboard and it remains in the current document Paste Ctrl V Macintosh 38M This command in the Edit menu pastes a copy of the Clipboard contents onto the center of the drawing area The Clipboard contents are not changed when you use the P
433. t menu allows you to edit selected objects by changing individual characteristics such as ength layer or pen style or other specifications Changes made through this dialog box can be reversed with the Undo and Redo commands Editing objects 1 Select the object to be edited 2 Choose Edit Objects from the Edit menu The dialog box appears EG Edit Objects 1 circle locked layer color pattern weight control pts ctrpt x ctrpty 111 919 ctrpt z 0 000 startpt x 177 083 startpt y 135 655 startpt z 0 000 diameter 57 136 length 210 913 arrowhead none if 3 Change the information in the entry boxes Double click the entry box and type a new entry do not press Enter 4 Make any other changes you want Click the Apply button Sd Double click the Close box in the upper left corner to close the Edit Objects dialog box You can use Undo and Redo to reverse changes made through this dialog box The specifications shown in this box depend on the type of object selected and include at least the following e Number or type of objects e Lock status e Current layer e Current color e Current pattern Current weight e Absolute coordinates for the starting point and ending point of the object The measurements reflect the settings of the Units option in the Preferences submenu If you want to prevent changes to an object you can specify locked in this dialog box or you
434. t size option 154 margins 58 102 move 102 non standard size 104 plotter fonts 155 308 scaling 104 size 104 spacing 105 style 104 text blocks 106 text lines command 66 title blocks 108 thickness line 49 through points spline tool 27 tiled printing 158 title blocks 108 tol text size 132 tolerance dimensions 118 tolerances dimensions 127 tools atcs 20 bill of materials 240 chamfer tools 81 citcles 21 copying objects 87 detail view tool 169 dimension tools 117 drawing tools 17 editing tools 81 ellipses 22 expand shrink Tool 85 fillet tools 81 floating tool palette 60 function plotters 28 lines 17 mirror tool 85 move tool 84 p lygons 23 rectangle 24 rotate tool 84 segment tool 83 selection 72 sizing objects 88 splines 26 stretch tool 85 text 101 text tool 101 transformation 84 trim tools 83 zooming 147 top view 253 trackball 253 view menu 254 trailing 0 s dimensions 132 trailing O s units 57 transformation tools 84 triad 266 Triangulated Surfaces 297 trim tools 83 trimetric view 254 truetype 308 txt 189 U undo command 90 unfold view command 259 ungroup command 96 units combining 302 decimal indicators 303 inches feet 57 leading 0 57 mm cm meters 57 nanoseconds 302 precision 57 preferences 58 settings 57 trailing O s 57 units command 57 unlock command 97 Updates and Upgrades 312 V vector spline tool 27 vertex drawing assistant 35 vertic
435. te of the type Quantity The Item Number tool automatically assigns the identical Item Number of the original object to the object copy If you change the Item Number of an object with multiple instances in the Edit Objects dialog box the Item Number of all copies will automatically be adjusted Note Item Number balloons are removed when copying an object Adjusting Item Number balloon and text size The following procedure describes how to adjust the Item Number balloon and Text size before you assign any Item Numbers 1 Select the Item Number tool in the BOM palette The entry fields Item and Width are displayed in the Status Line 2 Press the Tab key twice and enter the desired width for the Item Number balloon The units for the indicated width are based on the unit specified in the Units dialog box from in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu 3 Press Enter key Macintosh Return key The size of the Item Number balloon is now set 4 Select the BemSize command from the Preferences submenu in the Dimension menu 5 Select the desired text size The text size of the Item Number balloon is now set Geometric Analysis Do not use the Balloon tool from the Dimension palette to assign tem Numbers for objects that you want listed in the Bill of Materials Item Numbers created with the Balloon tool are not recognized by the Bill of Materials utility Item Numbers can also contain alpha characters as A B C et
436. te scaled to 25 of the Trimetric view Draft 4 Draft4 vim This layout creates four full scale views scaled as specified in the Sheet into View dialog box Top Front Right and Trimetric Creating View Layouts All view layouts available from the Sheet into View dialog box are individual DraftBoard drawing files stored in the Layouts folder in the DraftBoard folder If you want to create your own layout simply edit one of the existing drawings in the Layouts folder or create a new drawing and save it in the Layouts folder The file name then will appear automatically in the pull down menu in the Sheet into View dialog box Creating custom View Layouts The easiest way to create customized layouts is to edit existing ones 1 Open a layout file in the Layouts folder using the Open command in the File menu 2 Save the file under a different name before you do any changes 3 Customize the layout to your needs by modifying the Number Size Scale or View Orientation of the view windows 4 Save the modified layout in the Layouts folder 5 Select the Sheet into View in the Views menu 6 The new layout appears automatically in the pull down menu in thie Sheet Into View dialog box Another way to create your own layout is to design it in a new document 3D Basics 1 Open a new document using the New command in the File menu 2 Create a view window with the Detail View function 3 Make the
437. ted 3 Hold down the Shift key and select the geometry you want to add to the group 4 Choose Group from the Arrange menu You can follow a similar procedure to remove members of a group Ungroup This command in the Arrange menu separates selected grouped objects into their individual components Ungrouping Objects 1 Select the group 2 Choose Ungroup from the Arrange menu The individual objects in a group are selected Editing objects Lock This command in the Arrange menu prohibits editing or movement of selected geometty Preventing accidental changes to one or more objects 1 Select the objects to be locked 2 Choose Lock from the Arrange menu Although you cannot move or change a locked object you can copy group and select it Preventing changes to an entire document 1 Choose Select All from the Edit menu 2 Choose Lock from the Arrange menu Selected objects can also be locked or unlocked by clicking the Locked box in the Edit Objects dialog box Unlock This command in the Arrange menu removes the lock in the selection You can change and move the unlocked objects Unlocking Objects 1 Select the locked object s 2 Choose Unlock from the Arrange menu Selected objects can also be locked and unlocked by clicking the Locked box in the Edit Objects dialog box 97 Text Fills and Crosshatches Text Autolext Crosshatching and Solid Fills Text Fills and Hatches Text Fills and
438. ted These angles define the dynamic construction lines that It is not recommended to the Drawing Assistant automatically uses If you want to change the orientation of your drawing you can modify the Alignment Angles for isometric draw ings in DraftBoard Instead change these specifications For example you could you should select an set these angles to 30 90 and 150 for an isometric isometric view orientation drawing The defaults are 0 horizontal and 90 vertical Use a semicolon to separate the values with the Trackball You find more information about iso metric drawing in the 3D Part of this manual 37 Drawing Assistant To display a construction line through a point move the pointer to the point to activate it a diamond appears construction lines automatically display through the active point You can have as many as eight active points When you activate the ninth point the first one in the series is deactivated Additional These lines are used by the Drawing Assistant only Creation when you ate creating geometry and they are not part Angles of the list of lines generated from the eight active points The defaults are 45 and 45 Use a semicolon to separate the values Point The divisions of a line for Drawing Assistant notations If you want to divide the line into quarters use a 25 specification The default is 50 which shows the midpoint of lines For example entering 25 instr
439. tely All dimensions are selected Change the entry in the text box to a symbol Click Apply Close the Edit Objects and Selection Mask dialog boxes S fe oS Click the Selection tool to cancel the effect of the Selection Mask Parametric Drafting This section describes how to modify standard drafting practices to accommodate parametrics It describes three examples with three topics to illustrate how to define parametric geometry completely Remember 1 Define the geometry completely e Dimension all geometry e Relate all geometry e Do not include extraneous text 2 Return to the original part between tests Dimension All Geometry Centerlines require consideration if they are to be resolved properly PROBLEM If you create the circle shown on the left with two centerlines parametrics can resolve the circle but not the centerlines No because the endpoints of the lines are not defined 205 Parametrics If you want different for mats for different types of dimensions select each type separately Each dotted line style like the line style of the Con struction line will be hid den when a symbol is placed or printed There fore you should use this line style for all invisible parts of an object 206 SOLUTIONS If you look at this problem as a connect the dots problem you can see that the centerlines have no dots to define them 1 You can construct the centerlines so their end
440. tem Number balloon 2 Select the Delete command in the Edit menu or press the Backspace key Macintosh Delete key The selected Item Number will be deleted Renumber existing Item Numbers 1 Select the Item Number tool in the BOM Tool Palette The entry fields Item and Width are displayed in the Status Line 2 Enter in the Item field the new starting number for the Izem Number 3 Press the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key and keep it pressed 4 Click the Item Number balloons in the desired order The Item Number balloon will split The upper half of the symbol shows the old Item Number and the lower half of the symbol the new Item Number 5 Release the Ctrl key Macintosh Option key All Item Numbers will be renumbered Bill of Materials Layouts With a BOM Layout you define which attributes will be extracted when creating a BOM Table Layouts are defined with the Layout command from the BOM submenu in the Modules menu Modules Function Fix Fx y Function param BOM gt Attributes A MSC Nastran gt Layouts 5 Show Palette Options Layouts This command allows to specify in combination with the Define Attributes dialog box different BOM Layouts The Layouts command displays the following dialog box Geometric Analysis amp Define Layouts Layout new Layout 2 Layout Name Layouts differ only by the attributes they relate to A layout contains all the v
441. tended Text dialog box instead the original ASCIT file has to be modified with a text editor For an optimized organization it is recommended to place all imported texts in the Text folder of the DraftBoard folder in where you find some pre installed extended text that however is not referenced to any notation Options dialog box When you click the Options button while a Text block is selected the following dialog box is displayed Attributes you assign to selected text are not saved with the selected text and are only valid for the current selection Text that contains imported text has a checkmark in front of the text name ASCII Text can be created with any text editor You only have to specify ASCII format when saving the text Take care that there is no empty text line at the end of the ASCII text since it will be imported as well Only the directory path of the imported text file is saved with the DraftBoard file not the extended text itself In case you cannot open the extended text example shipping with DraftBoard delete it in the Extended Text dialog box and import it again from the Text folder in the Draft Board folder 107 Text Fills and Hatches ASCII Text you import as extended text has not to be in the Text subdirectory of the DraftBoard folder but it is recommend for later editing of the extended text The Arrow type for the position line you choose with the Arrow command in the Pen menu
442. ter Creating a non associative Surface Model In case you want to edit the wireframe geometry later independent from the surfaced object it is recommended to use a copy of the wireframe geometry for the surface calculation For that you proceed as follows 1 Construct the wireframe geometry to be autosurfaced considering the respective rules 2 Create a Detail View window using the Detail View tool 3 Activate the detail view and select the Model command in the Views menu 3D Surfaces Auto Surface represents calculates surfaces using the current pen color specified in the Color sub menu in the Pen menu The calculation time is depending on the size and complexity of the selected geometry and the available memory of your computer See as well Editing Structured Surfaces in this chapter 287 3D Surfaces Naturally it is also possible to dimension a surfaced object in the Shaded or Hidden Line view mode See as well Visualizing Objects in this chapter Therefore you should always use he Undo command to return to the original wireframe geometry When you group the un grouped surfaces again you will not return to the previous Structured Surface To restore the Structured Surface you have to use the Undo command in the Edit menu 288 4 Create a new model and make it the active model for the detail view 5 Select the wireframe geometry to be autosurfaced on the sheet 6 Choose the Copy co
443. tern of the current pen and any selected lines without changing any other pen characteristics Pen Style gt Color gt Weight Pattern gt Define Pattern Edit Pattern v Solid Dotted Center Dashed Hidden Phantom Dashdot Border divide Cutting Stitch More The Pattern submenu in the Pen menu contains all defined line patterns 11 different line patterns can be selected directly for all oth ers you have to display a dialog box using the More command Specifying line patterns in the Pattern submenu 1 Drag to Pattern in the Pen menu The submenu appears 2 Drag to the pattern you want All selected objects take the new pattern and all new objects are drawn in this line pattern Specifying line patterns with the More command 1 Drag to Pattern in the Pen menu The submenu appears 2 Select the More command The Line Fonts dialog window is displayed EG Line fonts v Solid Dotted Center Dashed Hidden Phantom Dashdot divide 3 Select the pattern you want 4 Click the Current button All selected objects take the new pattern and all new objects are drawn in this line pattern Defining Line Patterns In DraftBoard you can specify in addition to the 11 predefined Line Pattern another 19 using the Line Editor The Line Editor is displayed with the Define Pattern command in the Pattern submenu of the Pen menu Define patterns Dashed Hidden Phan
444. th the Selection tool vertex midpoint vertex This graphic shows the text window snap points of the Drafting Assistant vertex midpoint vertex 1 Choose the Selection tool from the Tool palette 2 Select the text object you want to move 3 Move the cursor over one of the nine text snap points The cursor becomes a 4 way Move symbol 4 Place the 4 way Move symbol at the desired snap point using the Drawing Assistant notations as a guide 5 Drag the text object to the new location Changing the size of the text box 1 Click the Selection tool 2 Drag a selection marquee around the right side of the text box 3 Drag the control points to the left or right The area changes size and the text rewraps automatically The right and left margins The right and left margins ofthetextare of the text are controlled by controlled by the size of the text box the size of the text box e M You can drag a control 1 You can drag a control point on the box to point on the box to make it make it larger or smaller larger or smaller a Moving Text and Files into the DraftBoard drawing area Drag amp Drop Text can be moved directly from all programs that support OLE into the DraftBoard drawing area DraftBoard Files documents with the file extension vlm will be directly opened when moved from the Windows Exp
445. that when you drag between points a rubber band line guides you If you use the clicking method you can perform unrelated activities such as zooming between clicks 14 Drawing Techniques Most drawing tools allow two methods of creating an object clicking and dragging Clicking This method allows you to create objects by clicking points with the mouse The benefit of this technique is that you can perform unrelated activities such as zooming while you are creating the geometry Dragging The drag method allows you to indicate two points by dragging from one to the other Press and hold down the mouse button to set the first point Next drag the mouse to the location for the next point and release the mouse button The benefit of this technique is that a rubberband image appears during the construction to show you how the object will appear once you release the mouse button You can use either or both methods to construct most objects To help make object creation easier DraftBoard s tools contain a feature we call Smart Pointers As you work with a tool the tool icons show you the points you must indicate to create an object with the tool Each dot on the icon represents a point you must place either by clicking or by dragging In addition the Smart Pointer indicates the order for designating points as you are drawing the geometry Creating a line by clicking 1 Select the Single Line tool from the Tool palette
446. the Angle box in the Construction dialog box enter 0590 Be certain to separate the numbers with a semicolon 5 Enter the value for Centroid X displayed in the 2D Analysis dialog box into the X box of the Construction dialog box 6 Enter the value for Centroid Y displayed in the 2D Analysis dialog box into the Y box of the Construction dialog box 7 Press the Enter key The intersection of the two displayed construction lines show the centroid of the selected part Geometric Analysis Bill of Materials Bill of Materials is an important extension to CAD programs for tracking and listing parts all the way through the product design and manufacturing process DraftBoard s Bill of Materials Extraction utility gives the product engineer the ability to attach characteristics attributes to the parts be ing designed you can extract a Bill of Materials table from these parts This Bill of Materials table can be printed separately or together with the drawing In addition you can export the Bz of Materials to other applications for tracking of the informational data through the entire production process The Bill of Materials Extraction utility is completely integrated in DraftBoard and combines powerful functionality with an easy to use interface co OT co Generating a Bz of Materials is a three step process e defining attributes for object geometry in drawings e assigning attribute
447. the Reference Line You can choose from the options No Dash Line Upper Dash Line and Lower Dash Line by clicking on the related option button Elementary Symbols Elementary Symbols indicate the joint type lt no Joint v EE Joint Types 3 wI Combined Symbols Elementary symbols can be supplemented by a Combined Symbol indicating the Shape and Production method of the joint Dimensions B no Specification Joint Shape Joint Type Dimensions Each Welding Symbol can contain dimension data Dimensions for the joint thickness are entered on the left side of the Elementary Symbol dimensions for the joint length on the right side Supplementary Symbols There exist two types of symbols Circular Joints indicated by a circle and Longitudinal Joints indicated by a flag Both types may be combined in a symbol Complementary There are three complementaty indications Indications possible No additional The Reference Line of the welding symbol is created without a fork at the end Only Text This option is used when all complementary indications are placed in the related Text entry field The Reference Line of the welding symbol is created with a fork at the end Boxed Text This option is used when all complementary indications are listed separately and the Text entry field contains only corresponding refe
448. the Standard pop up menu to the standard you want to modify 4 Click the Arrow Size button in the Dimension Editor The Arrow Size dialog box is displayed 5 Select all the options you want to set for the size of the arrowheads 6 Click OK The Arrow Size dialog box is closed 7 Click the Apply button if you want to assign the new settings to a selected dimension All selected dimensions are redrawn and reflect the new appearance set in the dimension editor Editing Dimension Attributes All dimension attributes such as dimtextangle dimlineangle dimsublineangle can be modified by selecting the dimension and editing the attributes in the Edit Objects dialog box in the Edit menu Parametric Dimensions You must dimension objects to use the parametrics feature you must specify values variables or expressions for each dimension Parametrics is discussed in greater detail in the Parametrics chapter Creating a parametric dimension 1 Create the dimension as usual The status line displays a symbol in the text box 2 Enter a value variable or algebraic expression in the text box The dimension reflects the value or variable you entered regardless of the actual value of the geometry you just dimensioned 3 Continue dimensioning as needed to define the part completely 4 Use the parametric feature as described in the Parametrics chapter 133 Dimensions 134 Converting parametric dimensions to associative d
449. the position for the upper left cor ner of the label Editing a GD amp T label Once you have created a GD amp T label you may wish to make changes 1 Select the GD amp T label you wish to edit 2 Choose GD amp T from the Dimension menu The GD amp T dialog box appears displaying the current GD amp T information 3 Make the changes you want in the GD amp T dialog box 4 Click the Edit button The GD amp T label changes Using an editing short cut with GD amp T When you are editing a GDGT label or creating a second label you may want to remove every entry in Line 1 or Line 2 1 Press the first box to display the Geometric Characteristic menu 2 Drag to the X symbol All entries in the line disappear Surface Texture The Surface Symbols command in the Dimension menu allows you to create graphical Surface Symbols according to ISO 1302 Dimension Show Palette Preferences GDAT Surface Symbols Welding Symbols Surface symbols describe how the surface texture of a specific part should be manufactured polished 2 5 R max6 3 R 160 tf R263 Surface Symbols This command in the Dimension menu creates a graphical symbol indicating the production method for the Surface Texture of a part The Surface Symbols command uses Plotter fonts to create the symbol so the font corresponds to ANSI standards since the sizes of other fonts are not always consistent with ANSI standards It is not possi
450. ting systems available Check with your local distributor Documentation 10 Appendices At the end of this manual you find several appendices with additional information about specific settings for some DraftBoard components Operators and Units This section describes all Operators and Units which are accepted by all DraftBoard boxes Special Characters This section lists all the special characters and symbols you can use in DraftBoard are not directly available from the keyboard Date Interfaces This appendix contains additional information about the Data Interfaces integrated into DraftBoard Plotter Fonts This section lists all plotter fonts available in DraftBoard that you can use in addition to the PostScript and TrueType fonts that are installed on your computer Hatch patterns DraftBoard contains a library with many ISO and DIN hatch patterns This appendix lists all with DraftBoard available hatch patterns and describes as how you can define your own hatch patterns and add them as pat files to the DraftBoard hatch library Registration The Customer Services ate described in the Appendices section This appendix provides technical support registration and update information We d really like to encourage you to return the registration card for DraftBoard conveniently located inside your software box Por such a minor investment of time you ll become a registered customer Only by registering DraftBoard
451. tion according to the value you have set in the Increments field in the Parameter dialog box Parametrics Track Curve When this option is marked the path of all defined Measure Points is tracked and recorded during a simula tion Track Geometry When this option is marked the geometry for each step is recorded and displayed on the screen Play Movie This option allows you to play a recorded kinematic motion as a movie in a separate window When you select the option Play Movies the File open dialog box is displayed where you can select the movie When you record a kinematic motion as a movie using the Record button in the kinematic Control Panel a series of frames is created with different values for the variables When these frames are put together they cre ate a motion picture called Movies The file is in PICT format and can be imported into other applications Recording a movie MAC 1 Create a part that you would like to animate including its parametric dimensions 2 Select the complete part including its parametric dimensions 3 Choose the Calculate motion command in the Parametric submenu from the Edit menu The kinematic Control Panel is displayed 4 Specify all parameters and options in the Parameter and Options dialog boxes 5 Click the Record button The Save as dialog box is displayed 6 Enter a name for the movie in the Name field 7 Click OK The kinematic motion is recorded and saved as a movie under th
452. tion are available Additional informations for exporting DWG DXF Data you find in the Appendix of this manual DXF DWG Options Format Version Ungroup hatches In this dialog window you can select the AutoCAD Formats DWG DXF DXB and Versions 10 11 12 13 For AutoCAD Version 12 14 and 2000 2002 please choose Version 11 In addition you can specify if you want to export all hatches ungrouped Always when on the current sheet 2 or more models are displayed in dezaz views the following dialog box is displayed DXF DWG Too many models Please choose a model to export in addition to the sheet Export views with model Model 2 v or CO Flatten all views In this dialog window you select either an additional model with its corresponding detail views or flatten all views to export them all 195 DraftBoard Documents If there are any problems with your exported DXF files you should use before creating any DXF file the Remove Dots Check Dimension and Select Duplicates commands in the Utility menu If these commands are not listed in the Utility menu they first must be added to this menu according to the Customization section in chapter 4 of this manual In addition you should read the text files SelCopy txt AntiDot txt and Check Dim txt in the Function folder in the DraftBoard directory The Convert dialog box contains all file formats that can be converted by the Windows or Ma
453. tions the of Steps should be 3 or 4 The fastest way to create a sphere is to revolve a circle by 90 The Revolution axis should run through the endpoint vertex of the circle not through one of the quadrant points rotated geometry Spoke Lines with of steps set to 9 Clean faces with of steps set to 2 You must always connect wireframe geometry endpoint to endpoint Don t have overlapping lines or duplicate lines on top of each other Even though Autosurfacing routine handles these extra lines quite tolerant you can avoid many problems by creating clear wireframe geometry The only exception to this is the next rule When the boundary line of one surface is intersected somewhere along its length by the boundary line of a second surface Draft Board will divide each boundary line into two separate line pieces and will build the surfaces based on that new geometry The surface calculation will be only successful if boundary lines are not broken into more than two pieces separate line segments If a boundary line is intersected by two lines of another surface such that the first boundary line would be broken into three pieces the Autosurfacing routine will fail This automatic divisions only occur with ungrouped objects If one of the boundary lines is part of an object that is grouped then no division will occur Intersection Points divided boundary line The boundary lines of the left face o
454. title block 3 Click OK The TitleBlocks dialog box is closed and the selected title block modified accordingly Creating Title Blocks Before you can use the Forms command in the Text menu to fill in your own drawing formats you have to prepare the title blocks of these formats To enable DraftBoard to identify the title blocks all feld label names have to be entered into the entry fields with an character in front For a possible entry field Scale you have first to put the label Scale in front of the entry field and then type in Scale into the entry field with a character in front as shown in the following graphic space marks the end of the variable no space Scale Scale Label Field Entry In addition all label entries have to be placed on the layer TitleBlocks When you call the Forms command DraftBoard will check if there are any text entries on the layer TitleBlocks with an character in front If yes all these entries are listed as labels for the entry fields in the Forms dialog box When you have entered the required values and click OK DraftBoard will substitute the original entries with the characters in front with the text you entered The original text attributes of these entries such as s y e size or font are maintained Preparing title blocks for the TitleBlocks command 1 Open one of your own drawing formats 2 Select the Text function from the function palette 3 Label a
455. tom Dashdot Border divide Cutting Stitch Delete Current Rename Henie The Define Patterns dialog box contains the following elements New When you click this button a new line pattern with the name User 1 is created that you can rename using the Rename button You can specify the new pattern us 51 Setting the Environment 52 ing the Line editor that you display with the Edit button Delete This button allows you to delete the line pattern that is selected in the Define Pattern dialog box You can only delete user defined line patterns The 11 predefined Line patterns cannot be deleted Current This button makes the selected line pattern the current pattern All selected objects take the new pattern and all new objects are drawn in this line pattern Edit This button displays the Line Editor that allows you to edit the new pattern You can edit all line patterns except the two predefined line patterns solid and dotted Rename This button allows you to rename a line pattern with the name entered into the Rename field You can only rename user defined line patterns The 11 predefined Line patterns cannot be renamed Defining Line Patterns 1 Select the Define Pattern command in the Pattern submenu in the Pen menu The Define Patterns dialog box is displayed 2 Click onto the New button A new line pattern with the name User 1 is created 3 Rename the new line pattern in the
456. tributes of the selected light source 3 Modify the Light Type the Position the Color the Intensity and the Direction of the selected light source if a Parallel light source is selected For the die Light Color you can specify in the entry fields Red Green and Blue values between 0 and 1 values greater 1 have no effect For the Light Intensity values between 0 and 4 are recommended 4 Select the Shaded view mode from the View Mode submenu to control the light settings Deleting Light Sources 1 Select the light source symbol in the Wireframe view mode 2 Choose the Delete command from the Edit menu or press the Backspace key Macintosh Delete key The light source is deleted Moving Light Sources 1 Select the light source symbol in the Wireframe view mode 2 Drag the light source to the new location When you want to move a Parallel Light you should display first the startpoint and the endpoint of the ight vector using the Show Points command in the Layout menu For moving the light source you select both points for changing the position you select only the startpoint of the vector and for changing the direction you select only the endpoint of the vector 3D Surfaces Exporting Surfaces For the export surfaced objects DraftBoard offers several data More information about interfaces Import and Export data interfaces you find in Chapter 11 and in the NURB Surfaces Appendix of this manual IGES Use thi
457. trl N Macintosh 38N This command in the File menu creates a new DraftBoard document The new document has no name the title bar shows Untitled 1 and is set with the default options such as pen style ot grid display If you open more than one new document the subsequent documents are numbered sequentially until you name them by saving Open Ctrl 0 Macintosh 380 The Open command in the File menu opens an existing document that was created with DraftBoard This document can be created by current or earlier versions of DraftBoard The document appears in the drawing area maintaining the same settings as the last time you saved it If you made any changes to the default settings such as edit ing pen styles or hiding layers those changes remain in effect The Open dialog box allows you to specify the document you want and lets you change directories or folders if necessary Opening a document WIN 1 Choose Open from the File menu The Open dialog box appears 2 Display in the Look in pop up menu the appropriate Folder containing the document you want to open 3 Select in the file type you want to open from the File Type pop up menu The list box displays all files of the selected type available in that folder 4 Click the File name you want to open in the list box If you double click on the file name the document is opened without clicking the Open button 5 Click the Open button DraftBoard Documents Opening a d
458. ts in the drawing 3 Save the object with the Symbol Attributes table When you place this symbol in a drawing using the Insert Symbol command or the Symbolmanager the assigned values can be changed in the Symbol dialog box Editing Attributes Assigned attributes are displayed in the Status Line where the default values can be edited Show attributes 1 Inthe BOM Tool Palette select the Attribute Selection tool 2 Move the mouse pointer over the drawing area As soon as the pointer comes near an object with assigned attributes these attributes and their respective values are automatically displayed in the Status Line Before you can assign at tributes they must be de fined and a BOM Layout must be selected For more information about the BOM Layouts see the Bill of Ma terials Layouts section later in this chapter Before you assign Symbol Attributes you should read the section Creating Value Tables in the Symbols chapter Important Attributes must be visible in the De fine Attributes dialog box and the proper layout must be active as indicated in the Define Attributes dialog box in order to display assigned attributes in the Status Line 241 Geometric Analysis Values of attributes can also be edited in the Edit Objects dialog To do so you select the object choose Edit objects in the File menu change the value in the Edit Objects dialog and click the Apply button To delete an object with as
459. ts to this list or modify the layouts provided to meet your needs is de scribed in the next section How you create your own drawing formats for your laser printer is described later in this chapter In the Layout folder you find as well Design Layouts called Design 3 or Draft 4 These Design Layouts are only used for designing in 3D More about Design Layouts you find in the 3D Section of this manual 174 4 Make Model 1 in the Model dialog box the current model for the sheet 5 Delete Model 2 How the Sheet Into View command works The view window created with the Sheet Into View behaves like any view window created with the Detail View tool Although both view windows behave the same the Sheet Into View includes three automatic steps which are not performed when you create a view window with the Detail View tool The Sheet Into View command e creates an additional Model blank or containing a standard drawing format if selected e moves the Sheet camera to that model blank or with the drawing format to display it on the current sheet e puts all geometry including text dimensions hatching and fills on the current sheet into one or several view windows and displays it at a specific scale within the drawing format you have selected _ Model 2 automatically created with Sheet Into lew command _ lt Model 1 d Detail view matically installed View command IW N Shee
460. tter s computer The type of plotter you choose when you ate setting up the page determines the format of the plot file For example if you choose a PostScript printer the file format will be Encapsulated PostScript Basic Drafting You find a detailed descrip tion of the Sheet Into View command in the Chapter 10 Structuring Drawings It is advisable to use the Selection mask to select all text and dimensions in case you have to assign the accurate text size after scaling The Print Setup command Macintosh Page Setup allows to change the cur rent plotter or printer and to set options such as Paper Size and Paper Orientation If you want to use DraftBoard drawings in a Text Editor or Layout program the EPS file format is recommended since it offers the best quality and allows to scale the graphic after placing without any quality loss How to create an EPS file is described in Chap ter 11 DraftBoard Documents 157 Basic Drafting 158 and the HPGL language is used when you select Hewlett Packard plotters The computer that finally plots the file must have an applica tion compatible with the file format of your printer or plotter Plotting to a file under Windows 1 Choose Print command in the File menu The Print dialog box is displayed Cancel 2 Mark the Print to file option 3 Click OK The Print to file dialo
461. tton in the Dimension Editor The Dimension Text dialog box is displayed Select all the options you want to set for dimension text Click OK The Dimension Text dialog box is closed Click the Apply button if you want to assign the new settings to a selected dimension All selected dimensions are redrawn and reflect the new appear ance set in the dimension editor Arrow Size All settings for Dimension Arrows are done in the Arrow Size dialog box When you click the Arrow Size button the following dialog box is displayed Dimensions Dimension rrow eo The Arrows dialog box allows the following settings Units In this pop up menu you select the units mm or inch for all settings in the Arrows dialog box These units are only valid for the setting in the Arrows dialog box and do not affect the units you set for your drawing in the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu Arrows Size In these entry boxes you can set the size of the arrowhead either by specifying its ength height ratio ANSI or setting values for the ength of the edge and the angle of the tip of the arrowhead DIN Dot Size This value describes the diameter of circular and slash arrowheads Setting the Arrow Size 1 Select all dimensions you want to modify If no dimensions are selected all changes are valid for future dimensions 2 Choose Preferences in the Dimension menu to display the Dimension Editor 3 Drag in
462. tton only one step is calculated and displayed 15 Choose the Undo command in the Edit menu to reset the geome try on the screen In case you started the animation with the Play button all variables are reset automatically to its original values 16 Click the Reset button to reset all variables to its original values in case you started the animation with the Step button Collision Check Win WIN For a collision check you must draw at least one additional line or curve that can cause a collision with the animated part The collision geometry must be on a separate layer than the part you will animate and must be selected for the collision check in the Options dialog box of the kinematic Control Panel Before you can start the collision check you must mark the option Collision in the kinematic Control Panel For the collision check you must select the complete part including its parametric dimensions but without the collision geometry before you click the Play button 219 Symbols Creating Symbols Placing Symbols Symbol Libraries Symbols Symbols DraftBoard offers powerful functions for creating and handling symbols All symbol commands are listed in the Symbols submenu of the File menu The following section describes how to create and place symbols and the configuration of Symbol Libraries Creating Symbols In DraftBoard you can place any drawing as a symbol and open any symbol as drawing DraftBoard distingui
463. u have scaled a drawing double click in the pattern box to adjust the displayed pattern When you click Apply all selected and all future ob jects will be hatched with the settings you specified Apply Adding crosshatching 1 Select the objects which represent a closed boundary The closed boundary may include cutout areas such as a hole Select both the outside boundary and the hole 2 Choose Crosshatch from the Pen menu 3 Select the pattern you want from the crosshatch list The pattern you select appears in the Pattern display area as it will appear on the drawing 4 Change the spacing and angle if you want As you make changes to the angle or spacing the pattern box shows the revised pattern exactly as it will be when the specified object is crosshatched 5 Click Apply Specifying a Hatch Origin 1 Select the objects which represent a closed boundary The closed boundary may include cutout areas such as a hole Select both the outside boundary and the hole 2 Choose Crosshatch from the Pen menu In this entry field you can enter a value for the angle of How to add and define your own hatch pattern is de scribed at the end of Chap ter 4 Preferences and in the Appendix of this manual To crosshatch a figure that is not a closed figure you must add lines or segment lines to make a closed figure In this way you can crosshatch individual sections of the geometry See Crosshatching in the Advance
464. u select the endpoint of the line you also select the dimension control point 40 7 Pi uE Dimension control point a meme h endpoint Line Using the Dimension Tools DraftBoard s dimensioning tools are on a separate palette which you can drag around the drawing area You select dimension tools in the same way you select tools from the tool palette The first four tools have subpalettes which also work like the subpalettes of the tool palette Show Palette This command in the Dimension menu displays the dimension palette on screen Diametrial Arrow In Angular Arc Length Balloon Center Mark The dimensioning tools can be used to measure either an object or the area between objects Once you have dimensioned an object or space the dimensions update when you make changes to the geometry The first four tools on the dimension palette have subpalettes for base line and chain style dimensions Some of the dimensioning tools such as the horizontal and vertical tools require that two points be selected others such as the Radial and Diametral require only one Dimensions Dimensions are associa tive relative to the points they measure lf you change the length of a line using Edit Objects the di mension will not update because the point was not changed To correct the dimension select the dimension s vertex point and drag it to the new endpoint of the line 117 Dimens
465. u to be sure it resolves properly 4 Save the symbol When you place a parametric symbol in a drawing it is placed without all dimensions that contain a parametric variable The dimensions of parametric symbols can be modified after the symbol is placed in a drawing using the Edit objects command in the Edit menu Creating invisible Symbol parts For all elements of an objects that should not appear with the symbol when it comes into a document you must use pens with the line pattern dotted For invisible dimensions you must modify the line pattern after placing the dimensions using the Edit objects command in the Edit menu since dimensions always use a solid line pattern Creating smart symbols The Architect folder of the Symbols folder contains smart symbols for doors and windows Smart windows and doors are smart because they contain a smart wall segment When you add one of these symbols to a smart wall it breaks into the wall in the location you specify 1 Choose a pen with the line pattern dotted in the Pattern submenu from the Pen menu 2 Draw a smart wall thicker than the maximum thickness you expect to use and only as long as the final symbol will be 3 Choose a pen style for the visible elements of the symbol 4 Draw the visible parts of the symbol Invisible Wall segment with variable width and constant wall thickness drawn with a dotted line pattern The invisible wall segment has a gt i constant thi
466. ucts the Drawing Assistant to tell you when the pointer is 25 of the distance along a line as shown below point Drawing Assistant Construction Lines In addition to snapping onto geometty the Drawing Assistant also displays dynamic construction lines The three types of construction lines you use most frequently vertical horizontal and 45 angle lines display automatically during construction These construction lines appear temporarily to help you align geometry Once you ve set a point the Drawing Assistant construction line disappears your drawing is not cluttered with extraneous lines Dynamic construction lines extend automatically from the last point you created You may want to activate other points so the Drawing Assistant displays construction lines relative to them Simply move the pointer over the geometry to activate its control points then move away horizontally or vertically Of course you also have the option of creating permanent construction lines and other shapes as described later in this chapter Using the Drawing Assistant s Construction Lines If you want different After you have indicated the first endpoint of a line and you move construction line angles you can change them in the Snap dialog box from Preferences in the Layout Construction line relative to the endpoint of an existing line menu as described in the previous section the pointer horizontally vertically or in a 45 d
467. ues on the drawing area Edit additional symbols Close the Symbolmanager using the Close box in the upper right corner of the title bar Symbols When you want to indicate a layer in the Symbols dia log box where the symbol should go you must define the attribute Layer for the symbol using the Define Attributes All symbol variables and attributes can be also modified using the Edit objects command Note Depending on the symbol it can happen that after modifying a variable value it becomes impossi ble to resolve the symbol again 231 Geometric Analyses 2D Analysis Bill of Materials Geometric Analysis Geometric Analyses After you have constructed your geometry you may want to do some analysis for either engineering purposes or for the production of your design part DraftBoard includes a 2D Analysis feature as well as a Bill of Materials feature This chapter is divided into two sections to dis cuss these areas 2D Analysis The 2D Analysis provides sectional properties for the selected geometry a feature that is useful for many calculations related to design and drafting 2D Analysis This command in the Layout menu displays the statistics on the selection the length of the perimeter the enclosed area the center of gravity centroid and moments of inerfia The selection must be a closed figure When you select the 2D Analysis command the following dialog box ts displayed 2D Analysis a
468. umber Per Row The total number of objects you want in each row Be sure to include the selected object itself in this total count Editing objects X Length Y Length The X Length value determines the horizontal length of a row The Y Length value determi nes the vertical rise of the row The X Length and Y Length can be set by entering values or by clicking the mouse in the drawing atea Total Lengths The X and Y Length is the distance from the selected object to the last copy Step Lengths The X and Y Length is the distance from the selected object to the first copy Number of Rows The total Number of Rows that you want Total Offset The offset is the perpendicular distance between the row containing the selected object and the last row Step Offset The offset is the perpendicular distance between the row containing the selected object and the next row Offset The perpendicular distance setting for the Total Offset or Step Offset You can specify the Offset by entering a value or by clicking the mouse in the drawing atea Using Linear Duplicate 1 Select the object to be duplicated If you begin a duplication E and discover that it is not 2 Choose Linear Duplicate from the Edit menu what you want you can 3 Enter the number of objects per row stop the process by pressing the Escape key 4 Specify Total or Step Lengths and then choosing Undo to l remove the copies from 5 Click the X Length box your document
469. unction from the Function list box to the Function palette and displays the related icon in the palette Using this option all functions will be placed horizontally creating a sub palette for the icon displayed in the palette Palette O Main Os ub Eye m The palette shows always the icon of the last function that was moved to the palette You can display all function that are contained in the subpalette by clicking the icon and keeping the mouse button pressed As long the mouse button is pressed all icons contained in the subpalette are displayed Clear Using this commands clears the palette and moves all commands from the Palette to the Functions list box Save Clicking the Save saves the generated function palette that can be displayed with the Show Palette command in the Extra menu The new function palette is saved permanently and is available each time you launch DraftBoard Creating an additional Function palette 1 Copy the desired Source code files into the Function folder in the DraftBoard folder Source code files that contain commands and functions have the file extension fe 2 Select the Reload command in the Extra menu if you have copied the source code files in to the Function folder while DraftBoard was already running 3 Select the Add Functions command in the Extra menu The Add Functions dialog box is displayed 4 Move all functions you want to place in the palette from the Function
470. units and precision for the current DraftBoard document Selection Use this dialog box to set the color or blinking which shows that an object is selected Invert This commands changes the Background color the color of the drawing area from white to black Text Margins In this dialog box you can specify values for the Left Right Top and Bottom text margins AutoSave This dialog box allows the user to set a time interval for the program to save files Document In this dialog box the user can set document Properties properties such as Author User defined attributes or to automatically create a document Preview Drawing In this dialog box you can turn the Drawing Assistant Assistant On or Off and activate different snap modes Directories This dialog box allows the user to specify directories for the Open Save or Import command Draw Order This command activates the Draw Order that will display all objects according to the Bring to Front Setting the Environment Bring to Back command when redrawing the screen In complex drawings switching this command off can accelerate the screen redraw Visualization This dialog box gives the user the ability to choose settings for shading background color hidden line appearance and the use of the default lighting Save If you have set the characteristics you like such as Preferences units pen style and dimension format you can make those settings the default setting Choose Save
471. up Similarly the electrical layers are shown in the Electrical Layer Group but hidden in the Plumbing Layer group To create a print to go to the electrical contractor you can simply make the Electrical Layer Group be the work group This will show the layout of the house with the electrical plan contained on various electrical layers but not the plumbing information which is on the hidden plumbing layers Rather than having to Show or Hide numerous individual layers you only have to select a single Layer Group to get the format that is desired Layer Groups The Layer Groups command in the Layout menu extends the functionality of layers by creating Layer Groups A Layer Group records stores and displays layer settings which layers are shown and which layers are hidden as well as which layer is the work layer This lets you show and hide different layers quickly by selecting a single Layer Group rather than setting the attributes of numerous individual layers 163 Structuring Drawings Only visible layers can be made the work layer within a Layer Group There must be at least one Layer Group created before you can use any of the but tons other than New or change any settings for any layers You can also activate a Layer Group by double clicking the name of the Layer Group The active Layer Group is indicated by a checkmark When you open the Layer Group dia log and no Layer Group is indicated by a checkmark the c
472. urfaces Construction Rules Calculating Surfaces Visualizing Objects Exporting Surfaces Operators and Units Special Characters Data Interfaces Plotter Fonts Crosshatch Patterns DraftBoard ini Customer Services Index 201 201 205 207 210 213 21 5 223 225 226 221 235 235 25 251 25 252 252 261 265 265 Zit 271 276 283 283 286 289 297 301 304 305 308 309 310 312 315 Documentation Documentation The following manuals describe DraftBoard for Windows 98 Windows ME Windows 2000 Windows NT4 SP5 Windows XP and for the Mac Before using this manual however you will need to install DraftBoard Getting Started chapter of the Tutorial After installation we encourage The installation is described in the you to continue with the tutorial exercises included in the Tutorial This will familiarize you with the tools features and commands of DraftBoard and enable you to maximize your productivity in the shortest amount of time Manual Layout The DraftBoard documentation consists of the following e Reference Guide Getting Started and Tutorials When the user interface differs only by its appearance not by its functionality the accompanying graphics alternately display the supported platforms In cases where DraftBoard functions differently on each specific computer platform instructions are provided for each platform When a function is available on
473. urfaces Qs Curved and planar surfaces with holes 283 3D Surfaces Holes can be only calculated for three dimen sional objects An isolated surface with a hole cannot be calculated If you don t construct the cylinder step by step with lines and circles but use the Extrusion command the Extrusion Line will be automatically connected with the endpoints 284 Detailed Construction Rules for Surface Models A summaty of these rules you find at the end of this section 1 Planar Surfaces with any number of edges are supported with or without holes in the face Extruded planar NURB Surface with 13 edges one hole and one slot The Autosurfacing routine works successfully with any P lanar Surface no matter how many edges it has and if there are holes in it or not Planar Surfaces should have no geometry that would act as a seam running across the face but only geometry that either represents a boundary or a hole All geometry that connects across a face one boundary object to another or a boundary object to a hole object or runs across a hole can cause problems Auto foi seam line The front seam line causes a this autosurface problem Non Planar Surfaces are not allowed no have more than 4 edges Auto Dd The highlighted corner face has 5 edges and gets therefore ignored Any Non planar Surface that has more than 4 edges must be broken up into two separate surfaces an
474. urrent work layer set in the Layer dialog box doesn t match the setting of the last activated Layer Group Deleting the work group which is indicated by a check mark deletes the group from the list but the layer settings remain in ef fect until they are changed 164 When you select the Layer Group command from the Layout menu the following dialog box is displayed Ic Layer Groups Groups Layers Group lt a Construction lt g Dimension lt v Layerl Layer Group The Layer Groups dialog box lists the layer groups on the left and the individual layers on the right Visible layers for the selected highlight ed Layer Group are indicated in the Layer list by the Eye Symbol just as they are in the Layers dialog box Visibility can be toggled by clicking the Eye Symbol or at the location where the Eye Symbol should be for hidden layers The work layer of the selected group is set by double clicking on the desired layer from the Layer list and is indicated by a checkmark Layers that are created after a Layer Group has been defined are included in the group but are not visible The current set of visible layers and the work layer need not correspond to any layer group thus it is not necessary that a Layer Group be designated as the work group Setting a work group simply changes the model s current layer settings to those of the specified Layer Group Also if a Layer Group is designated the work
475. ve then the related Detail view camera is moved gt Model change when the Model2 View window is active lt lt Model change when the Sheet is active ee Model 2 __ Model space 1 u Views Views are the images picked up by cameras and projected on sheets DraftBoard has two types of views the Sheet View and Detail Views Detail Views Detail Views are picked up by Detail View cameras and always displayed in a view window which rests on the sheet They have boundaries and display only a limited view of the model You can create as many views as you want and move or copy and paste them to different sheets When you delete a Detai View the Detail View camera is deleted When you delete a sheet which contains a Detail View the Detail View is deleted also since the Detail View is resting on the sheet On the drawing board you start a new drawing with a blank sheet like in Draft Board Only DraftBoard needs a blank Model to display a blank Sheet view You change the current model by selecting a model in the Models dialog box and click the Current but ton 177 Structuring Drawings The Drawing Size com mand changes only the plot scale but not the scale fac tor of the Sheet view Even if the view is scaled to fit the paper format the scale factor remains 1 1 since the real size of the geome try is not affected When you change the sheet the Sheet camera is moved to the selected
476. ver a wing surface must flow smoothly for maximum aerodynamic lift If the surface does not maintain curvature continuity the air molecules separate from the wing surface and cause a vacuum Such a vacuum causes an eddy as the molecules try to fill it This disruption of air flow increases the drag which is not a part of an effective design The automotive industry also wants smooth air flow to improve gas mileage Complete curvature continuity also improves styling The appearance of a car is one of the major sales factors The potential buyer would not be impressed if the showroom lights reflection on the car rippled and wavered It is complete curvature continuity that makes a smooth reflection Localized control of complex curves allows you to make minor modifications without adversely affecting the shape For example if a new bigger engine wouldn t fit under a per fectly designed hood you could use a NURB spline to raise the center of the hood without changing the basic design Creating Geometry NURB splines are also valuable for injection mold designs to eliminate the swirl of plastic as it is injected into the mold Such designs provide better surface finishes and allow thinner cross sections in the die Through Points Spline Tool The Through Points Spline tool draws a spline through the points that you place Spline is drawn through points placed with mouse clicks 1 Using the Through Points Spline tool 1
477. version Upgrades As we continually drive our technology forward we may develop significant new features that enhance our existing offering Such developments are incorporated into a new version of the software Product Support All registered DraftBoard Customers may call directly POSH GmbH for any support issues POSH POSH GmbH Burgweg 79 63897 Miltenberg www draftboard de Telefon 49 0 93 71 65 297 Telefax 49 0 93 71 69 241 E Mail support draftboard de Index Index Symbole symbol 118 point 38 character 109 2 Entity Chamfer tool 82 2 Entity Fillet Tool 82 2 point center ellipse tool 22 2D analysis 235 3 corner ellipse tool 23 3 Entity Fillet Tool 82 3 point arc tool 20 3 point center ellipse tool 23 3 point circle 22 3 point plane 268 3D autosurface command 287 construction rules 276 defining views 254 design process 271 editing objects 277 export 297 extrude command 273 features and tools 271 isometric drafting 272 lights 294 models 251 multiple views 257 parametrics 278 revolve command 275 right hand rule 267 rotating objects command 276 shaded 289 standard views 253 surface models 283 trackball 253 triad 266 two dimensional drawings 261 view layouts 258 work plane 265 workspace 252 A add commands 63 add functions 64 add spline control point tool 27 alignment text 105 alignment angles 37 ambient light 294 analyses 235 angular chamfer tool 82 a
478. wo different ways to create models with the Sheets command in the Views menu or with the Model command in the Views menu When you create a new sheet DraftBoard automatically creates a new blank model where you can create geometry Models This command in the Views menu allows you to specify models and switch between models to project them on the current sheet You can display a single model on more than one sheet but you can only sce one model at a time on each sheet without using detail views Models Model 2 Rename Creating a new model Click New in the Models dialog box to create another model You can name the model by typing the name in the Rename entry box and clicking the Rename button Structuring Drawings Renaming a model 1 Select the name of the model from the list box 2 Type the new name 3 Click the Rename button Making a model the current model 1 Select the name from the list in the Models dialog box 2 Click the Set Work button Deleting a model 1 Select the name of the model from the list box 2 Click the Delete button When you delete a model you delete all of the geometry making up that model Relationship between Sheets and Models When you create a new model with the Model command a new model is created without creating a new sheet So it is possible to have more models than there are sheets You can only look at one model at a time in any view sheet view or
479. ws menu How Detail Views work When you create a detail view with the Detail View tool on the Tool palette or the Sheet Into View command in the Views menu you see the same model through a second camera the Detail View Camera The Detail View camera behaves like the Sheet Camera except it displays its view of the model in a View window on the sheet _ Model an mu mA Model with 1 additional Detail View camera projecting its view in its active View window All views displaying the same model are associative For example when you change the geometry on the sheet the geometry in the view window changes and vice versa When you have several views displaying the same model they have to be associative because no matter which view is active the Sheet View or any Detail View you are always editing the same model Creating Views using the Sheet Into View command The Sheet Into View command places all the geometry on a sheet including dimensions text hatching and fills into one view window the front at the scale you specify Structuring Drawings Dolum Valve 1234567 Tra Sheet Into View When you choose the Sheet Into View command the following dialog box is displayed Sheet Into View Layout A0 land 1Y vIm v AA port 1V vlm AA port AY vim Trimetric vIm S
480. xis of the plane Parametrics in 3D The parametric feature works in 3D with some restrictions You might consider its functionality as 212 D since it functions properly in all planes parallel to the current work plane The parametric mechanism has two phase 1 Inthe first phase parametrics ignore the z coordinates of the selected geometry and resolves the geometry as it does in 2D Any dimension that is not wholly in a plane parallel to x y plane is also ignored In other words the x and y coordinates are resolved and the z coordinates are not changed 2 In the second phase parametrics adjust the z coordinates as necessary All linear dimensions parallel to the z axis are examined and every point in the selected geometry is considered to define a plane parallel to x y plane The dimensions in the z direction define the required distance between the planes Unlike the first phase in the second phase parametrics is very tolerant of missing dimensions If the dimensions do not completely define the distance between any two planes then the distance is not changed In Phase II any line or arc that does not he in a plane parallel to the X Y plane is modified appropriately because the defining points are adjusted by parametrics and the line or arc is changed accordingly 3D Modelling This includes all lines parallel to the z axis and any oblique lines at any angle to all three axes Note that parametrics deals with all geometry
481. y Macintosh Return key Symbol Attribute Tool y With the Symbol Attributes tool you mark an object with a small table containing all assigned attributes iil TTT When you insert this object with the Insert Symbol command or the Symbolmanager all attributes contained in this table will be listed in the Symbol dialog box Values of unlocked attributes can be edited before the symbol is placed without the attributes table in the drawing area These Attribute tables must be created for all symbols whose attributes should be listed in the Insert Symbol dialog box or in the Symbol manager All Symbol attributes can have predefined values listed in so called value tables that are described in the Symbols chapter Assigning Symbol Attributes With the Symbol Attributes tool you place a small attribute table be sides an object that marks the object as a symbol If you open a marked symbol with the Insert Symbol command or the Symbolmanager all attributes contained in this table will be listed in the Symbol dialog box If you open it with Open command in the File menu the attributes table is brought into the drawing area together with the symbol 1 Choose the Symbol Attributes tool in the BOM Tool Palette 2 Click to place the Symbol Attributes table in an empty spot in the drawing area A table with all assigned attributes is created If the drawing contains several objects this attributes table is related to all objec
482. y can be entered each time when a drawing is saved When you activate this option the Document Attributes dialog will be displayed automati cally when you select the Save as command When you activate this option a picture of the drawing will be saved automatically with the document each time you save a drawing The Height and Width of this picture you can indicate in the respective entry fields This preview picture will be displayed automatically in the Open dialog window and can be displayed in the Windows Explorer Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog window and ignores all entries made in the Document Attributes dialog box When you click this button the dialog window is closed and all settings are saved for the current drawing Defining Document Properties 1 Select the Document Properties command in the Preferences submenu of the Layout menu The Document Attributes dialog window is displayed 2 Specify a name for the author of the drawing in the Author entry field 3 Enter into the 4 Name of Attribute fields attributes such as Drawing Number etc that should be saved with the drawing It is not necessary to specify an attribute for the original creation date DraftBoard Documents since it will be automatically saved with the document as soon as an entry is made in the Document Attributes dialog box Specify values for the defined attributes if these values don t change with each drawing If
483. yer dialog box match those of the indicated Layer Group In DraftBoard one sheet is always Current the active sheet which cannot be deleted The name of the active sheet Document Name Sheet Number is only displayed in the Title Bar if more than one sheet exists Whenever you want to print a part related to one project separately create a new sheet You can also type a name and then click the New button 165 Structuring Drawings Note The current sheet cannot be deleted Detail Views are described later in this chapter See Models in the next section of this chapter for more information on how models work Any combination of geometry such as lines arcs circles dimensions text etc you create with any of the creation tools in the Tool palette or any tools in the Dimension palette is a Model It may be difficult to imagine that when you draw in DraftBoard two dimensional geometry that this geometry is created in a three dimensional Model Space It is easier to think of that model space as a thin pane of glass where all geometry is created An image of everything that is placed on that pane of glass is continuously projected on the current sheet You can also type a name and then click the New button 166 Deleting a sheet 1 Select the name of the sheet from the list box 2 Click the Delete button When you delete a sheet you delete only the sheet including all Dezaz Views
484. you automatically create a blank model similar to the drafting board when you start with a clean sheet Independent of how many models exist you can delete all sheets but one the current sheet since DraftBoard needs at least one sheet to display the models even if they are blank When you delete a sheet all Detail Views resting on that sheet are deleted You can display as many Detail Views as you want on one sheet but only one sheet Sheet View at a time When you change the current sheet the related model is always activated You can change this relation only by assigning another model to that sheet Models A Model is a collection of geometry dimensions text fills and hatching Models are placed in an infinite three dimensional area A model can be blank then we call it Model space just as it is when you launch DraftBoard and look at a blank sheet Images of models are picked up by either the Sheet camera or by Detail View cameras and projected on the sheet The view of the Sheet camera is called a Sheet View and the views of the Detail cameras are called Detail Views You can create and delete as many models as you want Models exist independent from the sheets and views When you change the current model you move the related camera The camera you move depends on what is active the sheet or the detail view If the sheet is active the Sheet camera is moved to the current model if the detail view is acti
485. you open a new DraftBoard document the drawing area is a sheet that is infinitely large so that you can design anything at full size For a simplistic example here s how to draw and view a line 24 meters long 1 Draw a line 2 For the Length of the line type 24 m in the Length field of the status line The line extends off the screen 3 Choose Zoom All from the Arrange menu The entire 24 meter line is visible on the screen While zooming DraftBoard calculates the scale required to display the line at its full length on the screen When you zoom again Draft Board doesn t use the scaled length to calculate the new scale this would lead to scaling mistakes the more often you scale but its original true length saved in the DraftBoard database The Zooming commands allow you to create accurate full scale drawings and display them at the magnification required Paper Size and Drawing Scale Before you can check if your drawing can be printed at full size on a specific paper format you have to specify a paper size and orientation for your installed printer or plotter Specifying the paper size To specify a paper size you choose the Print setup command Macintosh Page setup Print Setup This command in the File menu allows you to select a printer set the page size orientation and other options Setting up the page WIN 1 Select Print Setup in the File menu The following the dialog box is displayed rin p Printer
486. ze 5 Click OK The whole object geometry is scaled and displayed in an independent view window 6 Add Text and Dimensions Text and dimensions are placed unscaled at true size Since the options Keep Text Size and Keep Dimension Text Size are not available with the Sheet Into View command you must select all text and dimensions and assign their text size again Printing or Plotting a Drawing DraftBoard prints and plots on most printers and plotters supported by your computer After you have followed the manufacturer s instruc tions for installing and setting up the printer or plotter you can size your drawing for the paper you will be using Print Ctrl P Macintosh P This command in the File menu prints or plots the current document as specified in Print Setup Macintosh Page Setup The area printed or plotted is the portion that fits on the page size when the origin 0 0 is placed in the center of the page Use the Drawing Size command from the Layout menu to reposition the print plot region By repositioning the printing plotting region it is possible to print only part of a drawing since the only part that is printed is the part that lies within the printing region Plotting to a file You can plot to a file rather than to a plotter or printer In that way you don t have to have a plotter attached to your computer you can have someone else plot the drawing without having a copy of Draft Board on the plo

DraftBoard Unlimited : Reference Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents